Electra Elite IPK System Hardware Manual

Electra Elite IPK System Hardware Manual
NOTICE
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or
printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the
document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the
capability to print the document correctly.
SYSTEM HARDWARE MANUAL
INT-1025 (IPK)
Document Revision 4
(Release 4000/4500)
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications,
functions, or features at any time without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its
employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written
approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite IPK is a
registered trademark of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation. AT&T is a registered trademark of AT&T Wireless
Services, Inc.
Copyright 2005
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development
Preface
___________________________________________________________________________________
GENERAL
INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC Electra Elite IPK System.
The feature-rich Electra Elite IPK key system provides over 200 features including
Computer Telephony Integration, Least Cost Routing, Automatic Call Distribution, T1,
ISDN-BRI Voice Trunks, ISDN-PRI Voice Trunks, Voice over Internet Protocol, and
many others.
The Electra Elite IPK system provides the customer needs today, and as business
expands the system can be expanded to grow as well.
The Electra Elite IPK system has a set of manuals that provide all the information
necessary to install and support the system. This preface describes these manuals.
THIS MANUAL
This manual contains detailed instructions to install the Electra Elite IPK KSUs, ETUs,
Multiline Terminals, and optional equipment in the following chapters.
Chapter 1 – Regulatory Information
This chapter provides important regulatory information.
Chapter 2 – Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of the Electra Elite IPK system.
Chapter 3– System Specifications
This chapter contains detailed specifications for the Electra Elite IPK system and
should be carefully reviewed by the technician before installing the system.
Chapter 4 – Hardware Requirements
This chapter contains the hardware requirements for the Electra Elite IPK system and
should be read by the technician before installing the system.
Chapter 5 – Installing KSUs
This chapter contains the information necessary for installing the basic and expansion
KSUs. The technician should become familiar with this section before starting
installation.
Chapter 6 – Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
This chapter contains instructions to install the Electronic Telephone Units (ETUs) in
the Basic and Expansion KSUs.
Chapter 7 – Installing Electra Elite IPK KSU Common Optional Equipment
This chapter provides information regarding Music on Hold, Station Background
Music and external paging.
Chapter 8 – Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
This chapter describes the Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that can be used with
the Electra Elite IPK system and provides installation instructions for each telephone.
Chapter 9 – Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
This chapter contains installation instructions for Electra Elite IPK optional equipment
that can be added to the system as a customer’s business grows.
Chapter 10– Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
This chapter describes the available Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be used
with theElectra Elite IPK system and provides installation instructions for each
telephone.
Chapter 11 – Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
This chapter contains installation instructions for installing Electra Elite optional
equipment that can be added to the Electra Elite IPK as a customer’s business grows.
Chapter 12 – Installing Single Line Telephones
This chapter describes the single line telephones that are compatible with the Electra
Elite IPK system. Installation instructions are provided where necessary.
Chapter 13 – Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
This chapter describes the cordless and wireless telephones that are compatible with
the Electra Elite IPK system and provides installation instructions where necessary.
Chapter 14 – System Maintenance
This chapter is a guide to help the technician troubleshoot and diagnose problems
during and after system installation.
Appendix A – Glossary of Abbreviations
This chapter provides a list of commonly used abbreviations that are found
throughout the manual.
SUPPORTING
DOCUMENTS
Other manuals in the set are described below.
Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual
This manual describes each available feature for the system.
Electra Elite IPK General Description Manual
This manual contains general information about the system features, configuration
and standards. This overview of the Electra Elite IPK system is useful when
presenting information to potential customers.
Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual
This manual contains all programming instructions for the Electra Elite IPK system.
Electra Elite IPK Job Specifications Manual
This manual contains job specification worksheets. Completing the worksheets
provides all system programming values and configuration information necessary for
technicians to maintain the system.
Electra Elite IPK and Electra Elite System Administration Terminal End-User
Manual
This manual describes the operation of the SAT End-User program for the Electra
Elite IPK and Electra Elite key telephone systems. This program is a user-friendly
Windows application that allows the user to program and configure several features of
the Electra Elite IPK KTS from the PC environment.
Electra Elite IPK and Electra Elite System Administration Terminal Technician
Manual
This manual describes the operation of the SAT Technician program for the Electra
Elite IPK and Electra Elite key telephone systems. This program is a user-friendly
Windows application that allows the technician to program and configure the features
of the Electra Elite IPK KTS using a PC.
Electra Elite IPK Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual
This manual provides information for installing and programming the Key-Common
Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) System.
Electra Elite IPK Wireless System Manual
This manual describes the system and provides hardware installation and
programming procedures for the Electra Elite IPK Wireless Communication System
(WCS).
Electra Elite IPK and Electra Elite Least Cost Routing Manual
This manual provides instructions to the service technician for programming the
customer site for least cost routing for Electra Elite IPK and Electra Elite key
telephone systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 1-1
Section 2
Company Notification .................................................................................... 1-1
Section 3
Incidence of Harm .......................................................................................... 1-2
Section 4
Radio Frequency Interference ....................................................................... 1-3
Section 5
Hearing Aid Compatibility ............................................................................. 1-3
Section 6
Direct Inward Dialing ...................................................................................... 1-3
Section 7
Voice Announcement/Monitoring Over DID Lines ...................................... 1-4
Section 8
Music On Hold ................................................................................................ 1-4
Section 9
Service Requirements .................................................................................... 1-4
Section 10
UL Regulatory Information ............................................................................ 1-4
Section 11
Industry Canada Requirements .................................................................... 1-5
Section 12
Battery Disposal ............................................................................................. 1-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List Of tables
Chapter 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-1
FIC, REN, SOC, and Jack Types for Electra Elite IPK System ETUs ........................ 1-2
Table 1-2
Battery Types and Quantities for KSUs and ETUs ..................................................... 1-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Tables
Regulatory Information
Chapter 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Established Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules permit this telephone
system to be directly connected to the telephone network. A jack is provided by the
telephone company. Jacks for this type of customer provided equipment are not
provided on party lines or coin lines.
The telephone company may change technical operations and procedures. When
such changes affect the compatibility or use of the Electra Elite IPK system, the
telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes.
SECTION 2
COMPANY NOTIFICATION
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the following
information must be provided to the telephone company:
1.
Your telephone Number.
2.
FCC registration number:
H
When the system is to be installed as a Key Function system (no dial
access to Trunk Groups/Route Advance Blocks), use the following
number:
NIFMUL-43074-KF-E
H
When the system is to be installed as a Multifunction system, use the
following number:
NIFMUL-43076-MF-E
H
When the system is to be installed as a PBX system, use the following
number:
NIFMUL-43075-PF-E
H
H
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 2.0B
USOC jacks required: RJ21X and RJ2GX
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
1-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Facility Interface Code (FIC), Ringer Equivalent Number (REN), Service Order
Code (SOC), and Jack for each interface ETU are listed in the following table:
Table 1-1 FIC, REN, SOC, and Jack Types for Electra Elite IPK System ETUs
Trunk/Station ETU Type
FIC
REN
SOC
Jack
02IS5
N/A
6.0F
N/A
02RV-O
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COI(4)-U( ) ETU (Loop Start)
02LS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COI(8)-U( ) ETU (Loop Start)
02LS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COI(8)-U( ) ETU (Ground Start)
02GS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COIB(4)-U(10) ETU for COI/COID
Mode (Loop Start)
02LS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COIB(4)-U(10) ETU for COI Mode
(Ground Start)
02GS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COIB(4)-U(20) ETU for COID/COI
Mode (Loop Start)
02LS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
COIB(8)-U( ) ETU for COI/COID
Mode (Loop Start)
02LS2
0.7A
9.0F
RJ21X
02RV2T
N/A
9.0F
RJ21X
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
N/A
6.0P
N/A
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
0L13C
N/A
9.0F
RJ21X
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
04DU9-1SN
N/A
6.0P
N/A
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
TL31M
N/A
9.0F
RJ21X
BRT(4)-U( ) ETU
CAMA Trunk
DID(4)-U( ) ETU
DTI-U( ) ETU
SECTION 3
INCIDENCE OF HARM
When the system is malfunctioning, it could harm the telephone network. The
telephone system should be disconnected until the problem can be determined and
repair is made. When this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2
Regulatory Information
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:
IMPORTANT NOTE
“This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed
and used in accordance with the System Hardware Manual, may cause interference to radio
communications. This equipment has been tested and approved for compliance with the limits
for a Class B (except as noted below) computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of
FCC Rules, that provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment. Operation of this telephone system in a residential area is likely to
cause interference, in which case, the user, at his or her own expense, is required to take
whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.”
When equipped with the B64-U30 KSU and P64-U20 PSU, the Electra Elite IPK can be
operated as a Class B device except when using one of the ETUs in the following table.
The system then becomes a Class A device that may not be used in a residential area.
ACD(8)-U10
CMS(2)/(4)-U30
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U30
IPCA( )-U10
CCH(4)-U-10
EXPT(2)-U10
HUB(8)-U10
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U30
SPE(M)-U( )
SECTION 5
HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
The NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones provided for this
system are hearing aid compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line
Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to
comply with FCC rules that prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
SECTION 6
DIRECT INWARD DIALING
Operating this equipment without providing proper answer supervision is a violation of
Part 68 of the FCC rules.
Proper Answer Supervision occurs when:
This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) when Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls are:
H
J
J
J
J
Answered by the called station.
Answered by the Attendant.
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the
Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) user.
Routed to a dial prompt.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
1-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Permissible exceptions are:
J
J
J
SECTION 7
A call is unanswered.
A busy tone is received.
A reorder tone is received.
VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING OVER DID LINES
CAUTION
The use of monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve or record
telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its
transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advise
should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to
the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods, or
require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or
recording a telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
SECTION 8
MUSIC ON HOLD
IMPORTANT NOTE
"In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society
of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, when radio or TV
broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication
system. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to
obtain such a license."
SECTION 9
SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
When equipment malfunctions, all repairs will be performed by NEC Unified
Solutions, Inc. or by an authorized agent. The user must report the need for service
to an NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
SECTION 10
UL REGULATORY INFORMATION
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and complies with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment UL 1459.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4
Regulatory Information
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 11
INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS
Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be directly
connected to the telephone network. Prior to the connection or disconnection of this
telephone system to or from the telephone network, the telephone company must be
provided with the following information.
1. Your telephone number:
2. IC Certificate number: 140 7942 A
3. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment: 2.1
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and
safety requirements as prescribed in the applicable Terminal Equipment Technical
requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee that equipment
operates to user satisfaction.
Before installation, the user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this
equipment to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer
should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated
by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, when
present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in
rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
applicable electric inspection authority, or electrician.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a
telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination
of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalent
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
This equipment is listed by the Canadian Standards Association and complies with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment C 22.2 No. 225.
This equipment meets IC requirements CS03.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
1-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions
from digital apparatus as regulated by the radio interference regulations of Industry
Canada.
Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A prescrites dans le
reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par Industrie Canada.
SECTION 12
BATTERY DISPOSAL
The Electra Elite IPK system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of
these batteries, KSUs, and/or ETUs, you must comply with applicable federal and
state regulations regarding proper disposal procedures.
Table 1-2 Battery Types and Quantities for KSUs and ETUs
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
Lead Acid
2
Nickel-Cadmium
1
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
Lithium
1
IVR(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( )
Lithium
1
DTP-1HM-1 TEL
DTP-1HM-2 TEL
Lithium
1
DTP-16HC-1 TEL
Nickel-Cadmium
1
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
Lithium
1
DTH-4R-1/2 TEL
Nickel-Cadmium
1
DTR-4R-1/2 TEL
Nickel-Cadmium
1
Lead Acid
1
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
Nickel-Cadmium
1
MIFA-U10 ETU
Nickel-Cadmium
1
MIFM-U10 ETU
Nickel-Cadmium
1
Lithium
1
B64-U20 KSU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
DTU-4R-1 TEL
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
The Electra Elite IPK CPUI( )-U( ) ETU provides memory backup for approximately
21 days. The Ni-Cd battery should be replaced about every two years.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-6
Regulatory Information
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE PRODUCT
YOU PURCHASED CONTAINS A NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD
BATTERY. NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE
COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR DISPOSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with
the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact
your local solid waste management officials for other information regarding the
environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of the battery.
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state
approved nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where the
batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive batteries. Contact your
local waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally
sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained in this product. For
Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM if further information is
required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
1-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The packaging for the Electra Elite IPK system contains the following labels regarding
proper disposal.
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-Cd
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Pb
CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE
BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-MH
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8
Regulatory Information
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 2-1
1.1
Unique Design ............................................................................................. 2-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-1
System Configuration Example .................................................................................. 2-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures
Introduction
Chapter 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1
Unique Design
The Electra Elite IPK system is a powerful key system that meets the ever
changing business communications demands of today. Unique compact
design allows it to be easily and quickly installed.
The Electra Elite IPK system can grow with your business. You can easily and
economically increase port size when necessary. Two expansion units can be
added when the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU is installed in the basic cabinet. A full-blown
system includes the basic and two expansion units.
Electra Elite IPK is a feature-rich system that provides telephone functions
and supports advanced features such as:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Automatic Number Indication (ANI)/Caller ID
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Route Selection
Caller ID Call Return
Centralized Voice Mail
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Dialed Number Indication Service (DNIS)
Dterm Analog Cordless Terminal
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Handset Cordless
Dterm Headset Cordless
Emergency 911 – Cut Through
Enhanced 911
Integrated Digital Voice Mail
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
2-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI Voice Trunks
K-CCIS Common Channel Interoffice Signaling
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Live Monitoring
Live Record
Multiline Conference Bridge
Multilingual LCD Indication
Multiple Music on Hold Using CO Interface
PC Attendant Console
Unified Messaging
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Wireless
The Electra Elite IPK system offers a variety of compatible 8-line, 16-line, and
32-line Multiline Terminals with/without LCD. A 2-line non-LCD terminal and a
60-line Attendant Console are also available.
A customer with existing Electra Elite terminals can easily connect them to the
Electra Elite IPK system to provide inexpensive migration. Most Electra Elite
IPK system features are available with the Electra Elite Multiline Terminals.
The Electra Elite IPK system supports a wide range of additional equipment
such as Single Line Telephones, external speakers, facsimile machines,
external microphones, and headsets that can be connected to the system to
accommodate individual customer needs. The diagram in Figure 2-1 System
Configuration Example shows an Electra Elite IPK system with standard and
optional equipment (some locally provided).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-2
Introduction
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Wireless
PS II
External
Speakerphone
Message
Display Board
Least Cost Routing
External
Speaker
ZT II
Computer Telephony Integration
ElectraMail CTI (Unified Messaging)
Electra Elite Multiline Terminal (DTU)
Dterm Series E Multiline Terminal (DTP)
Automatic Call Distribution
PC Programming
Headset
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals (DTH)
Dterm
Series i Multiline Terminal (DTR)
Dterm IPK (ITH) IP Terminals
Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Answering Machine
Facsimile
CO/PBX/Centrex/DID
/Tie/FT1/ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI
Single Line
Telephone
Attendant
Console
ITH IP Stations
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Trunks/Stations
Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus
(Telecommuting)
Dterm Cordless Lite II
Dterm Headset Cordless
Dterm Handset Cordless
Dterm Cordless Lite
Dterm Analog Cordless
Dterm Cordless II
Figure 2-1 System Configuration Example
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
2-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-4
Introduction
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 3-1
Section 2
System Block Diagram .................................................................................. 3-1
Section 3
Maximum System Capacities ........................................................................ 3-5
Section 4
KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations .............................................. 3-9
Section 5
System Requirements and Specifications ................................................. 3-10
5.1
Cabling Requirements and Specifications ................................................ 3-10
5.2
Cabling Precautions .................................................................................. 3-14
5.3
5.2.1
Cable Placement ............................................................................................ 3-14
5.2.2
Environmental Conditions ............................................................................... 3-14
Power Requirements ................................................................................. 3-14
5.3.1
Power Supply Inputs ....................................................................................... 3-14
5.3.2
Power Supply Consumption ........................................................................... 3-14
5.4
Outside Line Types ................................................................................... 3-15
5.5
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications .................................. 3-16
5.6
5.5.1
Transmission .................................................................................................. 3-16
5.5.2
Network ........................................................................................................... 3-16
5.5.3
Control ............................................................................................................ 3-16
5.5.4
Electra Elite IPK Terminals and Equipment .................................................... 3-17
5.5.5
Series i Terminals ........................................................................................... 3-18
Dialing Specifications ................................................................................ 3-18
5.6.1
Dial Pulse Address Signaling .......................................................................... 3-18
5.6.2
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling ................................... 3-18
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.7
Battery Backup ......................................................................................... 3-19
5.7.1
System Backup ............................................................................................... 3-19
5.7.2
Memory Backup .............................................................................................. 3-19
5.8
Weights and Dimensions .......................................................................... 3-20
5.9
External Equipment Interface ................................................................... 3-26
5.10
5.9.1
Music on Hold/Station Background Music ...................................................... 3-26
5.9.2
Music for Station BGM using Analog CO Trunk ETU (COI, COIB, or COID) . 3-26
5.9.3
External Paging (Audio) .................................................................................. 3-26
5.9.4
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output ..................................................... 3-26
5.9.5
SMDR Output ................................................................................................. 3-26
5.9.6
PC Connection ................................................................................................ 3-26
5.9.7
ACD/MIS Connector ....................................................................................... 3-26
5.9.8
Relay Contact ................................................................................................. 3-26
Audible and Visual Indications ................................................................. 3-27
5.10.1 Tone Patterns ................................................................................................. 3-27
5.10.2 LED Flash Patterns ......................................................................................... 3-27
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List Of figures and tables
Chapter 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-1
List of Abbreviations ................................................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-1
System Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 3-4
Table 3-2
Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface ETUs ........................................... 3-5
Table 3-3
Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface ETUs ............................................. 3-6
Table 3-4
Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface ETUs .................................... 3-7
Table 3-5
For Systems Without EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU Loaded with
Q-Master Application .................................................................................................. 3-9
Table 3-6
For Systems with EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU Loaded with Q-Master Application 3-10
Table 3-7
Electra Elite IPK/Dterm Series i Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and
Cable Length ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Table 3-8
Electra Elite/Dterm Series E Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance
and Cable Length .....................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-2
Connecting the ESI Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable ...................................................... 3-12
Table 3-9
Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line Equipment .......... 3-13
Table 3-10
Cabling Requirements ..............................................................................................3-13
Table 3-11
Zone Transceiver II Range ....................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-12
Power Consumption ................................................................................................. 3-15
Table 3-13
Fuse Replacement ................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-14
Weights and Dimensions ..........................................................................................3-20
Table 3-15
Tone Patterns ........................................................................................................... 3-28
Table 3-16
Multiline Terminal LED Flash Patterns ..................................................................... 3-29
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures and Tables
System Specifications
Chapter 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter provides detailed specifications for the Electra Elite IPK system
technician. The technician should review this information carefully before installing
the system.
SECTION 2
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 3-1 System Block Diagram shows the ETUs that can be installed in the KSU
and the number of channels supported when the ETU is installed. Table 3-1 List of
Abbreviations lists abbreviations used in the diagram.
Table 3-1 List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
AMP
Amplifier
APR
Analog Port Ringer
BRT
Basic Rate Trunk Interface
BSU
Base Station Unit
CCH
Common Channel Handler (K-CCIS)
CNF
Multiline Conference Bridge
COI
Central Office Interface
COIB
Central Office Interface (COI/COID mode)
COID
Central Office Interface with Caller ID
COM
Communication
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CTA
Computer Telephony Adapter
CTI/VP, FMS,
VMS,CMS/IVR
Voice Mail
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued)
Abbreviation
Description
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DPH
Doorphone
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface
ECR
External Control Relay
ETU
Electronic Telephone Unit
ESI
Electronic Station Interface
FT1
Fractional T1
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
HFU
Handsfree Unit
HUB
Optional Hub Ethernet Interface
IAD
Optional Integration Device
IPCA
Pure IP Switch
IPT
Internet Protocol Trunk for VoIP
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
LAN
Local Area Network
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
MG
Gateway Between IPCA( )-U10 ETU and
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
MIC
Microphone
MIFA, MIFM
Multipurpose Interface
MOH
Music On Hold
OPX
Off-Premise Extension
PBR
Push Button Receiver
PC
Personal Computer
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PKU
Port Key Unit
PRT
Primary Rate Trunk
PS II
Personal Station (Wireless Terminal)
SLI
Single Line Interface
SLT
Single Line Telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-2
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued)
Abbreviation
Description
SPE
Single Point of Entry
SPK
Speaker
TLI
Tie Line Interface
VM
Voice Mail
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
VRS
Voice Recording Service
ZT II
Zone Transceiver
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Package Control Path
(HDLC)
Analog
VM
SLI(4)(8)
HF-R
AP(A)
AP(R)
CT(A)
PC
COIB(4)/(8)
CO Line /
CO Line with Caller ID
COID(4)/(8)
CO Line with Caller ID
CT(U)
BSU(2)
ZTII for Wireless
CCH(4)
K-CCIS (C Channel Handler)
BRT(4)
ISDN BRI
PRT(1)-U( )
ISDN PRI
DID(4)
Analog DID Line
TLI(2)
E&M Tie Lines (4-wire)
DPH(4)
Electra
Elite
IPK
and
Dterm
Series i
Terminals
AD(A)
Modem
CO Line
ECR
DPH
Tape
Recorder
COI(4)/(8)
OPX(2)
SLT
AMP/SPK
Audio
Relay
MIC
Voice Path
(PCM Highway)
CTA
PC
CTU(S)
APA
Modem
APR
HFU
MIC
Electra
Elite
Terminals
EISB(8)
ESIE(8)
T1/FT1 Lines
MIFA
COM Port (3)
MIFM MODEM
ADA
Tape
Recorder
DTI-U( )
ESI(8)
SPE(M)
CNF(8)
Electra Mail
Electra Mail CTI
SLT
COM Port (1 & 2)
Conference Bridge
CTI/VP/IVR,
FMS, VMS,
CMS
Digital Voice Mail
ACD(8)
Elite ACD Plus
VRS(4)
Announcement/A.A.
PBR( )
DTMF Senders/Receivers
HUB(8)
Optional Ethernet Interface
IAD(8)
VoIP (Station/Trunk)
IPT(4)/(8)
VoIP (Trunk)
SLT ADP
PC
PCT(S)
IPCA()-U10
)IPCA(
MG(8)-U10
IP Stations
MOH
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
SPK
CLKG-U( )
IP Network (LAN)
Dterm
IPK
(ITH)
AD(A)-2R
Tape
Recorder
Figure 3-1 System Block Diagram
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-4
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
MAXIMUM SYSTEM CAPACITIES
The maximum capacities available in the Electra Elite IPK system are shown Table
3-2 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface ETUs, Table 3-3 Maximum
System Capacities for Trunk Interface ETUs and Table 3-4 Maximum System
Capacities for Application Interface ETUs.
Table 3-2 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface ETUs
Maximum Capacities
Station Interface
ETUs
Description
Basic Port
Package
Expanded
Port
Package
Notes
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port ACD System
1
1
Note 1, 7, 10
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
2- or 4-Port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 1, 3, 4, 5
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Conference Unit
2
2
Note 1, 8, 9
CTI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
4- or 8-Port Digital CTI System
1
1
Note 1, 4, 5,
10
CTI(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
12- or 16-Port Digital CTI System
1
1
Note 1, 4, 5, 6,
10
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Electronic Station Interface
4
15
Note 1, 10
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Electronic Station Interface
4
15
Note 1, 2, 10
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU with
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
16-Port Electronic Station Interface
2
7
Note 1, 2, 10
FMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
2- or 4-Port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 1, 3, 4, 5
FMS(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 1, 4, 5
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
2-Port Off-Premise Extension
Interface
6
22
Note 1, 3
SLI(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port Single Line Interface
6
22
Note 1, 10
SLI(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Single Line Interface
3
14
Note 1, 10
SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port Single Line Interface
6
22
Note 1, 10
SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU with
SLIE(4)-U( ) ETU
installed
8-Port Single Line Interface
3
14
Note 1, 10
VMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
2- or 4-Port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 1, 3, 4, 5,
10
VMS(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 1, 4, 5,
10
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-2 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface ETUs (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Station Interface
ETUs
Description
Basic Port
Package
Expanded
Port
Package
Notes
VP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
4- or 8-Port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 1, 4, 5,
10
VP(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
12- or 16-Port Digital Voice Mail
System
1
1
Note 1, 4, 5, 6,
10
Note 1:
Calculating maximum capacities are based on the system having a minimum of eight Electronic Station Interface
(ESI) ports and four trunk ports.
Note 2:
When seven ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs with seven ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs are installed, eight additional station ports are
available.
Note 3:
When 2-port Station Interface ETUs are installed, the system uses four ports from its maximum port capacity.
Note 4:
Only one CMS, FMS, VMS, VMP, VP, CTI, IVR system can be installed in one Electra Elite IPK system.
Note 5:
A maximum of 32 Digital Voice Mail ports are available in Memory Block 7-2 (Telephone Type Assignment).
Note 6:
Two physical Interface Slots are used for the EliteMail VP 12/16-port system and the EliteMail CTI 12/16-port
system.
Note 7:
The ACD(8)-U( ) ETU is assigned as VMS 8 in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment), and as Digital
VM in Memory Block 7-2 (Telephone Type Assignment).
Note 8:
The CNF(8)-U( ) ETU is assigned as SLI 8 in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment), and as YS (VM)
in Memory Block 4-35 (Voice Mail/SLT Selection).
Note 9:
A maximum of 16 analog Voice Mail ports are available in Memory Block 4-35 (Voice Mail/SLT Selection).
Note 10:
Refer to the KSU power-based ETU quantity limitations in Table 3-5 For Systems Without EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI
ETU Loaded with Q-Master Application and Table 3-6 For Systems with EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU Loaded with QMaster Application.
Table 3-3 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface ETUs
Maximum Capacities
Trunk Interface
ETUs
Description
Basic Port
Package
Expanded
Port Package
Notes
BRT(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port ISDN Interface for 8 trunks
2
8
Note 1
COI(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port CO/PBX Line Interface
4
16
Note 1
COI(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port CO/PBX Line Interface
2
8
Note 1
COIB(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port (COI or COID) CO/PBX Line
Interface
4
14
Note 1, 5
COIB(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port (COI or COID) CO/PBX Line
Interface
2
8
Note 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-6
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-3 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface ETUs (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Trunk Interface
ETUs
Description
Basic Port
Package
Expanded
Port Package
Notes
DID (4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port Direct Inward Dialing Interface
4
16
Note 1
DTI-U( ) ETU
T1/FT1 Trunk Interface
4
8
Note 1, 3, 4, 5
EXPT(2)-U ETU
T1/FT1 Trunk Interface
1
1
Note 1, 6
IPT(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Port Voice over Internet Protocol
Trunk Interface
4
14
Note 1, 5
IPT(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Voice over Internet Protocol
Trunk Interface
2
7
Note 1
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
ISDN-Primary Rate Trunk Interface
4
8
Note 1, 3, 4, 5
TLI (2)-U( ) ETU
2-Port Tie Line Interface
4
16
Note 1, 2
Note 1:
Calculating maximum capacities are based on the system having a minimum of eight Electronic Station Interface
(ESI) ports and four Trunk ports.
Note 2:
When 2-port Trunk Interface ETUs are installed, the system uses four ports from its maximum port capacity.
Note 3:
With the Basic Port Package, a maximum of four DTI-U( ) ETUs, PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs, or a combination of both can be
installed. If four DTI or PRT ETUs or a combination of both are installed, up to four trunks each can be assigned.
Note 4:
With the Expanded Port Package, a maximum of eight DTI-U( ) or PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs, or a combination of both can
be installed. When eight DTI or PRT ETUs or a combination of both are installed, up to eight trunks each can be
assigned.
Note 5:
With the Electra Elite IPK Expanded Port Package, a maximum of 14 of the following 4-port trunk-type interface
ETUs can be installed:
H
H
H
H
Note 6:
COIB(4)-U( ) ETU [installed as COID(4)-U( ) ETU]
DTI-U( ) ETU (installed as DTI4)
IPT(4)-U( ) ETU [installed as COID(4)-U( ) ETU or DTI4]
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU (installed as PRT4)
The EXPT(2)-U ETU is assigned as a DTI8 in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment).
Table 3-4
Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface ETUs
Maximum Capacities
Application
Interface ETUs
Description
Basic Port
Package
Expanded
Port Package
BSU(2)-U10 ETU
2-Channel - Base Station Unit for
Wireless
8
8
BSU(4M)-U20 ETU
Master 4-Base Station Unit for
Wireless
1
1
Notes
Notes 6, 7
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-4
Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface ETUs (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Application
Interface ETUs
Description
Basic Port
Package
Expanded
Port Package
BSU(2S)-U20 ETU
Slave 2-Base Station Unit for Wireless
2
2
Notes 6, 7
BSU(6S)-U20 ETU
Slave 6-Base Station Unit for Wireless
2
2
Notes 6, 7
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Channel - Common Channel
Handler (CCH) for K-CCIS
1
1
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Channel - Door Phone Interface Unit
1
1
ECR-U( ) ETU
External Control Relay Unit
1
1
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Port Switching HUB
1
1
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU
Optional Interface Integration Device
4
8 for DTI
15 for ESI
IVR Application
Interactive Voice Response System to
Support IVR Application
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU
Pure IP Switch
1
1
MG(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Path Gateway from (IPCA( )-U10
ETU to CPUI( )-U( ) ETU.
1
1
Note 4
MIFA-U( ) ETU
Multiple Interface Unit for UCD/ACD
1
1
Note 1, 3
MIFM-U10 ETU
Multiple Interface Unit for Multifunction
1
1
Note 1, 2
MIFM-U20 ETU
Multiple Interface Unit for Multifunction
1
1
Note 1, 2, 5
PBR( )-U( ) ETU
4-Channel - Push Button Receiver Unit
1
1
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
Single Point of Entry
1
1
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Channel - Voice Recording Service
Unit
2
2
Notes
Note 4
Note 5
Note 1, 2, 5
Note 1:
The MIFM-U( ), MIFA-U( ), or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU must be installed in the AP slot, slot S1, or slot S2 of the first
B64-U( ) KSU.
Note 2:
The MIFM-U( ) ETU/SPE(M)-U( ) ETU has an optional modem that works only when the MIFM/SPE(M) ETU is
installed in slot S1 or slot S2 of the first B64-U( ) KSU.
Note 3:
The MIFA-U( ) ETU (with KMA(1.0)U installed) has an ACD-MIS output that works only when the MIFA-U( ) ETU
is installed in the AP slot. When ACD-MIS and remote SAT PC programming are required, install the ACD-MIS
in the AP slot and the MIFM-U( ) ETU in slot S1 or slot S2 of the first B64-U( ) KSU.
Note 4:
R1500 or higher is required.R3000/3500 is required.
Note 5:
R3000/3500 is required.
Note 6:
R4000/4500 only.
Note 7:
A maximum of one BSU(M) Master and two BSU(2S)/(6S) Slave ETUs can be installed
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-8
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
KSU POWER-BASED ETU QUANTITY LIMITATIONS
Refer to Table 3-5 For Systems Without EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU Loaded with
Q-Master Application, and Table 3-6 For Systems with EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU
Loaded with Q-Master Application.
Table 3-5
For Systems Without EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU Loaded with
Q-Master Application
Number of
ESI(8) ETUs ,
Number of
ESI Ports
Either
EliteMail VP
or CTI
Maximum NO. of
ACD+/CMS/FMS/VMS/
VMP/IPC/MG/IVR/IPT/
IAD/SLI/OPX/BSU(4M)/
BSU(2S)/BSU(6S) or
DID ETUs
10
80
0
2
No Limitation
9
72
0
2
No Limitation
8
64
0
3
No Limitation
7
56
0
4
No Limitation
6
48
0
5
No Limitation
5
40
0
5
No Limitation
4
32
0
6
No Limitation
3
24
0
6
No Limitation
2
16
0
7
No Limitation
1
8
0
7
No Limitation
,
Other ETUs
The number of 8-port ETUs installed Including ESI(8)-U( ) ETU, ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU, or
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.
When the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or MIFM-U20 with Ethernet option is installed in the AP slot, the
HUB or EliteMail CTI/VP must be installed in a different cabinet.
Only one CTI ETU can be installed in a KSU (EliteMail, VP, or Q-Master).
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-6
Number of
ESI(8) ETUs ,
Number of
ESI Ports
Either
EliteMail VP
or CTI
Maximum NO. of
ACD+/CMS/FMS/VMS/
VMP/IPC/MG/IVR/IPT/
IAD/SLI/OPX/BSU(4M)/
BSU(2S)/BSU(6S) or
DID ETUs
9
72
1
0
No Limitation
8
64
1
0
No Limitation
7
56
1
1
No Limitation
6
48
1
2
No Limitation
5
40
1
2
No Limitation
4
32
1
3
No Limitation
3
24
1
4
No Limitation
2
16
1
4
No Limitation
1
8
1
5
No Limitation
,
SECTION 5
For Systems with EliteMail VP/CTI or CTI ETU Loaded with Q-Master
Application
Other ETUs
The number of 8-port ETUs installed Including ESI(8)-U( ) ETU, ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU, or
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.
When the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or MIFM-U20 with Ethernet option is installed in the AP slot, the
HUB or EliteMail CTI/VP must be installed in a different cabinet.
Only one CTI ETU can be installed in a KSU (EliteMail, VP, or Q-Master).
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
5.1
Cabling Requirements and Specifications
The KSU is connected with each Multiline Terminal and Single Line
Telephone by a separate twisted 1-pair cable or 2-pair cable (only for Multiline
Terminals). Refer to Table 3-7 Electra Elite IPK/Dterm Series i Multiline
Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length, Table 3-8 Electra Elite/Dterm
Series E Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length, Table 3-9
Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line Equipment,
Table 3-10 Cabling Requirements, and Table 3-11 Zone Transceiver II Range.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 10
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-7
Electra Elite IPK/Dterm Series i Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable
Length
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(Without
AC
Adapter)
(Ohms)
By Twisted
1-Pair
(Without
AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
By Twisted
2-Pair
(Without
AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(With AC
Adapter)
(Ohms)
By Twisted
1-Pair
(With AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
By Twisted
2-Pair
(With AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
DTH-8-1 TEL
DTR-8-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTR-8D-1 TEL
ITH-8D-2 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DTH-16-1 TEL
DTR-16-1 TEL
35
660
1320
107
2000
2000
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTR-16D-1 TEL
ITH-16D-2 TEL
35
660
1320
107
2000
2000
DTH-32-1 TEL
DTR-32-1 TEL
26
500
1000
107
2000
2000
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
–
–
–
107
2000
2000
Terminal or Adapter
DCR-60-1 cONSOLE
,
,
AC Adapter is required.
Table 3-8
Electra Elite/Dterm Series E Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance
and Cable Length
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(Ohms)
Maximum
Feet by
Twisted 1-Pair
Cable
24 AWG
Maximum
Feet by
Twisted 2-Pair
Cable
24 AWG
N/A
900
900
N/A
1000
1000
DTU-8-1 TEL
DTP-8-1 TEL
35
600
1000
DTU-8D-2 TEL
DTP-8D-1 TEL
35
600
1000
Terminal or Adapter
DBM(B)-U( ) Box
DCU-60-1 CONSOLE
,
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite/Dterm Series E Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance
and Cable Length
Table 3-8
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(Ohms)
Maximum
Feet by
Twisted 1-Pair
Cable
24 AWG
Maximum
Feet by
Twisted 2-Pair
Cable
24 AWG
DTU-16-1 TEL
DTP-16-1 TEL
26
450
900
DTU-16D-2 TEL
DTP-16D-1 TEL
26
450
900
Terminal or Adapter
DTP-16HC-1 TEL
,
57
1083
DTU-32-1 TEL
DTP-32-1 TEL
21
360
720
DTU-32D-2 TEL
DTP-32D-1 TEL
21
360
720
DTR-2DT-1 TEL
35
600
1000
DTR-4D-1 TEL
37
700
1400
DTR-4R-1/2 TEL
N/A
650
1000
DTH-4R-1/2 TEL
N/A
650
1000
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
35
600
1000
DP-D-1
20
410
820
,,
,
,,
An AC Adapter is required for the DTP-16HC-1 TEL or 60-button Attendant Console DCU-60-1.
The length for the specified SLT Adapter is the length between the SLT Adapter and the ESI.
Twisted 2-Pair Cable
ESI
RJ11
Multiline Terminal
Figure 3-2 Connecting the ESI Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 12
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-9
Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the
Single Line Equipment
Cable
Maximum Distance or
Impedance Between
Equipment and Telephone
AD(A)-R/AD(A)-2R Unit
Twisted Pair
10 feet
ADA(2)-W Unit
Twisted Pair
10 feet
AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit
Twisted Pair
50 feet
APA-U Unit or APR-U Unit
Twisted Pair
50 feet
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
Twisted Pair
1,600 ohms
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
Twisted Pair
300 ohms
SLIB(4)/SLIE(4)-U10 ETU
Twisted Pair
300 ohms
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
Twisted Pair
50 feet
Connected Equipment
Mixing digital and analog ports through the same 25-pair cable runs is not
recommended.
Table 3-10 Cabling Requirements
Connected Equipment
Cable
External Amplifier
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
Music on Hold and Background Music
Sources
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
ITH Cabling
Cat 5 Straight Data Network cable
100 meters maximum distance
Table 3-11 Zone Transceiver II Range
Connected Equipment
Range
ZT II-U Unit without ACA-U Unit
3,000 feet
ZT II-U Unit with ACA-U Unit
16,404 feet
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.2
Cabling Precautions
5.2.1
Cable Placement
When selecting cables and Main Distribution Frame (MDF), future
expansion or assignment changes should be considered. Avoid
running cables in the following places:
H
H
H
5.2.2
A place exposed to wind or rain.
A place near heat radiating equipment or where the quality of
station cable covering could be affected by gases and
chemicals.
An unstable place subject to vibration.
Environmental Conditions
Temperature
H
H
Operating:
+32°F ~ +104°F (0°C ~ 40°C)
Long Term:
+50°F ~ +90°F (10°C ~ 32.2°C)
Humidity
H
5.3
Operating:
10% ~ 90% noncondensing
Power Requirements
5.3.1
Power Supply Inputs
AC input requirements for the system are listed below.
AC Input (P64-U( ) PSU)
H
H
H
H
H
5.3.2
117 Vac ± 10%
60 Hz ± 10%
Single Phase
7.5A circuit
A dedicated outlet, separately fused and grounded
Power Supply Consumption
The power consumption for the Electra Elite IPK system is listed in
Table 3-12 Power Consumption.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 14
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-12 Power Consumption
Maximum
RMS
Current
Watts Used
(Idle)
Watts Used
(Maximum)
Basic KSU – B64-U( ) KSU
2.5 A
120
230
Basic KSU + Expansion KSU
5.0 A
240
460
Basic KSU + 2 Expansion KSUs
7.5 A
360
690
KSU
When replacing fuses, refer to the specifications in Table 3-13 Fuse
Replacement.
Table 3-13 Fuse Replacement
Unit
Fuse
Number
Specifications
Description
Dimensions
P64-U( ) PSU
F1
125V, 6.0A
AC Input
1/4” x 1 1/4”
P64-U( ) PSU
F101
250V, 10A
Battery Input
1/4” x 1 1/4”
All fuses are normal blown glass tube.
Do not use slow blow fuses. Replace with a fuse of the
same type and rating.
5.4
Outside Line Types
The following outside lines can be used with the Electra Elite IPK system.
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
2-wire, Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks
2-wire, 2-way DID Lines (Dial Pulse or DTMF)
4-wire, E&M Tie Lines (Type I or V, Dial Pulse, or DTMF)
Digital Trunk T1/FT1 (Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie Line (E&M), or DID
Signaling)
ISDN-BRI Trunks
ISDN-PRI Trunks
VoIP Trunks (Internet Protocols)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Refer to Table 1-1 FIC, REN, SOC, and Jack Types for Electra Elite IPK
System ETUs in the Regulatory Information section in this manual for a
detailed list of Facility Interface Codes, Ringer Equivalence Numbers, Service
Order Codes and Jack Types.
5.5
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications
5.5.1
Transmission
H
Data Length:
From Multiline Terminal to ESI(8)-U( ) ETU: 23 bits
H
H
5.5.2
From ESI(8)-U( ) ETU to Multiline Terminal: 23 bits
Data Transmission Rates:
Between ESI(8)-U( ) ETU and Multiline Terminal: 184K bps
(voice and signaling)
Scanning Time for each Multiline Terminal: 32 ms.
Network
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) allows transmission of a number of
separate data and voice simultaneously over one communications
medium. The information below indicates the specifications the
Electra Elite IPK system uses for switching, clock, data bus,
timeframe.
H
H
H
H
5.5.3
TDM Switching:
PCM (µ Law)
TDM Clock:
2.048 MHz
TDM Data Bus:
8 bit
TDM Timeframe: 125 µs.
Control
This section indicates the speed or capacity.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Control: Stored program with distributed processing
Central Processor:
32-bit microprocessor
Clock:
25 MHz
Interface ETU:
8-bit or 16-bit microprocessor
Optional ETUs:
16- or 32-bit microprocessor
Multiline Terminal (TDM):
8-bit microprocessor
Multiline Terminal (IP):
32-bit microprocessor
IP Adapter:
32-bit microprocessor
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 16
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
5.5.4
Attendant Console:
4-bit microprocessor
SLT Adapter:
4-bit microprocessor
Electra Elite IPK Terminals and Equipment
The voltage, current, ring signal information for the Electra Elite IPK
Multiline Terminals, Single Line Telephone equipment, and AP(A)-R/
AP(R)-R Units are listed below.
H
Multiline Terminal
Voltage:
-11 ~ -26 Vdc
Maximum Current:
250 mA
H
H
H
H
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.
Single Line Telephone
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
Nominal Current:
35 mA
Ring Signal:
56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
Nominal Current:
30 mA
Ring Signal:
56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
AP(A)-R Unit
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
Nominal Current:
30 mA
AP(R)-R Unit
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
Nominal Current:
30 mA
Ring Signal:
56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.5.5
Series i Terminals
The voltage and current information for the Dterm Series i Multiline
Terminals are listed below.
H
Multiline Terminal (Series i)
Voltage:
-11 ~ -48 Vdc
Maximum Current:
250 mA
H
5.6
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.
Voltage, current, and ring signal information for Single Line
Telephone equipment, AP(A)-R Unit, and AP(R)-R Unit are the
same as those listed in the previous paragraph.
Dialing Specifications
5.6.1
Dial Pulse Address Signaling
Dial Pulse address Signaling uses dial pulses (regular momentary
interruptions) to signal the equipment. In the Electra Elite IPK
system, the following Dial Pulse specifications are used.
H
H
H
5.6.2
Pulse Rate:
10 ± 0.5 pps/20 ± 1.0 pps
Percent Break:
60 ± 1.5%
Interdigit Interval:
0 pps/20 pps 500 ms. ~ 800 ms.
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling
DTMF signaling describes push button or Touchtone dialing. When a
key on a telephone is pushed, two tones (one high frequency and
one low frequency) are provided. In the Electra Elite IPK system, the
following DTMF specifications are used.
H
H
Frequencies
Two sinusoidal frequencies are provided, one from the high
frequency group and one from the low frequency group.
Frequency Deviation: Less than ±1.0%
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 18
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Signal Level:
Nominal level per frequency:
-6 ~ -4 dBm
Minimum level per frequency:
H
H
H
Low Group:
-10 dBm
High Group:
-8 dBm
Maximum level per frequency: 0 dBm
Rise Time: Within 5 ms.
Duration of Dual Frequency Signal:
110 ms. default/60 ms. minimum
Interdigital Time: 80 ms. default/70 ms. minimum
Nominal High Group
Frequencies (Hz)
1209
Nominal Low Group
Frequencies (Hz)
5.7
1336
1477
697
1
2
3
770
4
5
6
852
7
8
9
941
,
0
#
Battery Backup
The Electra Elite IPK system has battery backup functions for system backup
and for memory backup.
5.7.1
System Backup
During power failure, the system is backed up using a rechargeable
battery. This battery backup supports all of the system operations for
approximately 30 minutes.
5.7.2
Memory Backup
The CPUI( )-U( ) ETU has a battery installed to provide backup of
system memory. When the battery is fully charged, system memory
(customer data) is retained for approximately 21 days.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.8
Weights and Dimensions
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions indicates the shipping weight, height,
width, and depth of each Electra Elite IPK KSU, ETU, Multiline Terminal, or
adapter.
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
22.5 oz
(638 g)
3.4”
(86 mm)
4.2”
(107 mm)
5.2”
(133 mm)
102.4 oz**
(2903 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
AC-R Unit
5.6 oz
(158 g)
3.61”
(92 mm)
6.87”
(175 mm)
4.2”
(107 mm)
AD(A)-R Unit
4.0 oz
(113 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137.5 mm)
AD(A)-2R Unit
4.0 oz
(113 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137.5 mm)
ADA-U Unit
4.0 oz
(113 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137.5 mm)
AP(A)-R Unit
5.6 oz
(158 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137.5 mm)
AP(R)-R Unit
5.6 oz
(158 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137.5 mm)
APA-U Unit
4.3 oz
(122 g)
2.4”
(60 mm)
2.3”
(59 mm)
4.8”
(121 mm)
APR-U Unit
4.3 oz
(122 g)
2.4”
(60 mm)
2.3”
(59 mm)
4.8”
(121 mm)
460.8 oz
(13063 g)
13.1”
(312 mm)
13.7”
(348 mm)
18”
(457 mm)
BRT(4)-U10 ETU
14.6 oz
(414 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
BRT(4)-U20 ETU
11.3 oz
(320 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
BS(F)-R Unit
3.46 oz
(98 g)
5.04”
(128 mm)
4.25”
(108 mm)
1.02”
(26 mm)
BS(S)-R Unit
3.46 oz
(98 g)
5.04 “
(128 mm)
4.25 “
(108 mm)
1.02 “
(26 mm)
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU
13.2 oz
(374 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
BSU(4M)-U20 ETU
14.8 oz
(419 g)
1.97”
(50mm)
8.27”
(210 mm)
11,47”
(290 mm)
Unit
ACA-U Unit
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
B64-U( ) KSU
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 20
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
BSU(2S)-U20 ETU
13.4 oz
(381 g)
1.97”
(50mm)
8.27”
(210 mm)
11,47”
(290 mm)
BSU(6S)-U20 ETU
15 oz
(423 g)
1.97”
(50mm)
8.27”
(210 mm)
11,47”
(290 mm)
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
12.0 oz
(340 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
102.4 oz
(2903 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
CMS/FMS/VMS-U30 ( ) ETU
102.4 oz
(2903 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
12.0 oz
(340 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
COI(4)-U( ) ETU
13.6 oz
(385 g
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
COI(8)-U( ) ETU
16.6 oz
(471 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
COIB(4)-U( ) ETU
14.4 oz
(408 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
COIB(8)-U( ) ETU
16.6 oz
(471 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
COID(4)-U( ) ETU
14.4 oz
(408 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
COID(8)-U( ) ETU
16.6 oz
(471 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
13.4 oz
(380 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
CT(A)-R Unit
4.0 oz
(113 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137.5 mm)
CTA-U Unit
4.3 oz
(122 g)
2.4”
(60 mm)
2.3”
(59 mm)
4.8”
(121 mm)
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
192 oz**
(5443 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
CTU(C)-U Unit
9.5 oz
(270 g)
2.4”
(60 mm)
4.3”
(110 mm)
4.4”
(112 mm)
CTU(S)-U Unit
9.5 oz
(270 g)
2.4”
(60 mm)
4.3”
(110 mm)
4.4”
(112 mm)
CT(U)-R Unit
8.4 oz
(239 g)
2.25”
(56.25 mm)
2.75”
(68.75 mm)
5.5”
(137 mm)
DBM(B)-U( ) Box
74.4 oz
(2109 g)
2.75”
(70 mm)
13.5”
(343 mm)
9.75”
(248 mm)
Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
DBM(E)-U( ) Box
74.4 oz
(2109 g)
2.75”
(70 mm)
13.5”
(343 mm)
9.75”
(248 mm)
DCR-60-1 Console
53 oz
(1503 g)
4.2”
(107 mm)
12.8”
(326 mm)
7.14”
(182 mm)
DCU-60-1 Console
53 oz
(1503 g)
3.6”
(92 mm)
8.8”
(223 mm)
10.6”
(270 mm)
DID(4)-U( ) ETU
15.5 oz
(439 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
DP-D-1A Doorphone
8.4 oz
(238 g)
1.5”
(38 mm)
5.5”
(140 mm)
.75”
(121 mm)
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
12.1 oz
(343 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTR-16D-1 TEL
43.5 oz
(1233 g)
4.78”
(122 mm)
10.2”
(260 mm)
9.8”
(250 mm)
DTH-8-1 TEL
DTR-8-1 TEL
41.0 oz
(1163 g)
4.78”
(122 mm)
10.2”
(260 mm)
9.8”
(250 mm)
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTR-8D-1 TEL
43.5 oz
(1233 g)
4.78”
(122 mm)
10.2”
(260 mm)
9.8”
(250 mm)
DTH-32D-1 TEL
DTR-32D-1 TEL
48 oz
(1361 g)
4.78”
(122 mm)
10.2”
(260 mm)
9.8”
(250 mm)
DTI-U( ) ETU
13.2 oz
(374 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
DTI-U40 ETU
5.99 oz
(170 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
DTP-1-1 TEL
DTP-1-2 TEL
DTP-1HM-1 TEL
DTP-1HM-2 TEL
26.8 oz
(760 g)
2.36”
(60 mm)
6.22”
(158 mm)
8.81”
(224 mm)
DTU-16-1 TEL
DTP-16-1 TEL
41 oz
(1162 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
7.8”
(197 mm)
9.3”
(235 mm)
DTU-16D-2 TEL
DTP-16D-1 TEL
43.5 oz
(1233 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
7.8”
(197 mm)
9.3”
(235 mm)
DTP-16HC-1 TEL
53 oz
(1503 g)
6.00”
(152 mm)
9.08”
(230 mm)
8.04”
(204 mm)
DTP-2DT-1 TEL
41 oz
(1163 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
7.8”
(197 mm
9.3”
(235 mm)
DTU-32-1 TEL
DTP-32-1 TEL
46 oz
(1304 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
8.7”
(220 mm)
9.3”
(235 mm)
DTU-32D-2 TEL
DTP-32D-1 TEL
48 oz
(1361 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
8.7”
(220 mm)
9.3”
(235 mm)
Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 22
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
DTU-8-1 TEL
DTP-8-1 TEL
41.0 oz
(1163 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
7.8”
(197 mm)
9.3”
(235 mm)
DTU-8D-2 TEL
DTP-8D-1 TEL
43.5 oz
(1233 g)
4.8”
(123 mm)
7.8”
(197 mm)
9.3”
(235 mm)
DTR-1-1 TEL
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
26.8 oz
(760 g)
2.47”
(100 mm)
7.65”
(195 mm)
9.54”
(243 mm)
DTR-1R-1 TEL
14.4oz
(408 g)
4.5”
(114 mm)
6.1”
(153 mm)
8.62”
(218 mm)
DTR-2DT-1 TEL
41 oz
(1163 g)
2.47”
(100 mm)
7.65”
(195 mm)
9.54”
(243 mm)
DTR-4D-1 TEL
44 oz
(1250 g)
5.98”
(152 g)
8.54”
(217 g)
9.65”
(245 mm)
DTR-4R-1 TEL
15.4 oz
(437 g)
2.25”
(57 mm)
4.25”
(108 mm)
7.5”
(191 mm)
DTU-4R-1 TEL
15.4 oz
(437 g)
2.25”
(57 mm)
4.25”
(108 mm)
7.5”
(191 mm)
D16(LD)-R ADM
27 oz
(770 g)
4.33”
(110 mm)
10.24”
(260 mm)
7.09”
(180 mm)
ECR-U( ) ETU
21.2 oz
( 344 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
14.5 oz
(411 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
11.1 oz
(315 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
9.9 oz
(280 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
EXP-U( ) ETU
14.6 oz
(414 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
14.7 oz***
(417 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
102.4 oz**
(2903 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
HF-R Unit
9.9 oz
(280 g)
2.9’
(74 mm)
4.2’
(106 mm)
5.6’
(141 mm)
HUB(8)-U( )ETU
10.4 oz
(294 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU
8.11 oz
(230 g)
7.5”
(190 mm)
6.3”
(160 mm)
0.87”
(22 mm)
IPT(4)-U( ) ETU
32 oz
( 907 g)
5.0”
(127 mm)
10”
(254 mm)
10”
(254 mm)
Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
IPT(8)-U( ) ETU
32 oz
( 907 g)
5.0”
(127 mm)
10”
(254 mm)
10”
(254 mm)
ITH-8D-2/3 TEL
50.92 oz
(1445 g)
9.84”
(250 mm)
10.31”
(262 mm)
4.76”
(121 mm)
ITH-16D-2/3 TEL
50.92 oz
(1445 g)
9.84”
(250 mm)
10.31”
(262 mm)
4.76”
(121 mm)
IVR Application
VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU with IVR HDD
14.6 oz
(414 g)
1.75”
(44 mm)
10.5”
(266 mm)
8.62’
(219 mm)
MIFA-U( ) ETU
12.1 oz
(343 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
MIFM-U( ) ETU
12.3 oz
(349 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
13.4 oz
(380 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
PBR( )-U( ) ETU
10.7 oz
(303 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
13.2 oz
(374 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
PS(A)-R Unit
7.32 oz
(205 g)
5.43”
(138 mm)
5.04”
(128 mm)
2.28”
(58 mm)
RAK-U( ) Unit
320 0z
(9072 g)
20”
(507 mm)
15’
(380 mm)
8.5’
(216 mm)
SLI(4)-U( ) ETU
13.0 oz
(370 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
SLI(8)-U( ) ETU
14.1 oz
(400 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU
13.0 oz
(370 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
SLIE(4)-U10 ETU
10.7 oz
(303 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
9 oz.
(255 g)
1.8”
(45 mm)
2.8”
(70 mm)
4.8”
(120 mm)
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
12.3 oz
(349 g)
10.5”
(268.7 mm)
8.5”
(220.6 mm)
1.75”
(44.8 mm)
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
13.8 oz
(391 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
102.4 oz**
(2903 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
VMP(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
102.4 oz**
(2903 g)
1.89”
(48 mm)
11.47”
(290 mm)
8.46”
(214 mm)
Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 24
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-14 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
12.0 oz
(340 g)
1.97”
(50 mm)
9.45”
(240 mm)
7.68”
(195 mm)
WM-R Unit
10.6 oz
(301 g)
4.1”
(104 mm)
5.9”
(151 mm)
7.1”
(180 mm)
WMU-U Unit
10.6 oz
(301 g)
4.1”
(104 mm)
5.9”
(151 mm)
7.1”
(180 mm)
Unit
* Shipping weight includes the shipping carton.
** Shipping weight includes the shipping carton and documentation.
*** Includes cable for connection of two KSUs.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.9
External Equipment Interface
Input signal levels, impedance, contact ratings, and connector types are listed
for externally connected equipment.
5.9.1
5.9.2
Music on Hold/Station Background Music
H
H
5.9.4
5.9.5
5.9.6
5.9.7
5.9.8
0.6V PPS Signal Level
Input Impedance:
600 Ω
Music for Station BGM using Analog CO Trunk ETU (COI, COIB, or
COID)
H
H
5.9.3
Auxiliary Input:
Auxiliary input:
0.6 V PPS Signal Level
Input Impedance:
600 Ω
External Paging (Audio)
H
H
H
Output Power:
-10 dBm Signal Level
Output Impedance:
600 Ω
Relay Contact Rating: 500 mA, 24 Vdc
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output
H
H
H
Output Power:
-10 dBm
Output Impedance:
600 Ω
Relay Contact Rating: 500 mA, 24 Vdc
SMDR Output
H
Female Connector (System Output):
Standard DB-9 (straight)
PC Connection
H
Female Connector (System Input/Output):
Standard DB-9 (straight)
ACD/MIS Connector
H
Female Connector (System Output):
Standard DB-9 (straight)
Relay Contact
H
All Relay Contact Ratings:
500 mA, 24 Vdc
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 26
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.10
Audible and Visual Indications
The tables in this section provide the audible and visual indications used in the
Electra Elite IPK systems.
5.10.1
Tone Patterns
Tones are used in the Electra Elite IPK systems to inform the station
user of various system functions such as, dial tone, busy tone, or
ringback tone. Table 3-15 Tone Patterns lists the frequency and the
pattern for these tones.
5.10.2
LED Flash Patterns
The Electra Elite IPK system has 2-color LEDs. Green is used
primarily for I-Use conditions and for outside calls. Red is used
primarily for Other Use conditions and internal calls. Refer to Table
3-16 Multiline Terminal LED Flash Patterns.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-15 Tone Patterns
System Tone
(Fixed)
Frequency
(Hz)
(Fixed)
Intermit
(Default)
480/620
60 IPM
Cycle
0.5 sec
Busy Tone
0.5 sec
0.5 sec
Call Waiting Tone
440
60 IPM
0.5 sec
0.25 sec
Second Dial Tone
350/440
120 IPM
0.25 sec
2400 Modulation
(16 Hz)
Continuous
Internal Dial Tone
350/440
Continuous
Internal Ringback Tone
440/480
1 sec On
2 sec Off
Howler Tone
LCR Dial Tone
440
Continuous
Reorder Tone
480/620
120 IPM
1 sec
2 sec
0.25 sec
0.25 sec
Service Set Tone
440
Continuous
Special Dial Tone
440
240 IPM
0.125 sec
0.125 sec
Tone Burst 1 Tone
440
Continuous
Tone Burst 2 Tone
620
Continuous
Tie/DID Ringback Tone
440/480
2 sec On
4 sec Off
Camp-On Tone
Call Alert Notification
Attendant Tone Override
440
Continuous
DIT Alert Tone
480/620
Continuous
Call Forward Alert Tone
Call Forward
Configuration Tone
350/440
120 IPM
1 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
0.7 sec
0.5 sec
0.25 sec ON x 2~3 bursts
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 28
System Specifications
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-16 Multiline Terminal LED Flash Patterns
LED
Condition
Color
I-Use
Busy
Incoming Call
I-Hold
Call Hold
Hold Recall
Transfer Recall
Live Monitoring Mode
Message Waiting on Line Key
Green
Red
Red
Green
Red
Green
Green
Green
Red
ON
Red
ON (Series i)
Red
I-Use
ICM Incoming Call
Voice Over Broker
Red
Red
Red
Incoming Internal Call
Incoming Outside Call
Message from Attendant
Voice Mail Message
Red
Green
Green
Red
ON
System Data Entry
Red
Red
D
Conference in Progress/Barge In
All Conference Circuits Used
Hold Conference Call
ICM Call Hold
SPD Confirmation
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
F
Incoming Trunk
Exclusive Hold
User Ringing Line Preference
Voice Over with Broker’s Call
Red
Green
Red
Green
A
Callback Set
Auto Repeat Set
ON (to set function)
Call FWD - All Calls Set
Red
Red
Red
Red
Line Key
Microphone
I
ICM
Large LED
E
BLF or
DSS Key
Use, Hold
DND, Call FWD-All Calls Set
Special Mode (while pressing
or going off-line)
A
Flash Patterns
Red
Red
Red
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0 sec.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
3 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 30
System Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 4-1
Section 2
Programming Stations ................................................................................... 4-1
Section 3
Attendant Stations ......................................................................................... 4-1
Section 4
Programming from a PC ................................................................................ 4-1
Section 5
Programming from a Multiline Terminal ...................................................... 4-2
Section 6
Electra Elite IPK Remote PC Programming ................................................. 4-2
6.1
Section 7
Remote Programming ................................................................................. 4-2
Determining Required Equipment ................................................................ 4-3
7.1
Station Equipment ....................................................................................... 4-3
7.2
Interface ETUs ............................................................................................ 4-4
7.2.1
Determining Telephone and CO Port Numbers ................................................ 4-6
7.2.2
Determining the Number of Required Interface ETUs ...................................... 4-7
7.2.3
PBR Requirements ........................................................................................... 4-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures and Tables
Chapter 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-1
Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for an Electra Elite IPK System ................. 4-5
Figure 4-2
Telephone and CO Port Numbering Example ............................................................ 4-6
Table 4-1
Number of Required Interface ETUs .......................................................................... 4-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures and Tables
Hardware Requirements
Chapter 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The technician should be familiar with the Electra Elite IPK system before trying to
install it. Review this chapter carefully.
SECTION 2
PROGRAMMING STATIONS
Two programming stations are available in the Electra Elite IPK system. Station
equipment that is connected to the first two ports of the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU is
automatically set as a programming position that must have a display Multiline
Terminal.
SECTION 3
ATTENDANT STATIONS
Any Multiline Terminal with display can be programmed as an Attendant position in
the Electra Elite IPK system. An Attendant Position can have up to four DCR-60-1
Consoles attached. Each Attendant Console must be supported by an ESI(8)-U( )
ETU. A maximum of four Attendant Consoles can be installed in each Electra Elite
IPK system.
SECTION 4
PROGRAMMING FROM A PC
Electra Elite IPK systems can be programmed using a personal computer. The Menu
Programming option available with PC Programming allows the technician/end-user
easy access to all information that can be programmed on the Electra Elite IPK
system. The PC must be a Pentium PC or higher and have Windows 95 or higher to
be compatible with the System Administration Terminal (SAT) Technician or
end-user.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
4-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 5
PROGRAMMING FROM A MULTILINE TERMINAL
Programming can be accomplished using Electra Elite IPK or Electra Elite Multiline
Terminals equipped with an LCD. Programming should be used after the system is
installed and initial assignments are made. Using the Multiline Terminal is a quick way
to access system data and make changes. To program from a Multiline Terminal one
of the following terminals is required.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
SECTION 6
DTH-8D-1( ) TEL
DTH-16D-1( ) TEL
DTH-16LD-1( ) TEL
DTH-32D-1( ) TEL
DTR-8D-1( ) TEL
DTR-16D-1( ) TEL
DTR-32D-1( ) TEL
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
DTU-8D-2 TEL
DTP-16D-1 TEL
DTU-16D-2 TEL
DTP-32D-1 TEL
DTU-32D-2 TEL
ITH-8D-2 TEL
ITH-16D-2 TEL
DTP-8D-1 TEL
ELECTRA ELITE IPK REMOTE PC PROGRAMMING
The Electra Elite IPK system can be programmed from a remote location using a
personal computer.
6.1
Remote Programming
To provide remote programming the following hardware is required:
J
J
J
External Modem
MIFM-U( ) ETU
MIFM Dongel (provided with ETU 0)
Analog Extension or Analog trunk
SPE (M)-U10 ETU
Internal Modem
MIFM-U( ) ETU installed in Slot S1 or S2 in the first cabinet
Available Trunk in the system
SPE (M)-U10 ETU
LAN Programming
MIFM-U( ) ETU
Available Network
SPE (M)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-2
Hardware Requirements
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 7
DETERMINING REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
To determine equipment type and quantity to be installed, the technician must be
familiar with available station equipment and interface ETUs.
7.1
Station Equipment
The station equipment that can be installed with the Electra Elite IPK system is
listed below.
Equipment
Description
DBM(B)-U10 Box
Basic Message Display Board with 8 LEDs
DBM(E)-U10 Box
Expansion Message Display Board with 8
LEDs
DCR-60-1/DCU-60-1
CONSOLE
Attendant Console with 60 programmable line
keys
DTP-2DT-1 TEL
DTR-2DT-1 TEL
2-line digital Multiline Terminal without LCD
DTU-8-1 TEL
DTP-8-1 TEL
DTH-8-1 TEL
DTR-8-1 TEL
8-line digital Multiline Terminal without LCD
DTP-8D-1 TEL
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTR-8D-1 TEL
DTU-8D-2 TEL
ITH-8D-2 TEL
8-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD and
softkeys
DTP-16-1 TEL
DTU-16-1 TEL
DTH-16-1 TEL
16-line digital Multiline Terminal without LCD
DTP-16D-1 TEL
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTR-16D-1 TEL
DTU-16D-2 TEL
ITH-16D-2 TEL
16-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD and
softkeys
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
16-line digital Multiline Terminal with three
LCDs (one for telephone information and two
areas for recording line key information)
DTP-16HC-1 TEL
16-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD,
softkeys and a cordless handset
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
4-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Equipment
7.2
Description
DTP-32-1 TEL
DTU-32-1 TEL
32-line digital Multiline Terminal without LCD
DTP-32D-1 TEL
DTH-32D-1 TEL
DTR-32D-1 TEL
DTU-32D-2 TEL
32-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD and
softkeys
DTR-1-1 TEL
Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting
Indicator and data port
DTR-1(HM)-1 TEL
Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting
Indicator and data port, eight programmable
speed dial buttons, and Hold and Monitor keys
DTR-1R-1 TEL
Dterm Multiline Cordless Telephone without
LCD
DTR-4R-1/2 TEL
Dterm Multiline Cordless Telephone with LCD
DTH-4R-1/2TEL
Dterm Multiline Cordless Telephone with LCD
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
Single Line Telephone interface Adapter
Interface ETUs
The slots in the Electra Elite IPK KSU are flexible except for the CPU/EXP and
AP slots in the first cabinet. The CPU/EXP slot is reserved for the CPUI( )-U( )
ETU, and the AP slot is reserved for the MIFA-U( ), MIFM-U10/20 ETU, or
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU. Figure 4-1 Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for an
Electra Elite IPK System shows the slot and port numbers.
The MIFA-U( ) ETU with KMA(1.0)U must be installed in the AP slot for ACD/
MIS to work.
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU must be installed in slot S1 or S2 for the MOD-U10 Unit
to work. It can be installed in the AP slot when the optional modem unit is not
used.
The MIFM-U10 ETU, with KMM(1.0)U installed for LCR and Caller ID scrolling
and dialing to work, must be installed in the AP, S1, or S2 slot. When the
Modem Kit Unit is installed, this ETU must be placed in the S1, or S2 slot.
The MIFM-U20 ETU, with KMM-U20 installed for LCR and Caller ID scrolling
and dialing to work, must be installed in the AP, S1, or S2 slot. When the
MOD-U10 Unit is installed, this ETU must be placed in the S1, or S2 slot.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-4
Hardware Requirements
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Basic and Expansion KSUs for CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
EXP
(KSU2)
EXP
(KSU1)
(BASIC
KSU)
AP
BUS
SLOT
136
144
152
160
168
176
184
192
135
143
151
159
167
175
183
191
134
142
150
158
166
174
182
190
133
141
149
157
165
173
181
189
132
140
148
156
164
172
180
188
131
139
147
155
163
171
179
187
130
138
146
154
162
170
178
186
129
137
145
153
161
169
177
185
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
72
80
88
96
104
112
120
128
71
79
87
95
103
111
119
127
70
78
86
94
102
110
118
126
69
77
85
93
101
109
117
125
68
76
84
92
100
108
116
124
67
75
83
91
99
107
115
123
66
74
82
90
98
106
114
122
65
73
81
89
97
105
113
121
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
7
15
23
31
39
47
55
63
6
14
22
30
38
46
54
62
5
13
21
29
37
45
53
61
4
12
20
28
36
44
52
60
3
11
19
27
35
43
51
59
2
10
18
26
34
42
50
58
1
9
17
25
33
41
49
57
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Figure 4-1 Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for an Electra Elite IPK System
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
4-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.2.1
Determining Telephone and CO Port Numbers
Telephone and CO Ports numbers are provided with the Electra Elite
IPK system to count the station numbers and trunk numbers when
programming System Data. The example below indicates how the
CO and trunk numbers can be used.
The following ETUs are installed for the Figure 4-2 Telephone and
CO Port Numbering Example.
Slot
ETU
S1
DTI-U( ) (16 channels used)
S2
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU with ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
S3
TLI(2)-U( )
S4
COI(8)-U( )
S5
SLI(8)-U( )
S6
DID(4)-U( )
S7
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
S8
Open
CO
Ports
1 ~ 16
Telephon
e
Ports
1 ~ 16
CO
Ports
17 ~ 20
(See Note)
CO
Ports
21 ~ 28
Telephon
e Ports
17 ~ 24
CO
Ports
29~32
Telephon
e Ports
25~32
Open
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
The TLI(2)-U( ) ETU has two E&M Tie lines, however, four of the system CO ports are
used.
Figure 4-2 Telephone and CO Port Numbering Example
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-6
Hardware Requirements
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.2.2
Determining the Number of Required Interface ETUs
Table 4-1 Number of Required Interface ETUs lists each feature and
the associated hardware necessary for the operation of the feature.
Table 4-1 Number of Required Interface ETUs
Feature
Required ETU
Required
Feature Key
Maximum
ETUs per
System
ANI/Caller ID(Note 1)
MIFM-U10
MIFM-U20
SPE(M)-U10
ETU
KMM(1.0)U
KMM-U20
1
Automatic Call Distribution
MIFA-U( ) ETU
KMA(1.0)U
1
ACD Plus Automatic Call
Distribution
MIFM-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( )
ETU
None
Least Cost Routing
MIFM-U10 ETU
MIFM-U20 ETU
SPE(M)-U( )
ETU
KMM(1.0)U
KMM-U20
1
PC Programming
MIFM-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( )
ETU
None
1
SMDR
MIFM-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( )
ETU
None
1
Uniform Call Distribution
MIFA-U( ) ETU
None
1
Wireless Service Console
(WSC)
MIFM-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( )
ETU
None
1 (Note 2)
(Note 2)
Note 1: The Caller ID feature works without the MIFM-U( ) ETU. However, the Caller ID
scrolling and dialing both require the MIFM-U10 ETU with KMM( )U installed, the
MIFM-U20 ETU with KMM-U20 installed, or the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
Note 2: An MIFM-U( ) ETU or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is required during installation and servicing.
7.2.3
PBR Requirements
The Electra Elite IPK system has four built-in Push Button Receiver
(PBR) circuits on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU. The PBR circuit detects and
translates DTMF tones generated by Single Line Telephones,
facsimile machines, modems, or analog voice mail ports. Incoming
DTMF signals can also be detected from a CO trunk using the DAP
feature. The system Auto Attendant feature and DAP feature must
use the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU PBR circuits.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
4-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
DTMF signals can also be detected from a CO trunk using the DAP
feature. The system Auto Attendant feature and DAP feature must
use the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU PBR circuits.
An optional PBR(4)-U( ) ETU that provides an additional four circuits
can be installed. The number of PBR(4)-U( ) ETUs needed depends
on the number of Single Line Telephones, facsimile machines,
modems, and analog voice mail ports needed. Automated Attendant
and ADP trunks connected to the system must also be considered.
When the optional PBR(4)-U( ) ETU is installed, these PBR
circuits can be used only for SLI ports connected to the system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-8
Hardware Requirements
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 5
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 5-1
Section 2
Site Preparation and MDF/IDF Construction ............................................... 5-1
Section 3
2.1
Precautionary Information .......................................................................... 5-1
2.2
Surveying the Customer Site ...................................................................... 5-1
2.3
Selecting the Best Location for Proper Installation ..................................... 5-2
2.3.1
Selecting the KSU Installation Site ................................................................ 5-2
2.3.2
Selecting a Permanent MDF Location ........................................................... 5-2
2.3.3
Selecting a Site for Installing the Telephones ............................................... 5-3
2.4
Constructing the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) ........................................ 5-3
2.5
Power Failure Transfer ................................................................................ 5-8
2.6
Fax CO Branch Connection ........................................................................ 5-9
Installing Basic and Expansion KSUs .......................................................... 5-9
3.1
General Information .................................................................................. 5-10
3.1.1
Basic KSU ................................................................................................... 5-10
3.1.2
Expansion KSUs .......................................................................................... 5-10
3.2
Removing the KSU Cover ......................................................................... 5-10
3.3
Securing Cables Using the Velcro Strap ................................................... 5-11
3.4
Wall Mounting the Basic KSU ................................................................... 5-12
3.5
Wall Mounting the Expansion KSU ........................................................... 5-15
3.6
Rack Mounting the Basic KSU .................................................................. 5-16
3.7
Rack Mounting the Expansion KSU .......................................................... 5-18
3.8
Floor Mounting the Basic KSU .................................................................. 5-19
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9
3.10
3.11
Cable Routing ........................................................................................... 5-20
3.9.1
Connecting the Battery Expansion Cables on the KSU ............................... 5-20
3.9.2
Grounding Requirements ............................................................................ 5-21
Replacing the Power Supply Unit in the KSU ........................................... 5-23
3.10.1
Connecting the Power Supply Unit to the Basic KSU .................................. 5-23
3.10.2
Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the Expansion KSU .................... 5-25
3.10.3
Fuse Replacement
.................................................................................... 5-26
Installing Built-In and External Batteries in the KSU ................................ 5-27
3.11.1
Built-In Battery Installation ........................................................................... 5-27
3.11.2
External Battery Installation ......................................................................... 5-29
3.11.2.1
Basic KSU ................................................................................ 5-29
3.11.2.2
Expansion KSU ........................................................................ 5-32
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures and Tables
Chapter 5
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-1
Typical Full MDF Layout ............................................................................................. 5-4
Table 5-1
MDF Cable Connections ............................................................................................ 5-5
Figure 5-2
Power Failure Transfer Connections .......................................................................... 5-8
Figure 5-3
Fax CO Branch Connection ....................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-4
Removing the Front Panel of the KSU ..................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-5
Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure Amphenol Cables ......................................... 5-11
Figure 5-6
Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure Three Amphenol Cables .............................. 5-12
Figure 5-7
Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket ............................................................................ 5-12
Figure 5-8
Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket with Spacer ........................................................ 5-13
Figure 5-9
Hanging the Basic KSU on the Bracket ....................................................................5-13
Figure 5-10
Securing the Basic KSU to the Wall ......................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-11
Attaching the Expansion Wall Mount Bracket to the Basic Wall Mount Bracket ...... 5-15
Figure 5-12
RAK-U( ) Unit and KSU ............................................................................................ 5-16
Figure 5-13
Hanging the KSU on the Bracket ............................................................................. 5-17
Figure 5-14
Securing the KSU to the RAK-U( ) Unit ....................................................................5-17
Figure 5-15
Location for Rack Mounting the KSUs ..................................................................... 5-18
Figure 5-16
Floor Mounting the Basic KSU ................................................................................. 5-19
Figure 5-17
Securing the KSU to the Floor Mounting Bracket .....................................................5-19
Figure 5-18
Connecting DC Expansion Cables ........................................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-19
Attaching the Frame Ground Plate ........................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-20
KSU Grounding ........................................................................................................ 5-22
Figure 5-21
Connecting Wires to the PSU ...................................................................................5-23
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-22
Mounting the PSU onto the KSU .............................................................................. 5-24
Figure 5-23
Connecting the PSU Power Cable to the Basic KSU ............................................... 5-24
Figure 5-24
Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the Expansion KSU ................................ 5-25
Figure 5-25
Removing the PSU from the KSU ............................................................................ 5-26
Figure 5-26
PSU Fuse Replacement ........................................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-27
Connecting Built-In Batteries .................................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-28
Placing the Batteries into the KSU ........................................................................... 5-28
Figure 5-29
Connecting the Batteries to the Power Supply Unit ................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-30
Connecting Cables for External Batteries in the Basic KSU .................................... 5-29
Figure 5-31
Connecting the External Battery to the Basic KSU .................................................. 5-30
Figure 5-32
Threading the Cables through the Clamps on the Basic KSU ................................. 5-31
Figure 5-33
Removing the Knockout on the Cover of the Basic KSU ......................................... 5-31
Figure 5-34
Leading the Battery Cables out of the Basic KSU .................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-35
External Battery Cable Installation ........................................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-36
Threading the Cables through the Clamps on the Basic and Expansion KSUs ....... 5-34
Figure 5-37
Removing the Knockouts on the Covers of Basic and Expansion KSUs ................. 5-35
Figure 5-38
Leading the Battery Cables out of the Basic and Expansion KSUs ......................... 5-36
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures and Tables
Installing KSUs
Chapter 5
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter contains information to help the technician install the KSUs for the
Electra Elite IPK system. The technician should be familiar with this section before
installing any equipment.
SECTION 2
SITE PREPARATION AND MDF/IDF CONSTRUCTION
Preinstallation planning is essential. Advanced planning minimizes installation time,
cost, and disruption of the customer business activities.
2.1
Precautionary Information
Observe the following warnings during installation.
2.2
1.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line is disconnected at the network interface.
4.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Surveying the Customer Site
In most cases, a survey of the customer site is necessary to determine the
proper placement of the Main Distribution Frame (MDF), the exact dimensions
of the area selected for the MDF, cabling requirements, and possible
Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) locations.
The information obtained at the customer site can permit the installer to
partially assemble the MDF before installation at the customer premise. This
can reduce the time spent installing at the customer site and reduce
downtime.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Selecting the Best Location for Proper Installation
2.3.1
Selecting the KSU Installation Site
When selecting an installation site for the KSU, consider the
following conditions to ensure proper installation.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2.3.2
KSUs are normally wall mounted to protect against accident or
flooding.
The KSU should not be located directly beneath pipes. Leaks
or condensation could damage the Electra Elite IPK system
equipment.
The area where the KSU is located must be free of corrosive
and inflammable gases, excessive chemical or industrial dusts,
and other materials that could cause a hazard to personnel or
to the proper functioning of the equipment.
The operating ambient temperature and humidity must be
within the limits specified in 5.2.2 Environmental Conditions in
Chapter 3 System Specifications.
The operation of the system is virtually noiseless and allows
wide selection of installation sites. Take care to ensure the
KSUs do not present a hazard to office traffic. To minimize
cabling costs, a centralized location must be chosen.
Locate the KSU at a site where a dedicated AC power source
can be easily accessed.
Connect the KSU to a dedicated AC receptacle that is not
being used for any other device such as a computer, copier, or
facsimile machine.
Selecting a Permanent MDF Location
When selecting a permanent site for the MDF, the technician may
encounter some of the following conditions.
H
H
H
H
Limited space is available but must be used.
The available space may pose one or more environmental
hazards.
The proposed location has limitations such as insufficient
lighting or the lack of a suitable ground for the KSUs.
The technician that encounters these conditions must provide
the best possible solution for installing the equipment. This
document cannot cover all possible situations, precautions,
and actions.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-2
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.3
Selecting a Site for Installing the Telephones
When a site is being selected for telephone installation, consider the
following conditions to ensure proper installation.
H
H
2.4
Ensure that the cable length and line resistance (loop),
between the KSU and the telephones, comply with the
specifications listed in Table 3-7 Electra Elite IPK/Dterm Series i
Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length on page
3-11 and Table 3-8 Electra Elite/Dterm Series E Multiline
Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length on page 3-11.
Select a place where devices that require an external power
supply can be easily connected to an AC outlet.
Constructing the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
The Main Distribution Frame (MDF) has two different standard quick-connect
terminal blocks that are mounted on a 3/4” plywood backboard. Mounting
these blocks on standoffs for ease of access is recommended. The
recommended blocks are 66B50 for termination of the MDF Cable Assembly
and 66M50 for termination of the station cables.
The Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) requires the 66M50 blocks only.
Both the MDF and the IDF use standard bridging clips for each terminal block.
The bridging clips mate the left half of the terminal block (terminated cable
run) to the right half of the terminal block (crossconnection wire) to the
terminal block (crossconnection wire). The bridging clips are also useful during
troubleshooting to help isolate the cable runs and terminals/telephones from
the central equipment and the Central Office Network from the system. Refer
to Figure 5-1 Typical Full MDF Layout.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
66B50
Type
66M50
Type
Telco
RJ21X
4 Feet
3 Feet
Figure 5-1 Typical Full MDF Layout
The Electra Elite IPK KSU is connected to each of the Multiline Terminals,
Single Line Telephones, optional equipment, CO/PBX, DID, ISDN, 4-wire
E&M Tie lines (Types I and V), and FT1 digital trunks by separate twisted-pair
cable through the MDF. The 4-wire E&M Tie lines, FT1 lines, and ISDN lines
require multiple twisted-pair cabling. Table 5-1 MDF Cable Connections
provides the necessary cabling information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-4
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-1 MDF Cable Connections
MDF
Pin
N0.
Running
Cable
Station
Cable
DTH
ESI
SLI
(8)
SLI
(4)
OPX
COI/
COIB/
COID
(8)
26
WH–BL
GN
T
T
T
T
T
COI/
COIB/
COID
(4)
DID
TLI
DTI/
PRT
BRT
T
T
GND
TA
TA-1
ECR
DPH
EP Zone 3
DP 1
EP Zone 2
DP 2
EP Zone 1
DP 3
Night Chime
DP 4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR 1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR 2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR 3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR 4
EP Zone 3
DP 1
EP Zone 2
DP 2
EP Zone 1
DP 3
Night Chime
DP 4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR 1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR 2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR 3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR 4
BSU
First ETU
1
BL–WH
RD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
—
TB
TB-1
27
WH–OR
GN
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
E-1
RA
RA-1
2
OR–WH
RD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
M-1
RB
RB-1
28
WH–GN
GN
T
T
T
—
T
T
T
T-1
—
TA-2
3
GN–WH
RD
R
R
R
—
R
R
R
R-1
—
TB-2
29
WH–BR
GN
T
T
T
—
T
T
T
T1-1
—
RA-2
4
BR–WH
RD
R
R
R
—
R
R
R
R1-1
—
RB-2
30
WH–SL
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
GND
—
TA-3
5
SL–WH
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
—
—
TB-3
31
RD—BL
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
E-2
—
RA-3
6
BL–RD
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
M-2
—
RB-3
32
RD-OR
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
T-2
—
TA-4
7
OR–RD
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
R-2
—
TB-4
33
RD–GN
GN
T
T
—
—
T
T1-2
—
RA-4
GN–RD
RD
R
R
—
—
R
Fax
Brnch
—
8
—
R1-2
—
RB-4
34
RD–BR
GN
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
GND
TA
TA-1
ZT II
1
ZT II
2
Second ETU
9
BR–RD
RD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
—
TB
TB-1
35
RD–SL
GN
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
E-1
RA
RA-1
10
SL–RD
RD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
M-1
RB
RB-1
36
BK–BL
GN
T
T
T
—
T
T
T
T-1
—
TA-2
11
BL–BK
RD
R
R
R
—
R
R
R
R-1
—
TB-2
37
BK–OR
GN
T
T
T
—
T
T
T
T1-1
—
RA-2
12
OR–BK
RD
R
R
R
—
R
R
R
R1-1
—
RB-2
38
BK–GN
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
GND
—
TA-3
13
GN–BK
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
—
—
TB-3
39
BK–BR
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
E-2
—
RA-3
14
BR–BK
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
M-2
—
RB-3
40
BK–SL
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
T-2
—
TA-4
15
SL–BK
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
R-2
—
TB-4
41
YL–BL
GN
T
T
—
—
T
T1-2
—
RA-4
BL–YL
RD
R
R
—
—
R
Fax
Brnch
—
16
—
R1-2
—
RB-4
ZT II
1
ZT II
2
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-1 MDF Cable Connections (Continued)
MDF
Pin
N0.
Running
Cable
Station
Cable
DTH
ESI
SLI
(8)
SLI
(4)
OPX
COI/
COIB/
COID
(8)
COI/
COIB/
COID
(4)
DID
TLI
DTI/
PRT
BRT
ECR
DPH
BSU
DP 1
ZT II
Third ETU
42
YL–OR
GN
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
GND
TA
TA-1
17
OR–YL
RD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
—
TB
TB-1
43
YL–GN
GN
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
E-1
RA
RA-1
18
GN–YL
RD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
M-1
RB
RB-1
44
YL–BR
GN
T
T
T
—
T
T
T
T-1
—
TA-2
19
BR–YL
RD
R
R
R
—
R
R
R
R-1
—
TB-2
45
YL–SL
GN
T
T
T
—
T
T
T
T1-1
—
RA-2
20
SL–YL
RD
R
R
R
—
R
R
R
R1-1
—
RB-2
46
VI–BL
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
GND
—
TA-3
21
BL–VI
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
—
—
TB-3
47
VI–OR
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
E-2
—
RA-3
22
OR–VI
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
M-2
—
RB-3
48
VI–GN
GN
T
T
—
—
T
—
—
T-2
—
TA-4
23
GN–VI
RD
R
R
—
—
R
—
—
R-2
—
TB-4
49
VI–BR
GN
T
T
—
—
T
T1-2
—
RA-4
BR–VI
RD
R
R
—
—
R
Fax
Branch
—
24
—
R1-2
—
RB-4
50
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EP Zone 3
1
EP Zone 2
DP 2
EP Zone 1
DP 3
ZT II
2
Night Chime
DP 4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR 1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR 2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR 3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR 4
PFT circuits are only connected to AMP3.
AMP1 is connected to S1, S2, and S3.
AMP2 is connected to S4, S5, and S6.
AMP3 is connected to S7 and S8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-6
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
MDF Pin
Number
PFT Connection
42
PFT1 – CO (Tip)
17
PFT1 – CO (Ring)
43
PFT1 – SLI (Tip)
18
PFT1 – SLI (Ring)
44
PFT1 – SLT (Tip)
19
PFT1 – SLT (Ring)
45
PFT2 – CO (Tip)
20
PFT2 – CO (Ring)
46
PFT2 – SLI (Tip)
21
PFT2 – SLI (Ring)
47
PFT2 – SLT (Tip)
22
PFT2 – SLT (Ring)
48
PFT3 – CO (Tip)
23
PFT3 – CO (Ring)
49
PFT3 – SLI (Tip)
24
PFT3 – SLI (Ring)
50
PFT3 – SLT (Tip)
25
PFT3 – SLT (Ring)
Power Failure Transfer
Relay 1
(Amp 3 Connections Only)
PFT circuits are only connected to AMP3.
AMP1 is connected to S1, S2, and S3.
AMP2 is connected to S4, S5, and S6.
AMP3 is connected to S7 and S8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Power Failure Transfer
The Power Failure Transfer relay is located in the KSU. When selecting a
Single Line Telephone for power failure transfer, make sure it matches the CO
line dialing type (10 pps, 20 pps, or DTMF) where it is connected. A Single
Line Telephone with a ground button must be used with Ground Start Trunks.
Figure 5-2 Power Failure Transfer Connections is a relay diagram. The relay is
shown with the power ON.
T
E
L
C
O
SLT
Tip
M
D
F
M
D
F
There are three PFT Circuits for each B64-U( ) KTU.
C
O
I
Relay 1
Ring
Tip
S
L
I
Ring
Figure 5-2 Power Failure Transfer Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-8
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
Fax CO Branch Connection
This connection is made via the fourth port on any four port analog ETU (COI,
COIB, or COID). Refer to Figure 5-3 Fax CO Branch Connection. The
facsimile machine is connected to the eighth port for the specified slot where
the Analog CO ETU is installed.
Demark
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
CO
T8
R8
FAX
RJ-11
Figure 5-3 Fax CO Branch Connection
SECTION 3
INSTALLING BASIC AND EXPANSION KSUS
The compact design of the Electra Elite IPK KSU provides easy installation. The
KSUs can be floor mounted or wall mounted. Only the Basic KSU can be floor
mounted. The floor mounting option is for demonstration purposes only. The
information in this section provides detailed instructions for installing the KSU.
Before installing the system; observe the following precautions.
(
(
Before beginning installation, ensure that the Power Supply Unit (PSU) is OFF
and that the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet.
Do not touch the soldered surfaces of the ETUs.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.1
General Information
3.1.1
Basic KSU
The B64-U( ) KSU provides service for outside lines, Attendant
Consoles, and interconnection of the station terminals. The B64-U( )
KSU has two fixed and eight flexible slots. The first fixed slot is
reserved for the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU in the basic KSU or for the
EXP-U( ) ETU in expansion KSUs. The second fixed slot is for the
MIFA-U( ) ETU, MIFM-U( ) ETU, or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
The P64-U10 PSU (power supply unit), backup batteries, and three
PFT relays are included with each KSU.
3.1.2
Expansion KSUs
The B64-U( ) KSU is also used as the expansion unit that can be
attached to the basic KSU to provide additional ports. Two expansion
units can be added to the Electra Elite IPK system. Each expansion
KSU provides eight flexible slots and accommodates 8-, 16-, or
24-channel interface cards. The P64-U10 PSU (power supply unit),
backup batteries, and three PFT relays are included with each KSU.
The installation instructions provided in this chapter apply to the
basic B64-U( ) KSU and the expansion B64-U( ) KSUs unless
otherwise specified.
3.2
Removing the KSU Cover
To access the battery, cables, and ETU slots, the front cover must be
removed.
1.
Loosen the screw that is located near the ON/OFF switch, on the right
side of the KSU. Do not remove the screw from the unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 10
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
To remove the front panel, slide it to the right and pull.
Figure 5-4 Removing the Front Panel of the KSU
3.3
Securing Cables Using the Velcro Strap
Amphenol cables attached to the side of the KSU can be secured using the
provided velcro strap. When wall mounting, this should be done prior to
attaching the KSU to the wall mount bracket.
1.
When one or two amphenol cables are attached to the KSU, the velcro
strap can be threaded around the cable and through the hooks to secure
the cables.
Velcro
Cable
Hooks
Figure 5-5 Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure Amphenol Cables
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
When all three amphenol cables are used, the velcro strap is threaded
around the cables, instead of through the hooks, and attached to the
KSU.
Figure 5-6 Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure Three Amphenol
Cables
3.4
Wall Mounting the Basic KSU
1.
Before wall mounting the KSU, Use the four (locally provided) screws to
attach the wall mount bracket to the wall as shown in Figure 5-7
Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket.
Figure 5-7 Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 12
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
After the bracket is mounted to the wall, peel off the spacer backing.
Place and adhere the spacer to the position shown in Figure 5-8
Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket with Spacer.
All wall and rack mounted KSUs must have the Spacer Bracket added to
the Wall Mount Bracket.
2.17 in.
Spacer
2.56 in
.
Figure 5-8 Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket with Spacer
3.
Hang the KSU on the two hooks protruding from the wall mount bracket
as shown in Figure 5-9 Hanging the Basic KSU on the Bracket.
Figure 5-9 Hanging the Basic KSU on the Bracket
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Secure the KSU to the wall by placing a locally provided screw and
washer in the hole in the center of the wall mount bracket as shown in
Figure 5-10 Securing the Basic KSU to the Wall.
Figure 5-10 Securing the Basic KSU to the Wall
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 14
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.5
Wall Mounting the Expansion KSU
1.
Fit the bottom of the Expansion Wall Mount Bracket to the top of the
Basic Wall Mount Bracket. Refer to Figure 5-11 Attaching the Expansion
Wall Mount Bracket to the Basic Wall Mount Bracket.
Figure 5-11
Attaching the Expansion Wall Mount Bracket to the Basic
Wall Mount Bracket
2.
Hang the KSU on the two hooks protruding from the expansion wall
mount bracket as shown in Figure 5-9 Hanging the Basic KSU on the
Bracket.
3.
To secure the KSU to the wall, install a locally provided screw in the hole
in the center of the wall mount bracket as shown in Figure 5-10 Securing
the Basic KSU to the Wall on page 5-14.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.6
Rack Mounting the Basic KSU
The RAK-U( ) Unit is a 19 inch unit used to simplify installation by rack
mounting the Electra Elite IPK system.
1.
Mount the RAK-U( ) Unit to the equipment rack using the six provided
screws. Refer to Figure 5-12 RAK-U( ) Unit and KSU. Use three screws
on the right side (at 1, 2, and 3) and three screws on the left side.
A
1
A1
2
3
RAK-U10 Unit
Figure 5-12 RAK-U( ) Unit and KSU
2.
Mount the Wall Mount Bracket onto the RAK-U( ) Unit using the four
provided screws. Install two screws in the upper holes (at A) and two
screws in the lower holes (at A1).
3.
After the bracket is mounted to the RAK-U( ) Unit, hang the KSU on the
two hooks protruding from the Wall Mount Bracket, as shown in Figure
5-13 Hanging the KSU on the Bracket.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 16
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-13 Hanging the KSU on the Bracket
4.
Secure the KSU to the RAK-U( ) Unit by installing a provided screw into
the KSU tab and bracket hole A2. Refer to Figure 5-14 Securing the KSU
to the RAK-U( ) Unit.
Figure 5-14 Securing the KSU to the RAK-U( ) Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7
Rack Mounting the Expansion KSU
1.
Refer to Figure 5-15 Location for Rack Mounting the KSUs, for the
proper location of rack mounting the Basic KSU and the Expansion
KSUs.
C
C
C
C
C
2nd Exp.
KSU
B
B
B
B
B
1st Exp.
KSU
A
A
A
A
A
Basic
KSU
RAK-U( ) Unit
Figure 5-15 Location for Rack Mounting the KSUs
2.
The Basic KSU is installed in the lower position of the rack mounting
bracket. The Basic KSU is secured using the five threaded screw holes
marked A.
3.
The 1st Expansion KSU is installed in the center position and is secured
using the five threaded screw holes marked B.
4.
The 2nd Expansion KSU is installed in the upper position and is secured
using the five threaded screw holes marked C.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 18
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8
Floor Mounting the Basic KSU
Only the B64-U( ) KSU with no expansion KSU can be floor mounted.
1.
Use the four locally provided screws to attach the floor mount bracket to
the floor.
2.
Slide the KSU over the four hooks protruding from the floor mount
bracket as shown in Figure 5-16 Floor Mounting the Basic KSU.
Figure 5-16 Floor Mounting the Basic KSU
3.
To secure the KSU to the floor mounting bracket, install the two screws
as indicated in Figure 5-17 Securing the KSU to the Floor Mounting
Bracket.
Figure 5-17 Securing the KSU to the Floor Mounting Bracket
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9
Cable Routing
3.9.1
Connecting the Battery Expansion Cables on the KSU
1.
Use the DC Expansion Cable (included with the EXP-U ETU) to
connect the BATTERY EXT on the Basic KSU to the BATTERY
EXT of the Expansion KSU.
Figure 5-18 Connecting DC Expansion Cables
2.
To connect an Expansion KSU, use the two screws to attach
the FG plate to the Basic and Expansion KSUs. Refer to Figure
5-19 Attaching the Frame Ground Plate. (When installing a
second Expansion KSU, another FG plate is required.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 20
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-19 Attaching the Frame Ground Plate
3.9.2
Grounding Requirements
The KSUs must be properly grounded. The Electra Elite IPK KSUs
are provided with a typical AC third-wire ground. If this ground is
questionable, an alternative ground must be provided.
1.
Connect the grounding cable (green wire) to the ground
terminal on the right side of the Basic KSU. The locally
provided grounding cable AWG must be greater than #16.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-20 KSU Grounding
2.
Provide a suitable ground inside of a building in accordance
with local telephone company procedures.
3.
When no suitable ground is available, a ground rod should be
installed in accordance with the operating procedures of the
local telephone company.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 22
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
Replacing the Power Supply Unit in the KSU
The Electra Elite IPK system has a P64-U( ) PSU for each KSU. The Power
Supply Unit has a battery backup interface and accepts 117 Vac and outputs
+5V and –24V to the system.
The Power Supply Unit is included with the B64-U( ) KSU.
Before replacing the PSU, remove the defective PSU and verify that
the power cord on the replacement PSU is unplugged.
3.10.1
Connecting the Power Supply Unit to the Basic KSU
1.
Connect the 8-wire cable from the PSU to the connector on the
backplane of the KSU.
Cable
Connections
Figure 5-21 Connecting Wires to the PSU
2.
Install the P64-U( ) PSU into the bottom space of the KSU and
attach to the KSU using the two provided screws.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-22 Mounting the PSU onto the KSU
3.
Lead the KSU power cable through the clamp and connect the
PSU as shown in Figure 5-23 Connecting the PSU Power
Cable to the Basic KSU.
Power Cable
Figure 5-23 Connecting the PSU Power Cable to the Basic KSU
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 24
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.2
Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the Expansion KSU
1.
Lead the Battery Expansion Cables (included with the
EXP-U( ) ETU) through the clamps and tie them to the KSU
with a tie wrap on the expansion KSU.
Figure 5-24 Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the
Expansion KSU
2.
When using two expansion KSUs, connect the PSU of each
expansion KSU with the Battery expansion cables, lead the
cables through the clamps, and tie them with a tie wrap.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.3
Fuse Replacement
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace
fuses with the same type and rating originally
installed.
1.
Turn off the power switch and remove the front cover on the
KSU. (Refer to Figure 5-4 Removing the Front Panel of the
KSU.)
2.
Pull out the drawer that holds the PSU and disconnect the
cable as shown in Figure 5-25 Removing the PSU from the
KSU.
Cable
Connections
Fuse
Figure 5-25 Removing the PSU from the KSU
3.
Replace the fuses as necessary and return the PSU to the
KSU. Fuse F1 is a 125V, 6A fuse for AC input. Fuse F101 is a
125V, 6.0A fuse for DC input.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 26
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
F101 (DC In)
F1 (AC In)
Figure 5-26 PSU Fuse Replacement
3.11
Installing Built-In and External Batteries in the KSU
3.11.1
Built-In Battery Installation
1.
Connect the two batteries in series as shown in Figure 5-27
Connecting Built-In Batteries. The red cord attaches to the red
terminal and the black cord attaches to the black terminal.
Be careful, and properly connect the
terminals of the batteries.
Figure 5-27 Connecting Built-In Batteries
2.
Install the batteries into the bottom space at the left side the
KSU. Refer to Figure 5-28 Placing the Batteries into the KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Install the battery cover as illustrated in Figure 5-28 Placing the
Batteries into the KSU.
Figure 5-28 Placing the Batteries into the KSU
4.
Connect the cable to the BATTERY INT connector of the PSU
as shown in Figure 5-29 Connecting the Batteries to the Power
Supply Unit.
Figure 5-29 Connecting the Batteries to the Power Supply Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 28
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.11.2
External Battery Installation
Batteries that are purchased locally can be connected to the system
as external batteries.
When installing external batteries, disconnect the
battery cable for the built-in batteries from the
BATTERY INT connector of each KSU. When the
built-in batteries are connected with the external
batteries, a large charging current could flow from
the external batteries to the built-in batteries and
burn the battery cables.
3.11.2.1 Basic KSU
1.
Connect cabling to the external batteries as shown
in Figure 5-30 Connecting Cables for External
Batteries in the Basic KSU.
Figure 5-30 Connecting Cables for External
Batteries in the Basic KSU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Connect the external batteries to the KSU in the
location shown in Figure 5-31 Connecting the
External Battery to the Basic KSU. Connect the
external battery cable to the EXT connector on the
PSU of the Basic KSU. Bundle any extra cabling
together.
Figure 5-31 Connecting the External Battery to
the Basic KSU
3.
Route the cables through the clamps on the KSU as
shown in Figure 5-32 Threading the Cables through
the Clamps on the Basic KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 30
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-32
4.
Threading the Cables through the
Clamps on the Basic KSU
Before putting the cover on the Basic KSU, remove
the knockout (indicated by the arrow). Refer to
Figure 5-33 Removing the Knockout on the Cover of
the Basic KSU.
Figure 5-33
Removing the Knockout on the
Cover of the Basic KSU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Lead the battery cables through the knockout and
secure the front cover on the Basic KSU. Refer to
Figure 5-34 Leading the Battery Cables out of the
Basic KSU.
Figure 5-34
3.11.2.2
Leading the Battery Cables out of
the Basic KSU
Expansion KSU
When connecting batteries to the Expansion KSUs,
connections that must also be made to the Basic KSU
are noted in the following instructions. Although a
3-cabinet drawing is not provided, the third KSU draws
its external battery power by connecting a cable to the
EXT connection of the second KSU. This provides a
daisy-chain connection between all three KSUs.
1.
Connect cabling provided by NEC to the external
batteries as shown in Figure 5-30 Connecting
Cables for External Batteries in the Basic KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 32
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Connect the external battery cable to the EXT
connector on the PSU of the Basic KSU and the
Expansion KSUs as shown in Figure 5-35 External
Battery Cable Installation. Bundle any extra cabling
together.
Connecting this cable to PSU EXT
connector solves voltage
drop problems.
Figure 5-35 External Battery Cable Installation
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Route the cables through the clamps on the Basic
and Expansion KSUs as shown in Figure 5-36
Threading the Cables through the Clamps on the
Basic and Expansion KSUs.
Figure 5-36 Threading the Cables through the
Clamps on the Basic and Expansion
KSUs
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 34
Installing KSUs
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Before putting the covers on the Basic and
Expansion KSUs, remove the knockouts (indicated
by the arrows). On the Basic KSU, knockouts must
be removed from the top and the bottom of the KSU
cover. On the Expansion KSU, only the bottom
knockout is removed. Refer to Figure 5-37
Removing the Knockouts on the Covers of Basic
and Expansion KSUs.
Figure 5-37
Removing the Knockouts on the
Covers of Basic and Expansion
KSUs
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
5 - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Lead the battery cables through the knockouts on
the Basic and Expansion KSUs and secure the front
covers on the KSUs. Refer to Figure 5-38 Leading
the Battery Cables out of the Basic and Expansion
KSUs.
Figure 5-38 Leading the Battery Cables out of the
Basic and Expansion KSUs
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 36
Installing KSUs
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 6-1
Section 2
Installation ...................................................................................................... 6-2
Section 3
2.1
Installation Precautions ............................................................................... 6-2
2.2
Inserting an ETU into the KSU Slots ........................................................... 6-4
2.3
Removing an ETU from the KSU ................................................................ 6-6
Common Control ETUs .................................................................................. 6-7
3.1
3.2
CPUI( )/U( ) ETU ....................................................................................... 6-7
3.1.1
Description ........................................................................................................ 6-7
3.1.2
Installation ......................................................................................................... 6-7
3.1.3
Switch Settings ................................................................................................. 6-8
3.1.4
Connectors ....................................................................................................... 6-9
3.1.5
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-10
3.1.6
Replacing Memory Backup ............................................................................. 6-10
CPUI( )-U20 ETU ...................................................................................... 6-11
3.2.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-11
3.2.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-12
3.2.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-13
3.2.4
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-14
3.2.5
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-14
3.2.6
Replacing Memory Backup ............................................................................. 6-15
3.3
PKU 192-U (Port Key Unit) ....................................................................... 6-15
3.4
CLKG-U( ) Unit ......................................................................................... 6-16
3.4.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-16
3.4.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.4.3
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-16
3.4.4
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-17
EXP-U( ) ETU .......................................................................................... 6-17
3.5.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-17
3.5.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-18
3.5.3
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-18
KMA( )U ................................................................................................... 6-18
3.6.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-18
3.6.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-18
KMM( )U .................................................................................................. 6-18
3.7.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-18
3.7.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-18
KMM-U20 ................................................................................................. 6-19
3.8.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-19
3.8.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-19
MIFA-U( ) ETU ........................................................................................ 6-19
3.9.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-19
3.9.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-20
3.9.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-20
3.9.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-20
3.9.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-21
MIFM-U10 ETU ........................................................................................ 6-22
3.10.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-22
3.10.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-23
3.10.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-23
3.10.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-23
3.10.5 Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-24
3.11
MIFM-U20 ETU ........................................................................................ 6-25
3.11.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-25
3.11.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-26
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.11.3 Configuration Options ..................................................................................... 6-26
3.11.4 Optional Units ................................................................................................. 6-26
3.11.5 Jumper Settings .............................................................................................. 6-28
3.11.6 LED indications ............................................................................................... 6-28
3.11.7 Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-29
3.12
Modem Kit Unit .......................................................................................... 6-30
3.12.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-30
3.12.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-30
3.13
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU ...................................................................................... 6-31
3.13.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-31
3.13.2 Comparison of SPE(M)-U( ) ETU to MIFM-U10/20 ETU ................................ 6-34
3.13.3 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-35
3.13.4 Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-35
3.13.5 LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-36
3.13.6 Connectors or Ports ........................................................................................ 6-37
Section 4
Trunk ETUs ................................................................................................... 6-38
4.1
4.2
BRT(4)-U10 ETU ....................................................................................... 6-38
4.1.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-38
4.1.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-39
4.1.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-40
4.1.4
Jumpers .......................................................................................................... 6-40
4.1.5
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-41
4.1.6
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-41
4.1.7
Connections
................................................................................................. 6-42
BRT(4)-U20 ETU ....................................................................................... 6-43
4.2.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-43
4.2.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-44
4.2.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-44
4.2.4
Jumpers .......................................................................................................... 6-44
4.2.5
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-45
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.2.6
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-45
4.2.7
Connections
................................................................................................ 6-46
COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................. 6-47
4.3.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-47
4.3.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-48
4.3.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-48
4.3.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-48
4.3.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-49
4.3.6
Connections ................................................................................................... 6-49
COIB(4)-U10 ETU .................................................................................... 6-50
4.4.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-50
4.4.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-51
4.4.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-51
4.4.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-52
4.4.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-52
4.4.6
Connections .................................................................................................... 6-52
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU ............................................................................. 6-53
4.5.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-53
4.5.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-54
4.5.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-54
4.5.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-55
4.5.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-55
4.5.6
Connections ................................................................................................... 6-55
4.5.7
ETU Feature Chart ......................................................................................... 6-56
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU ............................................................................. 6-57
4.6.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-57
4.6.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-58
4.6.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-58
4.6.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-59
4.6.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-59
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.6.6
Connections
............................................................................................. 6-59
4.6.7
ETU Feature Chart ......................................................................................... 6-60
DID(4)-U( ) ETU ....................................................................................... 6-61
4.7.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-61
4.7.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-62
4.7.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-62
4.7.4
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-62
4.7.5
Connections
................................................................................................ 6-63
DTI-U10~30 ETU ...................................................................................... 6-64
4.8.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-64
4.8.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-65
4.8.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-65
4.8.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-66
4.8.5
Alarm Conditions ............................................................................................ 6-67
4.8.6
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-67
DTI-U40 ETU ............................................................................................ 6-68
4.9.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-68
4.9.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-69
4.9.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-69
4.9.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-72
4.9.5
Alarm Conditions ............................................................................................ 6-72
4.9.6
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-73
4.9.7
Connections .................................................................................................... 6-73
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................... 6-74
4.10.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-74
4.10.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-74
4.10.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-75
4.10.4 Jumper Settings .............................................................................................. 6-76
4.10.5 LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-77
4.10.6 Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-77
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
v
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.10.7 Connections .................................................................................................... 6-78
4.11
IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................. 6-80
4.11.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-80
4.11.2 Options ........................................................................................................... 6-81
4.11.3 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-81
4.11.4 Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-82
4.11.5 LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-82
4.11.6 IPT(4)-U( ) ETU to IPT(8)-U( ) ETU Conversion ........................................... 6-83
4.11.7 Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-83
4.11.8 Connections ................................................................................................... 6-83
4.12
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................... 6-84
4.12.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-84
4.12.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-85
4.12.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-85
4.12.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-86
4.12.5 Alarm Conditions ............................................................................................ 6-87
4.12.6 Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-88
4.12.7 Connections .................................................................................................... 6-88
4.13
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU ....................................................................................... 6-89
4.13.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 6-89
4.13.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-90
4.13.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-90
4.13.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-91
4.13.5 Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-91
4.13.6 Connections .................................................................................................... 6-91
Section 5
Station ETUs ................................................................................................. 6-92
5.1
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................... 6-92
5.1.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-92
5.1.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-93
5.1.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-93
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.1.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-93
5.1.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-94
5.1.6
Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-94
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU ........................................................................................ 6-95
5.2.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-95
5.2.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-96
5.2.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-96
5.2.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-96
5.2.5
Connectors ..................................................................................................... 6-96
5.2.6
Connections
............................................................................................... 6-97
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................... 6-98
5.3.1
Description ...................................................................................................... 6-98
5.3.2
Installation ....................................................................................................... 6-99
5.3.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................... 6-99
5.3.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................... 6-99
5.3.5
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-100
5.3.6
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-100
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................... 6-101
5.4.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-101
5.4.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-102
5.4.3
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-102
5.4.4
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-102
5.4.5
Pin Assignments ........................................................................................... 6-103
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................... 6-104
5.5.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-104
5.5.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-105
5.5.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-105
5.5.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-105
5.5.5
Connections ................................................................................................. 6-106
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
vii
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.6
5.7
5.8
Section 6
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................ 6-107
5.6.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-107
5.6.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-108
5.6.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-108
5.6.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-108
5.6.5
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-109
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU ................................................................................... 6-110
5.7.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-110
5.7.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-111
5.7.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-111
5.7.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-112
5.7.5
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-113
5.7.6
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-113
SLIE(4)-U10 ETU ................................................................................... 6-114
5.8.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-114
5.8.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-115
5.8.3
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-115
5.8.4
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-115
Voice Mail ETUs ......................................................................................... 6-116
6.1
6.2
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU ............................................................................. 6-116
6.1.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-116
6.1.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-118
6.1.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-119
6.1.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-120
6.1.5
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-122
6.1.6
Jumper Settings
6.1.7
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-122
......................................................................................... 6-122
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU ........................................................... 6-123
6.2.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-123
6.2.1.1
System Board Components ...................................................... 6-125
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.3
6.4
Section 7
6.2.1.2
Daughter Board Components .................................................... 6-127
6.2.1.3
Port Expansion Board ............................................................... 6-128
6.2.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-128
6.2.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-128
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)- U( ) ................................................................................ 6-129
6.3.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-129
6.3.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-132
6.3.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-133
6.3.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-134
6.3.5
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connectors ........................................................... 6-137
6.3.6
FMS-U30 ETU Jumper Settings ................................................................... 6-137
6.3.7
FMS-U30 ETU Connectors ........................................................................... 6-137
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU ......................................................................... 6-138
6.4.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-138
6.4.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-141
6.4.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-141
6.4.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-143
6.4.5
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connectors ........................................................... 6-145
6.4.6
VMS-U30 ETU Jumper Settings
6.4.7
VMS-U30 ETU Connectors ........................................................................... 6-145
................................................................ 6-145
Optional ETUs ............................................................................................. 6-146
7.1
7.2
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................... 6-146
7.1.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-146
7.1.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-147
7.1.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-147
7.1.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-148
ACD(8)-U30 ETU .................................................................................... 6-149
7.2.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-149
7.2.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-150
7.2.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-150
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
ix
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.2.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-151
7.2.5
Jumper Settings ............................................................................................ 6-152
7.2.6
ACD(8)-U30 ETU Connectors ...................................................................... 6-152
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................... 6-153
7.3.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-153
7.3.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-153
7.3.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-154
7.3.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-155
7.3.5
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-157
7.3.6
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-157
BSU(4M)-U20 ETU ................................................................................. 6-158
7.4.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-158
7.4.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-158
7.4.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-160
7.4.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-161
BSU(2S)-U20 ETU ................................................................................. 6-162
7.5.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-162
7.5.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-162
7.5.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-164
7.5.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-165
BSU(6S)-U20 ETU ................................................................................. 6-166
7.6.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-166
7.6.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-166
7.6.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-168
7.6.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-169
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................... 6-170
7.7.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-170
7.7.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-171
7.7.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-171
7.7.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-171
___________________________________________________________________________________
x
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.7.5
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-172
7.7.6
Connections .................................................................................................. 6-172
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................... 6-173
7.8.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-173
7.8.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-174
7.8.3
Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-174
7.8.4
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-175
7.8.5
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-176
ECR-U( ) ETU ........................................................................................ 6-177
7.9.1
Description .................................................................................................... 6-177
7.9.2
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-178
7.9.3
LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-179
7.9.4
Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-179
7.9.5
Specifications ................................................................................................ 6-180
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................... 6-181
7.10.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-181
7.10.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-182
7.10.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-182
7.10.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-182
7.10.5 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-182
7.11
IAD(8)-U( ) ............................................................................................... 6-183
7.11.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-183
7.11.2 Boot Up Sequence Status Identification ....................................................... 6-184
7.11.3 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-184
7.11.4 Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-185
7.11.5
Ethernet Status ............................................................................................ 6-185
7.11.6 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-185
7.12
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................... 6-186
7.12.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-186
7.12.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-186
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
xi
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.12.3 Installation Procedure ................................................................................... 6-187
7.12.4 Shut Down Procedure ................................................................................... 6-187
7.12.5 Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-188
7.12.6 LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-189
7.12.7 Jumper Settings ............................................................................................ 6-190
7.12.8 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-190
7.13
IVR Application ....................................................................................... 6-191
7.13.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-191
7.13.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-192
7.13.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-192
7.13.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-193
7.13.5 Jumper Settings ............................................................................................ 6-194
7.13.6 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-195
7.14
MG(8)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................... 6-196
7.14.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-196
7.14.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-196
7.14.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-197
7.14.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-198
7.14.4.1
Normal State ............................................................................. 6-198
7.14.4.2
For Initialization ......................................................................... 6-198
7.14.5 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-199
7.15
PBR( )-U( ) ETU ................................................................................... 6-200
7.15.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-200
7.15.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-201
7.15.3 LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-201
7.15.4 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-201
7.16
VMP( )-U40 ETU .................................................................................... 6-202
7.16.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-202
7.16.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-203
7.16.3 Installing Flash Drive on the VMP( )-U40 ETU ............................................. 6-204
___________________________________________________________________________________
xii
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16.4 Installing Hard Drive on the VMP( )-U40 ETU ............................................. 6-206
7.16.5 Installing DSP( )-U30 on VMP( )-U40 ETU ................................................... 6-210
7.16.6 Switch Settings
......................................................................................... 6-213
7.16.7 Jumper Settings ............................................................................................ 6-213
7.16.8 VMP( )-U40 LED Indications ......................................................................... 6-214
7.16.9 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-215
7.17
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................... 6-216
7.17.1 Description .................................................................................................... 6-216
7.17.2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-217
7.17.3 Switch Settings ............................................................................................. 6-217
7.17.4 LED Indications ............................................................................................. 6-218
7.17.5 Connectors ................................................................................................... 6-218
7.17.6 Pins ............................................................................................................... 6-218
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
xiii
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
xiv
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-1
Inserting the ETU into the KSU .................................................................................. 6-2
Figure 6-2
Inserting or Removing ETUs from the KSU ................................................................ 6-3
Figure 6-3
Handling an ETU ........................................................................................................ 6-3
Figure 6-4
Safety Precautions when Setting Switches on an ETU .............................................. 6-4
Figure 6-5
Sliding the ETU into the KSU Slot .............................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-6
Lifting the Ejector Tabs on the ETU ........................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-7
CPUI( )/U( ) ETU ...................................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-8
CPUI( )-U20 ETU .....................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-9
CLKG-U( ) Unit ........................................................................................................ 6-16
Figure 6-10
EXP-U( ) ETU .......................................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-11
MIFA-U( ) ETU ........................................................................................................ 6-19
Figure 6-12
MIFM-U10 ETU ........................................................................................................ 6-22
Figure 6-13
Connecting a Modem to the B64-U20 KSU .............................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-14
MIFM-U20 ETU ........................................................................................................ 6-25
Figure 6-15
ETH-U10 Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-16
MOD-U10 Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-17
POW-U10 Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-18
Modem Kit ................................................................................................................6-30
Figure 6-19
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (Front) ..........................................................................................6-32
Figure 6-20
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (Back) ..........................................................................................6-33
Figure 6-21
BRT(4)-U10 ETU ...................................................................................................... 6-39
Figure 6-22
BRT(4)-U10 Connections ......................................................................................... 6-42
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
xv
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-23
BRT(4)-U20 ETU ...................................................................................................... 6-43
Figure 6-24
BRT(4)-U20 Connections ......................................................................................... 6-46
Figure 6-25
COI(8)-U( ) ETU ...................................................................................................... 6-47
Figure 6-26
COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connections ............................................................................ 6-49
Figure 6-27
COIB(4)-U10 ETU .................................................................................................... 6-50
Figure 6-28
COIB(4)-U10 ETU Connections ............................................................................... 6-52
Figure 6-29
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU ............................................................................................ 6-53
Figure 6-30
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Connections ....................................................................... 6-55
Figure 6-31
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU ............................................................................................ 6-57
Figure 6-32
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Connections ...................................................................... 6-59
Figure 6-33
DID(4)-U( ) ETU ...................................................................................................... 6-61
Figure 6-34
DID(4)-U( ) ETU Connections ................................................................................. 6-63
Figure 6-35
DTI-U10~30 ETU ..................................................................................................... 6-64
Figure 6-36
DTI-U( ) ETU Connector ......................................................................................... 6-67
Figure 6-37
DTI-U40 ETU ........................................................................................................... 6-68
Figure 6-38
DTI-U40 ETU Connectors ........................................................................................ 6-73
Figure 6-39
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................................... 6-74
Figure 6-40
Connect EXPT ETU to CPUI ETU ........................................................................... 6-78
Figure 6-41
Connect EXPT to EXP to CPUI ETU ....................................................................... 6-79
Figure 6-42
IPT(8)-U( ) ETU ....................................................................................................... 6-80
Figure 6-43
IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connections ............................................................................ 6-83
Figure 6-44
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................................... 6-84
Figure 6-45
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU Connector .................................................................................... 6-88
Figure 6-46
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU ....................................................................................................... 6-89
Figure 6-47
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU Connections .................................................................................. 6-91
Figure 6-48
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................................... 6-92
Figure 6-49
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU Doorphone Connections ............................................................. 6-94
Figure 6-50
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU ....................................................................................................... 6-95
___________________________________________________________________________________
xvi
List of Figures
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-51
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU Connection .................................................................................... 6-97
Figure 6-52
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................................... 6-98
Figure 6-53
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU Connection ............................................................................... 6-100
Figure 6-54
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................................. 6-101
Figure 6-55
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU Connection ............................................................................... 6-102
Figure 6-56
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-104
Figure 6-57
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU CN1 Connection ........................................................................ 6-106
Figure 6-58
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................ 6-107
Figure 6-59
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connections ........................................................................... 6-109
Figure 6-60
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU ................................................................................................... 6-110
Figure 6-61
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU Connections .............................................................................. 6-113
Figure 6-62
SLIE(4)-U10 ETU ................................................................................................... 6-114
Figure 6-63
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU Connections .............................................................................. 6-115
Figure 6-64
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU ............................................................................................. 6-117
Figure 6-65
CMS-U30 ETU ....................................................................................................... 6-118
Figure 6-66
EliteMail CTI System Board ................................................................................... 6-124
Figure 6-67
EliteMail CTI Daughter Board ................................................................................. 6-126
Figure 6-68
EliteMail CTI Port Expansion Board ....................................................................... 6-127
Figure 6-69
FMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU ............................................................................................... 6-130
Figure 6-70
FMS(8)-U( ) ETU .................................................................................................... 6-131
Figure 6-71
FMS-U30 ETU ........................................................................................................ 6-132
Figure 6-72
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU ........................................................................................ 6-139
Figure 6-73
VMS-U30 ETU ........................................................................................................ 6-140
Figure 6-74
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-146
Figure 6-75
ACD(8)-U30 ETU ................................................................................................... 6-149
Figure 6-76
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-153
Figure 6-77
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU Connections .............................................................................. 6-157
Figure 6-78
BSU(4M)-U20 ETU ................................................................................................. 6-158
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
xvii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-79
Busy LED Flash Pattern ......................................................................................... 6-160
Figure 6-80
BSU(2S)-U20 ETU ................................................................................................. 6-162
Figure 6-81
Busy LED Flash Pattern ......................................................................................... 6-164
Figure 6-82
BSU(6S)-U20 ETU ................................................................................................. 6-166
Figure 6-83
Busy LED Flash Pattern ......................................................................................... 6-168
Figure 6-84
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-170
Figure 6-85
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-173
Figure 6-86
ECR-U( ) ETU ....................................................................................................... 6-177
Figure 6-87
ECR-U( ) ETU Block Diagram ............................................................................... 6-178
Figure 6-88
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-181
Figure 6-89
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................................... 6-183
Figure 6-90
IPCA( )-U10 ........................................................................................................... 6-186
Figure 6-91
VMP(8)-U( ) ETU With IVR HDD ............................................................................ 6-191
Figure 6-92
MG(8)-U( ) ETU ..................................................................................................... 6-196
Figure 6-93
PBR( )-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-200
Figure 6-94
VMP( )- U40 ETU .................................................................................................. 6-203
Figure 6-95
Installing the Flash Drive on the VMP( )-U40 ETU ................................................ 6-204
Figure 6-96
Flash Drive Seated on VMP( )-U40 ETU ............................................................... 6-205
Figure 6-97
Connecting the Hard Drive ..................................................................................... 6-206
Figure 6-98
Plus Sign on Battery Displayed Up ........................................................................ 6-207
Figure 6-99
Connecting the Ribbon Cable ................................................................................ 6-208
Figure 6-100
Leaving Four Pins Unconnected ............................................................................ 6-209
Figure 6-101
Placing the Hard Drive on the ETU ........................................................................ 6-209
Figure 6-102
Placing the Four Mounting Screws ........................................................................ 6-210
Figure 6-103
Installing the DSP-U30 on the VMP( )-U40 ETU .................................................... 6-212
Figure 6-104
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU ................................................................................................... 6-216
___________________________________________________________________________________
xviii
List of Figures
List Of tables
Chapter 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-1
CPUI( )/U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ................................................................ 6-8
Table 6-2
CPUI( )-U10 LED Indications ...................................................................................6-10
Table 6-3
CPUI( )-U20 ETU Default Switch Settings ............................................................... 6-13
Table 6-4
CPUI( )-U20 LED Indications ...................................................................................6-14
Table 6-5
PKU 192-U Configuration ......................................................................................... 6-15
Table 6-6
MIFA-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ................................................................... 6-20
Table 6-7
MIF-A-U( ) LED Indications ...................................................................................... 6-20
Table 6-8
MIFM-U10 Default Switch Settings .......................................................................... 6-23
Table 6-9
MIFM-U10 LED Indications ...................................................................................... 6-23
Table 6-10
MIFM-U20 Jumper Settings ..................................................................................... 6-28
Table 6-11
SPE(M)-U( ) to MIFM-U10/U20 ETU Comparison ..................................................6-34
Table 6-12
SPE(M)-U( )Switch Settings ..................................................................................... 6-35
Table 6-13
Ethernet LED Indications ..........................................................................................6-36
Table 6-14
BRT(4)-U10 ETU LED Indications ............................................................................ 6-41
Table 6-15
BRT(4)-U20 LED Indications .................................................................................... 6-45
Table 6-16
COI(8)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ................................................................6-48
Table 6-17
COI(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications ............................................................................ 6-48
Table 6-18
COIB(4)-U10 ETU Default Switch Settings .............................................................. 6-51
Table 6-19
COIB(4)-U10 ETU LED Indications .......................................................................... 6-52
Table 6-20
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Default Switch/Jumper Settings ..........................................6-54
Table 6-21
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU LED Indications .................................................................. 6-55
Table 6-22
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Feature Chart ..................................................................... 6-56
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
xix
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-23
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Default Switch/Jumper Settings ......................................... 6-58
Table 6-24
COIB(8)-U20/30 ETU LED Indications ..................................................................... 6-59
Table 6-25
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Feature Chart ..................................................................... 6-60
Table 6-26
DID(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications ............................................................................. 6-62
Table 6-27
DTI-U10~30 ETU Default Switch Settings ............................................................... 6-65
Table 6-28
DTI-U10~30 ETU LED Indications ........................................................................... 6-66
Table 6-29
DTI-U40 Default Switch Settings .............................................................................. 6-69
Table 6-30
DTI-U40 ETU LED Indications ................................................................................. 6-72
Table 6-31
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU DSW 1 Switch Settings .............................................................. 6-75
Table 6-32
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU DSW 2 Switch Settings .............................................................. 6-76
Table 6-33
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU Jumper Settings ......................................................................... 6-76
Table 6-34
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU LED Description ......................................................................... 6-77
Table 6-35
IP Gateway Options ................................................................................................. 6-81
Table 6-36
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU SW1 Settings .............................................................................. 6-85
Table 6-37
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU LED Indications ............................................................................ 6-86
Table 6-38
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ................................................................. 6-90
Table 6-39
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU LED Indications .............................................................................. 6-91
Table 6-40
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU Default Jumper Settings ............................................................. 6-93
Table 6-41
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU MJ1 Pin Assignments ................................................................ 6-103
Table 6-42
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU MJ2 Pin Assignments ................................................................ 6-103
Table 6-43
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU SW2 Switch Settings ................................................................. 6-111
Table 6-44
SW2-2/SW2-3 Details ............................................................................................ 6-112
Table 6-45
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU SW3 Switch Settings ................................................................. 6-112
Table 6-46
Configuration Support Table .................................................................................. 6-116
Table 6-47
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions .......................................................... 6-119
Table 6-48
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indicators ..................................................................... 6-120
Table 6-49
CMS-U30 ETU LED Indications ............................................................................. 6-121
Table 6-50
Configuration Support ............................................................................................ 6-124
___________________________________________________________________________________
xx
List of Tables
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-51
System Board Components ................................................................................... 6-125
Table 6-52
Daughter Board Components ................................................................................. 6-127
Table 6-53
Port Expansion Board Components ....................................................................... 6-128
Table 6-54
Configuration Support Table .................................................................................. 6-129
Table 6-55
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Switch Settings ............................................................... 6-133
Table 6-56
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions ..................................................... 6-134
Table 6-57
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications ............................................................... 6-134
Table 6-58
FMS-U30 ETU LED Indications .............................................................................. 6-135
Table 6-59
Configuration Support Table .................................................................................. 6-138
Table 6-60
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Settings ....................................................... 6-141
Table 6-61
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions ..................................................... 6-142
Table 6-62
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications ............................................................... 6-143
Table 6-63
VMS-U30 ETU LED Indications ............................................................................. 6-144
Table 6-64
ACD(8)-U10 LED Indications ................................................................................. 6-147
Table 6-65
ACD(8)-U30 ETU LED Indications ......................................................................... 6-151
Table 6-66
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ............................................................. 6-154
Table 6-67
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU LED Indications .......................................................................... 6-155
Table 6-68
ZT Status Table for LEDs 5 and 6 .......................................................................... 6-156
Table 6-69
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ............................................................. 6-171
Table 6-70
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications .......................................................................... 6-171
Table 6-71
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Reset Switch ............................................................................. 6-174
Table 6-72
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Maximum Conference Time Switch .......................................... 6-174
Table 6-73
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Party Size Switch ...................................................................... 6-175
Table 6-74
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications .......................................................................... 6-175
Table 6-75
Connector Descriptions (CN2) ............................................................................... 6-179
Table 6-76
HUB(8)-U( ) LEDS .................................................................................................. 6-182
Table 6-77
IAD(8)-U( ) Configurations ...................................................................................... 6-184
Table 6-78
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU LED Boot Sequence Indications .................................................. 6-184
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
xxi
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-79
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU Switches ...................................................................................... 6-185
Table 6-80
IPCA( )-U( )ETU LED Indications ........................................................................... 6-189
Table 6-81
Switch Settings for VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU ............................................................... 6-192
Table 6-82
VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications .................................................................... 6-193
Table 6-83
VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Ready LED Indications ......................................................... 6-194
Table 6-84
MG(8)-U( ) ETU S2 Switch Settings ...................................................................... 6-197
Table 6-85
ETU Common Settings for the IAD Platform .......................................................... 6-198
Table 6-86
Normal State LEDs ................................................................................................ 6-198
Table 6-87
Initialization LEDs ................................................................................................... 6-198
Table 6-88
VMP( )-U40 ETU Switch Settings .......................................................................... 6-213
Table 6-89
VMP( )-U40 ETU Jumper Settings ......................................................................... 6-213
Table 6-90
VMP( )-U40 ETU LED Indications (on back of ETU ............................................... 6-214
Table 6-91
VMP( )-U40 ETU Connectors ................................................................................. 6-215
Table 6-92
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings ............................................................. 6-217
Table 6-93
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications .......................................................................... 6-218
___________________________________________________________________________________
xxii
List of Tables
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Chapter 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Each Electronic Telephone Unit (ETU) is installed in a slot in the Basic or Expansion
KSU.
The B64-U20 KSU has 10 slots that are divided into three categories:
(
(
(
CPU/EXP Slot
AP Slot
Interface (IF) Slot
CPU/EXP Slot
This is the first slot from the left in the KSU. A CPUI( )/U( ) ETU must be installed in
this slot in the Basic KSU and an EXP-U10 ETU must be installed in this slot in the
Expansion KSU.
The CPUI( )/U( ) ETU is damaged when installed in slots
S1~S8!
AP Slot
The second slot from the left in the KSU, is reserved for the MIFA-U( ) ETU,
MIFM-U( ) ETU, or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
Do not install a CPU or EXP ETU in this slot in the Expansion
KSU!
Interface Slots (S1~S8)
Any interface ETU can be installed in these slots.
Slots S1 and S2 of the B64-U20 KSU are universal slots that also support the
MIFA-U( ) ETU, MIFM-U( ) ETU, or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The remainder of this chapter describes installation procedures for each ETU.
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
2.1
Installation Precautions
Observe the following precautions when installing the
ETUs to avoid static electricity damage to hardware or
exposure to hazardous voltages.
J
J
J
CMOS technology that is very susceptible to static is extensively used in
the ETUs in this system ; therefore, extreme care must be taken to avoid
static discharge when handling ETUs.
Make all switch setting changes on the ETU before inserting it in the
KSU.
When installed, the component side of all ETUs must face the left side of
the KSU. Ejector tabs are always on top. Refer to Figure 6-1 Inserting
the ETU into the KSU.
Figure 6-1 Inserting the ETU into the KSU
J
J
Carry an ETU in a conductive polyethylene bag to prevent static
electricity.
The ETU installer must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect the ETU
from static electricity.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-2
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
When you insert or remove an ETU, be sure the wrist strap is connected
to the Frame Ground Terminal on the KSU.
Figure 6-2 Inserting or Removing ETUs from the KSU
J
When you hold an ETU, do not touch the components or the soldered
surfaces with bare hands. Place one hand under the bottom corner of
the ETU and with the other hand hold the ejector tab (located in the top
corner of the ETU).
Ejector
Tab
Figure 6-3 Handling an ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
When you set switches on the ETU, wear a wrist strap and stand on a
grounded conductive work surface to avoid static electricity.
ETU
Wrist
Strap
Grounded
Conductive
Surface
Figure 6-4 Safety Precautions when Setting Switches on an ETU
J
2.2
Do not touch the surface of the ETU. A small screw driver can be used
to change the switch settings when the installer follows the
recommended safety precautions.
Inserting an ETU into the KSU Slots
1.
To unlock the ETUs slots, move the slide bar to the left.
2.
Slide the ETU into the proper slot in the KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-4
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
After the ETU is pushed all the way to the back of the KSU,
move the slide bar to the right to lock the ETU slots.
Figure 6-5 Sliding the ETU into the KSU Slot
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Removing an ETU from the KSU
1.
To unlock the ETUs, move the slide bar to the left.
2.
Lift the ejector tab on the ETU and pull the ETU out of the slot.
Figure 6-6 Lifting the Ejector Tabs on the ETU
3.
To secure remaining ETUs, move slide bar to the right.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-6
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
COMMON CONTROL ETUS
The Electronic Telephone units described in this section control the common
functions of the KSU.
3.1
CPUI( )/U( ) ETU
3.1.1
Description
The CPUI( )/U( ) ETU is the Central Processing Unit for the system.
This ETU has a Central Processing Unit and a Microprocessing Unit
(MPU).
A 32-bit microprocessor executes the programs stored on the Flash
ROM ICs of the MPU unit. This controls the entire system when data
is transferred to and from other ETUs.
This ETU provides the following items:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
3.1.2
Time Division Switch (TDSW)
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
32-bit Processor
25 MHz Clock
4-channel DTMF Push Button Receiver (PBR)
Sixteen 4-party Conference Circuits
Internal (digital music) Music-on-Hold source
External Music-on-Hold input (also used for station background
music)
Flash ROM (FROM)
Call Progress and DTMF Tone Generator
Memory Backup Battery (Retains memory for approximately 21
days)
Key Function (KF)/Multifunction (MF) Registration
Installation
Each system must have this ETU in the CPU/EXP slot of the basic
B64-U20 KSU. Each system has one CPUI( )/U( ) ETU. Refer to
Figure 6-7 CPUI( )/U( ) ETU on page 6-8.
The CPUI( )/U( ) ETU is severely damaged
when installed in slots S1~S8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-7 CPUI( )/U( ) ETU
3.1.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-1 CPUI( )/U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-1 CPUI( )/U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
SW1-1
SW1-2
Description
Off
Off
Normal Operation
On
Off
Flash ROM load from COM1 port
Off
On
Factory Test
On
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-8
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-1 CPUI( )/U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings (Continued)
SW1-1
SW1-2
SW1-3
Description
Off
MF Mode
On
KF Mode
SW2
Momentary
Switch
Description
Description
System Reset
SW3-1
Description
On
System boot by EPROM
Off
System boot by Flash ROM
SW3-2
N/A
Description
Not Used
Pressing SW2 interrupts all service and causes
a second initialization. Use this switch only as a
last resort.
3.1.4
Connectors
Before programming System Data, the battery must be connected to
CN4 to allow memory retention if a power failure or brownout occurs.
If a brownout or power failure does occur, and the battery backup
circuit is not activated, System Data resets to the default values, all
stations in the system reset to the default values, and all data
programmed on individual stations is cleared.
When a CPUI( )/U( ) ETU is installed in the system or battery
backup fails for any reason, the clock/calendar must be set.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
When CPUI( )/U( ) ETU is removed for long term storage,
disconnect the battery from CN4. This prevents the battery from
discharging completely. The fully charged battery retains memory for
approximately 21 days.
The CPUI( )/U( ) ETU has the following connectors:
H
H
H
H
H
H
3.1.5
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Connects to the AP-bus.
CN3
Connects to CN2 on the EXP-U( ) ETU via the
expansion cable or CN2 of the EXPT(2)-U( )
ETU.
CN4
Connects to the memory backup battery via the
battery cable (factory installed).
CN5
Connects to CN1 of the CLKG-U( ) Unit.
CN6
Connects to CN2 of the CLKG-U( ) Unit.
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-2 CPUI( )-U10 LED Indications.
Table 6-2 CPUI( )-U10 LED Indications
LED
3.1.6
Description
LIVE
CPU status
LED2
Power status
On
Flashing
Off
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
System Power
On
Not Used
System
Power Off
Replacing Memory Backup
The CPUI( )/U( ) ETU provides memory backup for approximately
21 days. The Ni-Cad battery should be replaced about every two
years.
1.
Remove the battery cable from CPUI( )/U( ) ETU CN4. Refer
to Figure 6-7 CPUI( )/U( ) ETU on page 6-8.
2.
Connect the cable from the new battery to CN4 on the CPUI( )/
U( ) ETU.
3.
Turn off the KSU power.
4.
Remove the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU from the KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 10
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
5.
Using a suitable cutting tool, cut the tie wrap, and remove the
old battery.
6.
Fasten the new battery with a tie wrap.
7.
Install the new CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
8.
Turn on the KSU power.
CPUI( )-U20 ETU
3.2.1
Description
The CPUI( )-U20 ETU is the Central Processing Unit for the system
(R2.01 or higher). This ETU has a Central Processing Unit and a
Microprocessing Unit (MPU).
A 32-bit microprocessor executes the programs stored on the Flash
ROM ICs of the MPU unit. This controls the entire system when data
is transferred to and from other ETUs.
This ETU provides the following items:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Time Division Switch (TDSW)
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
32-bit Processor
25 MHz Clock
4-channel DTMF Push Button Receiver (PBR)
Sixteen 4-party Conference Circuits
Internal (digital music) Music-on-Hold source
External Music-on-Hold input (also used for station background
music)
Flash ROM (FROM)
Call Progress and DTMF Tone Generator
Memory Backup Battery (Retains memory for approximately 21
days)
Key Function (KF)/Multifunction (MF) Registration
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2
Installation
Each system must have this ETU in the CPU/EXP slot of the basic
B64-U20 KSU. Each system has one CPUI( )-U20 ETU. Refer to
Figure 6-8 CPUI( )-U20 ETU.
The CPUI( )-U20 is severely damaged when
installed in slots S1~S8.
Figure 6-8 CPUI( )-U20 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 12
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-3 CPUI( )-U20 ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-3 CPUI( )-U20 ETU Default Switch Settings
SW1-1
SW1-2
Description
Off
Off
Normal Operation
On
Off
Flash ROM load from COM1 port
Off
On
Factory Test
On
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
SW1-3
Description
Off
MF Mode
On
KF Mode
SW2
Momentary
Switch
Description
System Reset
SW3-1
Description
On
System boot by EPROM
Off
System boot by Flash ROM
SW3-2
N/A
Description
Not Used
Pressing SW2 interrupts all service and causes
a second initialization. Use this switch only as a
last resort.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.4
Connectors
Before programming System Data, the battery must be connected to
CN4 to allow memory retention when a power failure or brownout
occurs. When a brownout or power failure does occur, and the
battery backup circuit is not activated, System Data resets to the
default values, all stations in the system reset to the default values,
and all data programmed on individual stations is cleared.
When a CPUI( )-U20 ETU is installed in the system or battery backup
fails for any reason, the clock/calendar must be set.
When CPUI( )-U20 ETU is removed for long term storage,
disconnect the battery from CN4. This prevents the battery from
discharging completely. The fully charged battery retains memory for
approximately 21 days.
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
H
3.2.5
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Connects to the AP-bus.
CN3
Connects to CN2 on the EXP-U( ) ETU using
the expansion cable or CN2 of the EXPT(2)-U( )
ETU.
CN4
Connects to the memory backup battery using
the battery cable (factory installed).
CN5
Connects to CN1 of the CLKG-U( ) Unit.
CN6
Connects to CN2 of the CLKG-U( ) Unit.
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-4 CPUI( )-U20 LED Indications.
Table 6-4 CPUI( )-U20 LED Indications
LED
Description
LIVE
CPU status
LED2
Power status
On
Flashing
Off
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
System Power
On
Not Used
System
Power Off
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 14
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.6
Replacing Memory Backup
The CPUI( )-U20 ETU provides memory backup for approximately
21 days. The Ni-Cad battery should be replaced about every two
years.
3.3
1.
Remove the battery cable from CPUI( )-U20 ETU CN4. Refer to
Figure 6-8 CPUI( )-U20 ETU on page 6-12.
2.
Connect the cable from the new battery to CN4 on the
CPUI( )-U20 ETU.
3.
Turn off the KSU power.
4.
Remove the CPUI( )-U20 ETU from the KSU.
5.
Using a suitable cutting tool, cut the tie wrap, and remove the
old battery.
6.
Fasten the new battery with a tie wrap.
7.
Install the new CPUI( )-U20 ETU.
8.
Turn on the KSU power.
PKU 192-U (Port Key Unit)
When the Port Key Unit is installed, the system is configured as an Expanded
Port Package. When the PKU 192-U is not installed, the system is configured
as a Basic Port Package.
The PKU 192-U is installed in the IC30 socket of the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Table 6-5 PKU 192-U Configuration
Basic Port
Package
Expanded Port
Package
Basic Terminals (Telephones)
32
120,
Shared Call Arrival (CAR) Keys with Basic Terminal
24
112
Dedicated Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
40
0
Basic Terminals + Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
72
120
Basic Trunks
16
64
Universal Slots
24
24
Shared MIF Slots with Universal Slots
2
2
Dedicated MIF Slot
1
1
Description
, Basic Terminal telephones include Wireless (PSII) and Voice Mail stations.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
CLKG-U( ) Unit
3.4.1
Description
The CLKG-U( ) Unit synchronizes the clock for T1/FT1 lines,
ISDN-BRI lines, ISDN-PRI, and Wireless stations that are connected
to the system.
This unit works with the DTI-U, BRT(4)-U20, PRT(1)-U( ), and
BSU(2)-U( ) ETUs and is piggybacked on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Figure 6-9 CLKG-U( ) Unit
3.4.2
Installation
Only one CLKG-U( ) Unit can be installed.
3.4.3
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
CN1
Connects to CN5 on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
CN2
Connects to CN6 on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 16
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4.4
Switch Settings
Leave SW1 set to ISDN.PHS when ISDN/T1 or both ISDN/T1 and
Wireless are installed.
When only Wireless is installed, set SW1 to PHS.
3.5
EXP-U( ) ETU
3.5.1
Description
The EXP-U( ) ETU is the Expansion KSU Controller. This ETU
controls transmission between the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU and the other
ETUs installed in the expansion KSU when it is installed.
Figure 6-10 EXP-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.5.2
Installation
Turn system power off, and install the EXP-U( ) ETU in the
CPU/EXP slot of the expansion KSU.
3.5.3
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Connected to CN3 on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU or CN3
on EXP-U( ) ETU (installed in the first expansion
cabinet) using an expansion cable.
CN3
Connected to the CN2 on the EXP-U( ) ETU installed
in the third expansion cabinet using the expansion
cable or to CN2 of the EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU.
3.6
Not used when the EXP-U( ) ETU is installed in the
last Expansion KSU.
KMA( )U
3.6.1
Description
The KMA( )U is a feature module that is installed on the MIFA-U( )
ETU to provide ACD with MIS statistical output to the ElectraStat.
3.6.2
Installation
Like all ICs, this unit has a notch on one side. Find the notch on the
IC6 silkscreen, and align the KMA( )U so the notches are on the
same side before installing.
3.7
KMM( )U
3.7.1
Description
The KMM( )U is a feature module that is installed on the MIFM-U10
ETU to provide LCR and/or Caller ID scrolling and dialing features.
3.7.2
Installation
Like all ICs, this unit has a notch on one side. Find the notch on the
IC6 silkscreen, and align the KMM( )U so that the notches are on the
same side before installing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 18
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8
KMM-U20
3.8.1
Description
The KMM-U20 upgrade chip is a feature module that is installed on
the MIFM-U20 ETU to provide LCR and/or Caller ID scrolling and
dialing features.
3.8.2
Installation
Like all ICs, this unit has a guide on one side. Install the KMM-U20
with the missing corner in the bottom left corner.
3.9
MIFA-U( ) ETU
3.9.1
Description
The MIFA-U( ) ETU provides additional memory and processing
power to support UCD and ACD with MIS features. UCD is standard
with this ETU, but the ACD with MIS requires a KMA( )U to be
installed on the MIFA-U( ) ETU.
Figure 6-11 MIFA-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9.2
Installation
Only one MIFA-U( ) ETU can be installed in the system. When ACD
MIS is used, the MIFA-U( ) ETU must be installed in the AP slot and
have the KMA( )U installed on it. The MIFA-U( ) ETU can be
installed in the first or second IF (interface) slot of the basic B64-U20
KSU when KMA( )U is not installed.
3.9.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-6 MIFA-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-6 MIFA-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
SW2-1
SW2-2
Off
Off
Normal Operation
On
Off
Factory Test
Off
On
Not Used
On
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
SW1
3.9.4
Description
Description
On
System boot by Flash ROM
Off
System boot by EPROM
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-7 MIF-A-U( ) LED Indications.
Table 6-7 MIF-A-U( ) LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Operation stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
Off
LIVE
ETU Status
No Power
LED1
Programming Problem when
Loading Flash Not Used
Status
loading Flash ROM ROM from
EPROM
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 20
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Connects to the backplane.
CN3
Used to connect the ETU backup battery during
installation, and disconnect the battery when storing
the ETU.
IC6
Socket for the optional KMA( )U
The ACD/MIS cable connects at the COM3, a standard female DB-9
DCE port, on the KSU that contains the MIFA-U( ) ETU. A straight
DB-9 cable is required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
MIFM-U10 ETU
3.10.1
Description
This ETU provides additional memory and processing power for PC
Programming, Wireless activation, SMDR, LCR, and ANI/Caller ID
scrolling. PC Programming/Wireless activation and SMDR are
standard with this ETU. LCR and Caller ID scrolling requires the
KMM( )U to be installed on the MIFM-U10 ETU.
When the MIFM-U10 ETU is installed in IF slot S1 or S2 (as opposed
to the AP slot) the Modem Kit Unit can be mounted on the MIFM-U10
ETU.
The MIFM-U10 ETU can be installed in the AP slot or the first or
second IF slot in the basic B64-U20 KSU.
Figure 6-12 MIFM-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 22
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.2
Installation
Only one MIFM-U10 ETU can be installed in the system.
3.10.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-8 MIFM-U10 Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-8 MIFM-U10 Default Switch Settings
SW2-1
SW2-2
Description
Off
Off
Normal Operation
On
Off
Factory Test
Off
On
Not Used
On
On
FROM (Flash ROM) load from EPROM (Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory)
SW1
3.10.4
Description
On
System boot by Flash ROM
Off
System boot by EPROM
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-9 MIFM-U10 LED Indications.
Table 6-9 MIFM-U10 LED Indications
LED
Description
On
LIVE
ETU Status
Operation
stopped (Power
On)
LED1
Programming Problem when
Status
loading Flash
ROM
- or -
Flashing
Off
Normal
Operation
No Power
Loading Flash
ROM from
EPROM
Not Used
PC or LCR
Programming
connected
or
SMDR is
outputting call
records
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Connects to the backplane.
CN3
Used to connect the ETU backup battery during
installation.
H
H
Always disconnect the battery when
storing the ETU.
CN4, CN5
Connectors for the optional Modem Kit Unit
IC6
Socket for the optional KMM( )U
SMDR and PC Programming connections are made (using COM
ports) on the side of the KSU that contains the MIFM-U10 ETU.
H
H
COM1
PC/LCR/Wireless Programming
COM2
SMDR
Both COM ports are standard female DB-9 DCE ports. A straight
cable is required.
When an external modem is used, connect the modem to COM1 port
using the provided modem cable adapter. A straight DB-9 to DB-25
cable (9-pin male to 25-pin male) is required.
DB-9 Female Plug
DB-9 Cable
(Male End)
DB-25 Cable
(Male End)
Adapter
Adapter
(DB-25 Female End)
Adapter
(DB-25 Male End)
External
Modem Connector
(DB-25 Female End)
Figure 6-13 Connecting a Modem to the B64-U20 KSU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 24
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.11
MIFM-U20 ETU
3.11.1
Description
This ETU provides additional Memory and Processing Power for PC
Programming, Wireless activation, SMDR, LCR, and ANI/Caller ID
scrolling. It provides all the features of the MIFM-U10 plus an
optional Ethernet Port. PC Programming/Wireless and SMDR are
standard with this ETU. LCR and Caller ID scrolling require
installation of the KMM-U20 Upgrade chip on this ETU.
Figure 6-14 MIFM-U20 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.11.2
Installation
Only one MIFM-U20 ETU can be installed in the system in the AP
slot or IF Slot S1 or S2.
When this ETU is installed in IF slot S1 or S2, the MOD-U10 Unit
(Serial Socket Modem) can be installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU.
3.11.3
Configuration Options
Options include the following:
H
H
H
H
Basic Model
Basic Module with MOD-U10 Unit
Basic Module with ETH-U10 Unit
The POW-U10 Unit must be used with the ETH-U10 Unit.
Basic Module with MOD-U10 Unit, ETH-U10 Unit, and
POW-U10 Unit
The optional Units can be installed in the field. Power must be off.
3.11.4
Optional Units
The following units are optional:
H
H
H
H
ETH-U10 (Ethernet Unit)
MOD-U10 (Modem) Unit
POW-U10 (Power) Unit
KMM-U20 Upgrade Chip
ETH-U10 Unit
This unit is installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU to provide a LAN
connection and must be installed in connectors J17, J18, J20, and
J21.
Figure 6-15 ETH-U10 Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 26
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
The ETH-U10 pins and the sockets of the MIFM-U20 ETU are
labeled. Line up ETH unit connector J2 with MIFM J20 and unit
connector J5 with MIFM J18, and carefully plug in the unit.
The POW-U10 Unit is required when using the ETH-U10 Unit.
MOD-U10 Unit
This unit is installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU to provide a modem and
must be installed in connectors J10, J11, J12, and J13.
Figure 6-16 MOD-U10 Unit
The MOD-U10 Unit pins and the sockets of the MIFM-U20 ETU are
labeled. Line up MOD unit connector J1 with MIFM J11 and MOD
unit J2 with MIFM J10, and carefully plug in the unit.
POW-U10 Unit
This unit is installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU to provide power for the
Ethernet ETH-U10 Unit and must be installed in connectors J14, J15,
J16, and J19.
Figure 6-17 POW-U10 Unit
The POW-U10 Unit pins and the sockets of the MIFM-U20 ETU are
labeled. Line up POW unit connector J1 with MIFM-U20 ETU J15
and POW unit J2 with MIFM J16, and carefully plug in the unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.11.5
Jumper Settings
Refer to Table 6-10 MIFM-U20 Jumper Settings.
Table 6-10 MIFM-U20 Jumper Settings
3.11.6
Pins not
Connected
Pins
Connected
Sets factory
defaults during
power up
No Action
Forces factory
default settings
WD DIS
Enables/disables
Watchdog Timer
Watchdog
Enabled
Watchdog
Disabled
JP7
Console
(Log)
Displays Bootup
messages on
COM 1
No Messages
Messages on
COM 1
JP8
CLI
(ETH)
Sets SPE Mode
MIFM Mode
SPE Mode
Jumper
Name
JP5
DFLTS
JP6
Description
LED indications
LED 1 (on back of the ETU behind LIVE LED)
H
H
H
Off
SMDR Idle, No Flash ROM write is occurring
On steady
Flash ROM write error
Flashing
Outputting SMDR REcords using KSU COM 2
or TCP Connection/Writing to Flash ROM
LED 3 (on back of the ETU behind STAT LED)
H
H
H
On
SPE Application connected or LAN PC
Programming
Off
No SPE or LAN PC Programming
Flashing
Not Used
LIVE LED
H
H
H
On
Indicates problem
Off
Indicates problem
Flashing
Normal Operation
STAT LED
H
H
ON
SPE ETU initialization successfully completed
Flashing
Initialization error
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 28
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.11.7
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane
CN2
Connects to the backplane
J10
Connects to the MOD-U10 Unit
J11
Connects to the MOD-U10 Unit
J12
Connects to the MOD-U10 Unit
J13
Connects to the MOD-U10 Unit
J14
Connects to the POW-U10 Unit
J15
Connects to the POW-U10 Unit
J16
Connects to the POW-U10 Unit
J19
Connects to the POW-U10 Unit
J17
Connects to the ETH-U10 Unit
J18
Connects to the ETH-U10 Unit
J20
Connects to the ETH-U10 Unit
J21
Connects to the ETH-U10 Unit
U49
Socket for optional KMM-U20 Upgrade Chip
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.12
Modem Kit Unit
3.12.1
Description
This optional modem mounts on the MIFM-U10 ETU or PCT(S)-U( )
Unit and does not require analog port connection. The MIFM-U10
must be installed in slot S1 or S2 of the Basic KSU for this on-board
modem to work.
3.12.2
Installation
The Modem Kit Unit pins and the pins of the CN4 and CN5 socket
are labeled. The Modem Kit has one row of pins that is missing a
pin. Align the modem so the empty pin space is lined up with the
socket that has that pin connection blocked.
Figure 6-18 Modem Kit
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 30
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.13
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
3.13.1
Description
The Single Point of Entry ETU provides a single, remote or direct
access point for configuring the system and individual ETUs. It
contains all the functionality of the MIFM-U10 ETU with the
Activation key, KMM( )U, installed or the MIFM-U20 with the
KMM-U20 installed, and comes with a standard built-in modem. An
Ethernet port is provided to allow programming over a network using
TCP/IP.
The SPE(M)-U ( ) ETU has six physical COM ports. The COM1 port
for PC Programming and COM2 port for SMDR go through the
backplane on the side of the KSU that contains the MIFM-U20 ETU.
The COM-A, COM-B, COM-C, and COM-D ports are accessible
along the front of the ETU and allow interfacing to other
programmable ETUs (e.g., VMS).
The SPE(M)-U ( ) ETU communicates with the Electra Elite IPK or
Electra Elite 48/192 systems using the following methods:
H
H
H
Serial – Using COM1 on the KSU chassis
Modem – v.34 @ 33.6 baud
Ethernet – 10/100Mbps LAN/WAN Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Memory
Card
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
OFF
DCE DTE
SW 1
SW 3
SW 4
ON
COM D
DCE DTE
SW 2
CN2
COM C
Modem Unit
COM B
Fixed DTE
COM A
Fixed DTE
CN1
LIVE
STAT
J5
LAN
10/100
Note: The detail on this board may not appear exactly like the board.
Figure 6-19 SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (Front)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 32
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
MMC MMC
Detect Idle
LED 1
LED 3
Figure 6-20 SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (Back)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.13.2
Comparison of SPE(M)-U( ) ETU to MIFM-U10/20 ETU
Refer to Table 6-11 SPE(M)-U( ) to MIFM-U10/U20 ETU
Comparison.
Table 6-11 SPE(M)-U( ) to MIFM-U10/U20 ETU Comparison
Feature
Hardware Components
SAT Serial Programming
MIFM-U10 ETU
MIFM-U10 ETU
KMM( )U PAL chip
Modem Kit Unit
MIFM-U20 ETU
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
MIFM-U20 with KMM-U20
upgrade chip and the
MOD-U10, POW-U10, and
ETH-U10 Units.
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU with Soft
Modem Activation Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Optional)
Yes (Optional)
Yes (Standard)
38.4K
38.4K
38.4K
Yes (Optional) with Elite
LAN PC Programming
Device)
Yes (Optional) for
MIFM-U20 using ETH-U10
and POW-U10 Units)
Yes
LCR Serial Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCR Modem Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCR Ethernet Programming
No
Yes
Yes
Serial SMDR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ethernet SMDR
No
Yes
(simultaneous on serial also)
Yes
(simultaneous on serial also)
Approximately 100 call
records
Maximum of 200 records in
non-volatile Memory
Maximum of 200 records in
non-volatile Memory
50 per Station
50 per Station in
non-volatile Memory
50 per Station in
non-volatile Memory
VM CoSession using KSU
serial port
No
No
Yes
VM CoSession using
modem not on VM ETU
No
No
Yes
VM CoSession using
Ethernet
No
No
Yes
BRT/PRT/CCH Remote
Debugging
No
No
Yes
SAT Modem Programming
Maximum Modem Speed
SAT Ethernet (Intra/
Internet) Programming
SMDR Record Storage
when Printer is not
connected
Caller ID Storage
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 34
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.13.3
Installation
Only one SPE(M)-U( ) ETU can be installed in the system in an AP,
S1, or S2 slot. When the Modem is used, this ETU must be installed
in slot S1 or S2.
3.13.4
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-12 SPE(M)-U( )Switch Settings.
Table 6-12 SPE(M)-U( )Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
Off
COM - D acting as DCE (Default)
On
COM - D acting as DTE
Off
COM - C acting as DCE (Default)
On
COM - C acting as DTE
N/A
Reset the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
On
Not Used
Off
Not Used (Default)
On
Restores ETU to Factory Defaults
Off
Save Settings (Default)
On
Not Used
Off
Not Used (Default)
On
Not Used
Off
Not Used (Default)
On
Not Used
Off
Not Used (Default)
On
Not Used
Off
Not Used (Default)
On
Enables Debug through KSU COM 1
Off
Disables Debug through KSU COM 1 (Default)
On
MIFM Mode only (Emulates MIFM; SPE Mode
disabled).
Off
SPE Mode (Default)
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW 4-1
SW 4-2
SW 4-3
SW 4-4
SW 4-5
SW 4-6
SW 4-7
SW 4-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.13.5
LED Indications
Ethernet LED Indications
Table 6-13 Ethernet LED Indications
LED
Green
Yellow
ON
Link Detected
100 Mbps
OFF
Link Not Detected
10 Mbps
Flashing
Activity
N/A
Initial Boot Indications
All LEDs except the flashing LIVE LED remain On continuously
during boot up. After the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU finishes the boot up
process all other LEDs go off momentarily, but the LIVE LED
continues to flash.
Normal Run Time LEDs
LIVE LED
H
H
H
On
Problem indicated
Off
Problem indicated
Flashing
Normal operation
STAT LED
H
H
On
SPE ETU initialization successful.
Flashing
Initialization error
LED 1
H
On
H
SPE application connection or LAN PC
Programming
Off
H
No SPE application connection or LAN PC
Programming
Flashing
Not used
LED 3
H
H
H
On
Stays on for Flash ROM Write error
Off
SMRD idle, no Flash ROM write
Flashing
Outputting SMDR records through KSU COM 2
or TCP connection/Writing to Flash ROM
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 36
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Firmware upload
The green LED on the Ethernet connector is on when data is being
transferred through the Ethernet port. When upload data is being
stored in nonvolatile memory, LED 3 flashes.
3.13.6
Connectors or Ports
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to backplane,
CN2
Connects to backplane
J5
10/100 Mbps Ethernet connector used by SPE
ETU for connection with System Administration
Terminal (SAT), Least Cost Routing (LCR), or
SPE application
COM A
Always Configured as DTE device
COM B
Always Configured as DTE device
COM C
H
Default configured as DCE device
Switch SW 2 used to configure for DTE device
when needed
COM D
H
Default configured as DCE device
Switch SW 1 used to configure for DTE device
when needed
Memory
For future use
H
H
H
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
TRUNK ETUS
The Electronic Telephone Units described in this section provide a link between trunks
in the Electra Elite IPK system and outside equipment. All ETUs are installed in the
interface slots of the KSU.
4.1
BRT(4)-U10 ETU
4.1.1
Description
The Basic Rate Trunk (BRT) Interface ETU terminates ISDN Basic
Rate Trunk lines and supports four ISDN-BRI circuits. Each trunk
supports two B channels. These eight B channels can be used for
CO trunks with DTMF signaling. Tip and Ring electrical fuses are
provided to comply with UL 1459 requirements.
This ETU uses an S/T-type interface. When connecting to a CO, a
locally provided Network Termination unit (NT1) is required. Caller
ID is supported.
One BRT ETU provides a maximum of four ISDN circuits that provide
eight B channels to be used as trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 38
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-21 BRT(4)-U10 ETU
4.1.2
Installation
When a BRT(4)-U10 ETU is installed, a CLKG-U( ) Unit must be
installed on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of two BRT(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot in the system. The system limitation is 16 trunks.
The maximum number of BRT(4)-U10 ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight BRT(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot in the system. The system limitation is 64 trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The maximum number of BRT(4)-U10 ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
4.1.3
Switch Settings
SW1 is the reset switch.
4.1.4
Jumpers
CN101 and CN102
H
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 1. Jumper
Pins 1 and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the
100Ω terminal.
CN201 and CN202
H
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 2. Jumper Pins
1 and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
CN301 and CN302
H
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 3. Jumper Pins
1 and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
CN401 and CN402
H
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 4. Jumper Pins
1 and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 40
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.1.5
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-14 BRT(4)-U10 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-14 BRT(4)-U10 ETU LED Indications
LED
4.1.6
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LED 1 ETU status
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
LED 2 L1 status - BRI
CKT1
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 3 L1 status - BRI
CKT2
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 4 L1 status - BRI
CKT3
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 5 L1 status - BRI
CKT4
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 6 B1 or B2 status
CKT 1
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 7 B1 or B2 status
CKT 2
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 8 B1 or B2 status
CKT 3
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 9 B1 or B2 status
CKT 4
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 10 Communication
or self-diagnostics
Communication
error
or
Self-diagnostics
in progress
Not Used
Normal
LED 11 Communication
or self-diagnostics
Communication
error
or
Self-diagnostics
in progress
Not Used
Normal
Connectors
The following connector is included:
CN1Connects to the backplane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.1.7
Connections
MDF for BRT ETU
TELCO
Network
and CO
ST/4 Wire
TA 1
TB 1
RA 1
RB 1
NT1
ST/4 Wire
TA 2
TB 2
RA 2
RB 2
NT1
ST/4 Wire
TA 3
TB 3
RA 3
RB 3
NT1
ST/4 Wire
TA 4
TB 4
RA 4
RB 4
NT1
Circuit 1
U Interface / 2 Wire
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Figure 6-22 BRT(4)-U10 Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 42
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.2
BRT(4)-U20 ETU
4.2.1
Description
The Basic Rate Trunk (BRT) Interface ETU terminates ISDN Basic
Rate Trunk lines and supports four ISDN-BRI circuits. Each trunk
supports two B channels. These eight B channels can be used for
CO trunks with DTMF signaling.
This ETU uses an S/T-type interface. When connecting to a CO, a
locally provided Network Termination unit (NT1) is required. Caller
ID is supported.
One BRT ETU provides a maximum of four ISDN circuits that
provide eight B channels to be used as trunks.
Figure 6-23 BRT(4)-U20 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.2.2
Installation
When a BRT(4)-U20 ETU is installed, a CLKG-U( ) Unit must be
installed on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of two BRT(4)-U20 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot in the system. The system limitation is 16 trunks.
The maximum number of BRT(4)-U20 ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight BRT(4)-U20 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot in the system. The system limitation is 64 trunks.
The maximum number of BRT(4)-U20 ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
4.2.3
Switch Settings
SW1 is the reset switch.
DSW1 is used for maintenance. Normal operation is all 3 Off.
4.2.4
Jumpers
CN101 and CN102
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 1. Jumper Pins 1
and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
CN201 and CN202
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 2. Jumper Pins 1
and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
CN301 and CN302
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 3. Jumper Pins 1
and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
CN401 and CN402
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Circuit 4. Jumper Pins 1
and 2 are shorted together at the factory to turn on the 100Ω
terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 44
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.2.5
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-15 BRT(4)-U20 LED Indications.
Table 6-15 BRT(4)-U20 LED Indications
LED
4.2.6
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LED 1 ETU status
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
LED 2 L1 status - BRI
CKT1
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 3 L1 status - BRI
CKT2
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 4 L1 status - BRI
CKT3
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 5 L1 status - BRI
CKT4
L1 working
Not Used
L1 idle
LED 6 B1 or B2 status
Circuit 1
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 7 B1 or B2 status
Circuit 2
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 8 B1 or B2 status
Circuit 3
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 9 B1 or B2 status
Circuit 4
Busy
Not Used
Idle
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN3
DB9 Pin Male connector used for maintenance
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.2.7
Connections
MDF for BRT ETU
TELCO
Network
and CO
ST/4 Wire
TA 1
TB 1
RA 1
RB 1
NT1
ST/4 Wire
TA 2
TB 2
RA 2
RB 2
NT1
ST/4 Wire
TA 3
TB 3
RA 3
RB 3
NT1
ST/4 Wire
TA 4
TB 4
RA 4
RB 4
NT1
Circuit 1
U Interface / 2 Wire
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Figure 6-24 BRT(4)-U20 Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 46
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.3
COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
4.3.1
Description
The COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU is the Central Office interface. The COI
ETU contains circuitry for outside ring detection, holding, dialing, and
control functions.
This ETU can provide a CAMA trunk for Enhanced E911.
The COI(8)-U( ) ETU has identical circuits to serve up to eight CO
trunks that can be any combination of Loop Start or Ground Start
with DTMF signaling. The COI(4)-U( ) ETU is for Loop Start trunks
with DTMF signaling only. ETU Tip and Ring electrical fuses are
provided to comply with UL 1459 requirements.
Refer to Figure 6-25 COI(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 6-25 COI(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.3.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four COI(4)-U( ) ETUs or two COI(8)-U( ) ETUs can
be installed in any interface slot. The system limitation is 16 trunks.
The maximum number COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 16 COI(4)-U( ) ETUs or eight COI(8)-U( ) ETUs can
be installed in any interface slot. The system limitation is 64 trunks.
The maximum number COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
4.3.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-48 CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indicators.
Table 6-16 COI(8)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
4.3.4
Setting
Description
SW1~8
Set according to the
line type.
Default Setting: LP
Switches between Loop Start (LP)
or Ground Start (GS) Trunks on
Lines 1~8 of COI(8)-U10 ETU.
Reset
N/A
Resets the COI ETU
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-16 COI(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-17 COI(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
LIVE
ETU status
LED 1
Line 1 status
COI(4)/COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 2
Line 2 status
COI(4)/COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 3
Line 3 status
COI(4)/COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 48
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-17 COI(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
4.3.5
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LED 4
Line 4 status
COI(4)/COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 5
Line 5 status COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 6
Line 6 status COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 7
Line 7 status COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 8
Line 8 status COI(8)
Busy
Not Used
Idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
4.3.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
Connections
MDF
MDF
Demark
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
COI(4)-U( ) ETU
CO
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8
Demark
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
CO
COI(8)-U( ) ETU
Figure 6-26 COI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.4
COIB(4)-U10 ETU
4.4.1
Description
This ETU can function the same as the COI(4)-U( ) ETU or
COID(4)-U( ) ETU to provide a Central Office interface. When the
ETU is set for COID mode, Loop Start trunks and /or Caller ID trunks
are supported. When the ETU is set for COI mode, Loop Start or
Ground Start is supported. Caller ID is not supported in COI mode.
Connections for Ground Start trunks are polarity sensitive.
Fax CO Branch Support is provided on Port 4 only.
Only DTMF signaling is supported.
This ETU can provide an E911 CAMA trunk.
Tip and Ring electrical fuses are provided to comply with UL 1459
requirements.
Figure 6-27 COIB(4)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 50
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.4.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four COIB(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot. The system is limited by 16 trunks.
The maximum number of COIB(4)-U10 ETUs depends on other
trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX
lines in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 16 COIB(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot when configured as COID ETUs. A maximum of 16
COIB(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in any interface slot when
configured as COI ETUs. The system is limited by 64 trunks.
The maximum number of COIB(4)-U10 ETUs depends on other
trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX
lines in the system.
4.4.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-18 COIB(4)-U10 ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-18 COIB(4)-U10 ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW100~400
Set for line type.
Default Setting: LP
Switches between Loop Start (LP)
or Ground Start (GS) Trunks.
S1
Open for COI
Shorted (default) for
COID
Selects the function for
COIB(4)-U10 ETU between COI
or COID mode
N/A
Resets the COIB(4)-U10 ETU
Reset
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.4.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-19 COIB(4)-U10 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-19 COIB(4)-U10 ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
ETU status
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
LED 1/CH1
Channel 1
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 2/CH2
Channel 2
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 3/CH3
Channel 3
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 4/CH4
Channel 4
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
FAX
FAX Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LIVE
Switch SW400 must be set to Loop Start for FAX CO function to work.
4.4.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
4.4.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Future
CN3
Future
Connections
Fax
Branch
MDF
Demark
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T8
R8
T
R
CO
Figure 6-28 COIB(4)-U10 ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 52
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.5
COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU
4.5.1
Description
These ETUs functions are similar to the COI(4)-U( ) or COID(4)-U( )
ETU to provide a Central Office interface. Only the COIB(4)-U30 can
support the CO Message Waiting Indication feature (R2000 or
higher). These ETUs have transmit and receive pad controls.
When the ETU is set for COID mode, Loop Start trunks and Caller
ID trunks are supported. When the ETU is set for COI mode, Loop
Start is supported. Ground Start Trunks are not supported. Caller
ID is not supported in COI mode. Fax CO Branch support is
provided on port 4 only.
Only DTMF signaling is supported.
This ETU can provide an E911 CAMA trunk on port 3 only.
Tip and RIng electrical fuses are provided to comply with UL 60950
requirements.
Figure 6-29 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.5.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot. The system is limited by 16 trunks.
The maximum number of COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETUs depends on other
trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX
lines in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 16 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot when configured as COID ETUs . A maximum of 16
COIB(4)-U20 ETUs can be installed in any interface slot when
configured as COI ETUs. The system is limited by 64 trunks.
The maximum number of COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETUs depends on other
trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX
lines in the system.
4.5.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-20 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Default Switch/Jumper
Settings.
Table 6-20 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Default Switch/Jumper Settings
Switch/
Jumper
Setting
Description
JP100~400
Jumpers 1-2 shorted
6dB increase
Jumpers 2-3 shorted (default)
No Gain
Jumpers 3-4 shorted
6dB decrease
Receive pad for related
channel
JP101~401
Jumpers 1-2 shorted
6dB increase
Jumpers 2-3 shorted (default)
No Gain
Jumpers 3-4 shorted
6dB decrease
Transmit pad for
related channel
S1
Open for COI
Shorted (default) for COID
Selects the function for
COIB(4)-U20 ETU
between COI or COID
mode.
Reset
N/A
Resets the
COIB(4)-U20 ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 54
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.5.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-21 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-21 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
Flashing
Off
Operation
Stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No
Power
LIVE
ETU status
LED 1
Channel 1 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 2
Channel 2 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 3
Channel 3 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 4
Channel 4 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
FAX status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
FAX
4.5.5
On
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
4.5.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Future
CN3
Future
Connections
Fax
Branch
MDF
Demark
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T8
R8
T
R
CO
Figure 6-30 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.5.7
ETU Feature Chart
Refer to Table 6-22 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Feature Chart.
Table 6-22 COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU Feature Chart
ETU
Caller ID
(See
Note)
CO
Message
Waiting
Indicate
Pad
Control
Loop
Start
COI(4)-U( )
X
COI(8)-U( )
X
COID(4)-U( )
X
X
COID(8)-U( )
X
X
COIB(4)-U10
X
X
COIB(4)-U20
X
COIB(4)-U30
X
COIB(8)-U( )
X
COIB(8)-U30
X
X
X
Ground
Start
Fax
Branch
CAMA
Trunk
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Caller ID is not supported for Ground Start trunks.
The COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU supports CAMA trunks on port 3 and the
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU supports CAMA trunks on ports 3 and 7. Other ETUs
listed in this table (with the exception of COIB(8)-U( ), support CAMA trunks on
all ports.
R2000 or higher is required for CO Message Indication on COIB(4)/(8)-U30.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 56
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.6
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU
4.6.1
Description
These ETU functions are similar to the COI(8)-U( ) or COID(8)-U( )
ETU to provide Central Office Interface. Only the COIB(8)-U30 ETU
can support the CO Message Waiting Indication Feature (R2000 or
higher). Transmit and receive pad controls have been added to the
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU. When the ETU is set for COID mode, Loop
Start trunks and Caller ID trunks are supported. When the ETU is
set for COI mode, Loop Start is supported. Ground Start Trunks are
not supported. Caller ID is not supported in COI mode. Fax CO
Branch support is provided on port 4 only. Only DTMF signaling is
supported.
This ETU can provide a CAMA trunk for E911.
CAMA trunk support is provided on COIB(8)-U20/U30 ports 3 or 7
only.
Tip and Ring electrical fuses are provided to comply with UL 60950
requirements. Refer to Figure 6-31 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU.
Figure 6-31 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.6.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of two COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot. The system is limited by 16 trunks.
The maximum number of COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETUs depends on other
trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX
lines in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETUs can be installed in any
interface slot when configured as COID ETUs . A maximum of eight
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETUs can be installed in any interface slot when
configured as COI ETUs. The system is limited by 64 trunks.
The maximum number of COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETUs depends on other
trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX
lines in the system.
4.6.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-23 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Default Switch/Jumper
Settings.
Table 6-23 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Default Switch/Jumper Settings
Switch/
Jumper
Setting
JP100~800
Jumpers 1-2 shorted
6dB increase
Jumpers 2-3 shorted (default)No Gain
Jumpers 3-4 shorted
6dB decrease
Receive pad for
related channel
JP101~801
Jumpers 1-2 shorted
6dB increase
Jumpers 2-3 shorted (default)No Gain
Jumpers 3-4 shorted
6dB decrease
Transmit pad for
related channel
Open for COI
Shorted (default) for COID
Selects the function
for the COIB(8)-U20/
U30 ETU between
COI or COID mode.
N/A
Resets the
COIB(8)-U20/U30
ETU.
S1
Reset
Description
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 58
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.6.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-24 COIB(8)-U20/30 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-24 COIB(8)-U20/30 ETU LED Indications
4.6.5
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LIVE
ETU status
Operation Stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No
Power
LED 1
Channel 1 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 2
Channel 2 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 3
Channel 3 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 4
Channel 4 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 5
Channel 5 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 6
Channel 6 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 7
Channel 7 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 8
Channel 8 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
4.6.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
Connections
MDF
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8
Demark
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
CO
Figure 6-32 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.6.7
ETU Feature Chart
Refer to Table 6-25 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Feature Chart.
Table 6-25 COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU Feature Chart
ETU
Caller ID
(See
Note)
CO
Message
Waiting
Indicate
Pad
Control
Loop
Start
COI(4)-U( )
X
COI(8)-U( )
X
COID(4)-U( )
X
X
COID(8)-U( )
X
X
COIB(4)-U10
X
X
COIB(4)-U20
X
COIB(4)-U30
X
COIB(8)-U( )
X
COIB(8)-U30
X
X
X
Ground
Start
Fax
Branch
CAMA
Trunk
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Caller ID is not supported for Ground Start trunks.
The COIB(4)-U20/U30 ETU supports CAMA trunks on port 3 and the
COIB(8)-U20/U30 ETU supports CAMA trunks on ports 3 and 7. Other ETUs
listed in this table (with the exception of COIB(8)-U( ), support CAMA trunks on
all ports.
R2000 or higher is required for COIB(4)/(8)-U30 ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 60
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.7
DID(4)-U( ) ETU
4.7.1
Description
The Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit supports up to four DID or
four 2-way DID lines. Each DID(4)-U( ) ETU requires one interface
slot position in the KSU.
Immediate, wink start, second dial tone, and delay dial signaling can
be combined on this ETU.
Figure 6-33 DID(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 61
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.7.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four DID(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of DID(4)-U( ) ETU depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 16 DID(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of DID(4)-U( ) ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
4.7.3
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-26 DID(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-26 DID(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
4.7.4
Description
On
Flashing
Off
Operation
Stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No
Power
LIVE
ETU status
LED 1
Line 1 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 2
Line 2 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 3
Line 3 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 4
Line 4 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 62
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.7.5
Connections
MDF
Demark
T1
T
R1
R
T2
T
R2
R
T3
T
R3
R
T4
T
R4
R
CO
Figure 6-34 DID(4)-U( ) ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 63
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.8
DTI-U10~30 ETU
4.8.1
Description
The DTI-U10~30 is a Digital Trunk Interface that terminates FT1
trunks (up to 24 DS-0 channels) that support K-CCIS and Automatic
Number Indication (ANI) on T1.
A combination of Loop Start and Ground Start signaling can be used
on the DTI ETU. Dial Pulse dialing, DTMF, Tie line (E&M) and DID
are supported. The DTI ETU has 24 built-in DTMF detectors. Each
trunk is assigned in groups of four.
Only the DTI-U20 ETU supports Automatic Number Indication (ANI).
When channels are assigned to ANI, the DTI-U20 ETU supports
Feature Group D. The DTI-U20 ETU also supports Feature Group D
incoming MF/outgoing DTMF signaling.
The DTI-U30 ETU supports the K-CCIS common channel signaling
feature with point-to-point E&M Tie lines.
Figure 6-35 DTI-U10~30 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 64
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.8.2
Installation
When a DTI ETU is installed, a CLKG-U( ) Unit must be installed on
the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four DTI ETUs can be installed in any slot. The
system is limited by 16 trunks.
The maximum number of DTI ETUs depends on other trunk cards
installed. This ETU shares the CO/PBX lines in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight DTI ETUs can be installed in any slot. The
system is limited by 64 trunks.
The maximum number of DTI ETUs depends on other trunk cards
installed. This ETU shares the CO/PBX lines in the system.
The maximum number of DTI ETUs and PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs that can
be installed is 14 per system.
4.8.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-27 DTI-U10~30 ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-27 DTI-U10~30 ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
SW1–1
Setting
On:
Off:
Indicates alarm or
loopback status of the
channel
Indicates channel is busy
or idle (Default)
SW1–2
On:
Off:
Default:
SW1–3
On:
Off:
Loopback on
Loopback off (Default)
Off
Description
Used to assign LED
Indications
Switches Loopback on
and off
DTE Software Loopback in
the DTI ETU
Line Loopback to CO
(Default)
Sets Loopback
Test Mode
Normal Operation
(Default)
Switches between
normal operation and
test mode
This switch is active only
when SW1-2 is On.
SW1–4
On:
Off:
SW1–5
N/A
N/A
SW1–6
N/A
N/A
SW2
N/A
Resets the DTI ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 65
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.8.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-28 DTI-U10~30 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-28 DTI-U10~30 ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LIVE
ETU status
Operation
Stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
LED
Channel
Status
On
Switch
SW1-1=Off
On
Switch
SW1-1=On
Off
LED 1
Channel 1
Busy
LSA Alarm
Idle
LED 2
Channel 2
Busy
AIS Alarm
Idle
LED 3
Channel 3
Busy
OOF Alarm
Idle
LED 4
Channel 4
Busy
RAI Alarm
Idle
LED 5
Channel 5
Busy
CRC Alarm
Idle
LED 6
Channel 6
Busy
BPV Alarm
Idle
LED 7
Channel 7
Busy
SLIP Alarm
Idle
LED 8
Channel 8
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 9
Channel 9
Busy
TSC Alarm
Idle
LED 10
Channel 10
Busy
ESA Alarm
Idle
LED 11
Channel 11
Busy
LOS Alarm
Idle
LED 12
Channel 12
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 13
Channel 13
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 14
Channel 14
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 15
Channel 15
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 16
Channel 16
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 17
Channel 17
Busy
Line Loopback
On
Idle
LED 18
Channel 18
Busy
DTE Loopback
On
Idle
LED 19
Channel 19
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 20
Channel 20
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 21
Channel 21
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 22
Channel 22
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 23
Channel 23
Busy
N/A
Idle
LED 24
Channel 24
Busy
N/A
Idle
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 66
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.8.5
Alarm Conditions
A brief description of each alarm condition is given below.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection
On red when the system is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal
from an FT1 trunk.
Controlled Slip Event Detection (SLIP)
On red when the timing difference between a synchronous
receiving terminal and the received signal exceeds the
buffering ability of the terminal.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Error Event Detection
On red when a CRC Error occurs.
Excessive Bipolar Violation (BPV) Detection
On red when excessive BPV is detected.
Line Synchronization Alarm (LSA) Detection
On red when an FT1 trunk loses frame synchronization.
Out-of-Frame (OOF) Condition Detection
On red when two of the four or five framing data bits received
are in error.
Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) Detection
On red when RAl is received.
4.8.6
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
MDF
TA
TELCO
T1
Provider
CSU/DSU
4-Wire
Cable
TB
RA
RB
Figure 6-36 DTI-U( ) ETU Connector
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 67
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.9
DTI-U40 ETU
4.9.1
Description
The DTI-U40 ETU is a Digital Trunk ETU that terminates FT1 trunks
(up to 24 DS-0 channels). This ETU supports K-CCIS, ANI/DNIS
trunks, and CSU Less Function on T1. On-site firmware upgrade is
supported.
A combination of Loop Start and Ground Start signaling can be used
on the DTI-U40 ETU. Dial Pulse dialing, DTMF, Tie line (E&M) and
DID are supported. The DTI-U40 ETU has 24 built-in DTMF
detectors. Each trunk is assigned in groups of four.
When channels are assigned to ANI, the DTI-U40 ETU supports
Feature Group D. The DTI-U40 ETU also supports Feature Group D
incoming MF/outgoing DTMF signaling.
The DTI-U40 ETU supports the K-CCIS common channel signaling
feature with point-to-point E&M Tie lines.
Figure 6-37 DTI-U40 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 68
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.9.2
Installation
When a DTI-U40 ETU is installed, a CLKG-U( ) Unit must be
installed on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four DTI-U40 ETUs can be installed in any slot. The
system is limited by 16 trunks.
The maximum number of DTI-U40 ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the CO/PBX lines in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight DTI-U40 ETUs can be installed in any slot. The
system is limited by 64 trunks.
The maximum number of DTI-U40 ETUs depends on other trunk
cards installed. This ETU shares the CO/PBX lines in the system.
The maximum number of DTI-U40 ETUs and PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs that
can be installed is 14 per system.
4.9.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-29 DTI-U40 Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-29 DTI-U40 Default Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
SW1–1
ON: Use channel indication by
LEDs 1~8
OFF: Line State indication by
LEDs 1~8 (Default)
SW1–2
SW1–3
When SW1-1 is ON:
SW1-2 SW1-3
Description
Used to assign LED
Indications
ON
ON
Not Applicable
OFF
OFF
CH1~ CH8 indication
(Default)
ON Used
ON
OFF
CH9~ CH16 indication
ON Used
OFF
ON
CH17~ CH24 indication
ON Used
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 69
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-29 DTI-U40 Default Switch Settings (Continued)
Switch
SW1-4
Setting
Description
ON: DS-1 Mode (T1 with CSU Function; external CSU not
required)
OFF: DSX-1 Mode (T1 without CSU Function; external CSU
required)
When the system is connected behind an external Channel
Service Unit (CSU), this switch must be ON.
DSX-1 interfaces T1 between the PBX and CSU.
Digital Signal Crossconnect Level 1 (DS-1)
interfaces T1 between the PBX and network with no
CSU (CSU less). Both are standard interfaces
accepted by Telco. Both have the same electrical
characteristics recommended by EIA/TIA 464, but
DSX-1 is preferred because most PBXs have a
CSU/DSU (DSX-1 interface) installed at the
customer site for T1 line protection and ease of
measurements and troubleshooting.
SW1-5
SW1-6
When SW1-4 is ON
SW1-5
SW1-6
OFF
OFF
When LBO = 0dB
ON
OFF
When LBO = -7.5dB
OFF
ON
When LBO= -15dB
ON
ON
When LBO = -22.5dB
LBO (Line Build Out) adds a combination of induction, capacitance, and resistance to a cable pair so
its electrical length may be increased by a desired
level of impedance and loss characteristics.
SW1-7
SW18
When SW1-4 is ON
SW1-7
SW1-8
OFF
OFF
Normal Mode (Default)
ON
OFF
Line Loop Back Mode
OFF
ON
DTE Loop Back Mode
ON
ON
Local Loop Back Mode
In Local Loop Back, data goes through the entire
transmit and receive process. Line Loop Back
allows user to check transmission line continuity.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 70
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-29 DTI-U40 Default Switch Settings (Continued)
Switch
SW2-1
SW2-2
Setting
Description
Select Running Mode
SW2-1
SW2-2
ON
ON
Test program mode
ON
OFF
Not Used
OFF
ON
F/W upgrade mode
(on-site upgrade)
OFF
OFF
Normal operation
(Default)
SW2-3
ON:
OFF:
To be determined
Normal operation
(Default)
SW2-4
ON:
OFF:
Watch Timer OFF
Watch Timer ON
(Default)
SW3-1
ON:
OFF:
T1 mode (Default)
No operation
SW3-2
ON:
OFF:
To be determined
No operation (Default)
SW3-3
ON:
OFF:
To be determined
No operation (Default)
SW3-4
ON:
OFF:
To be determined
No operation (Default)
The DTI-U40 works only with the SW3 Default
settings.
SW4/5
SW4
SW5
Termination mode
T1/J1
T1 120Ω
T1 mode (Default)
T1/J1
J1 75Ω
J1 mode
E1
T1 120Ω
E1 mode (120Ω
termination)
E1
J1 75Ω
E1 mode (75Ω
termination)
E1 Services are not supported
SW6
Reset Switch
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 71
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.9.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-30 DTI-U40 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-30 DTI-U40 ETU LED Indications
LED
SW1-1 OFF
LED 1
Link Indication
ON = Activated
CH1 or CH9 or CH17 Indication
ON = Used
LED 2
LSA Error Indication
ON = Error
CH2 or CH10 or CH18 Indication
ON = Used
LED 3
AIS Error Indication
ON = Error
CH3 or CH11 or CH19 Indication
ON = Used
LED 4
OOF Error Indication
ON = Error
CH4 or CH12 or CH20 Indication
ON = Used
LED 5
RAI Error Indication
ON = Error
CH5 or CH13 or CH21 Indication
ON = Used
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9
4.9.5
With SW1-1 ON
Loop Back Indication CH6 or CH14 or CH22 Indication
ON = Loop Back mode ON = Used
Self-Test Indication
ON = Testing
CH7 or CH15 or CH23 Indication
ON = Used
Used CH Indication CH8 or CH16 or CH24 Indication
ON = Using a channel ON = Used
LIVE Indication
ON = Activate
Alarm Conditions
A brief description of each alarm condition is given below.
H
H
H
H
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection
On red when the system is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal
from an FT1 trunk.
Controlled Slip Event Detection (SLIP)
On red when the timing difference between a synchronous
receiving terminal and the received signal exceeds the
buffering ability of the terminal.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Error Event Detection
On red when a CRC Error occurs.
Excessive Bipolar Violation (BPV) Detection
On red when excessive BPV is detected.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 72
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
Line Synchronization Alarm (LSA) Detection
On red when an FT1 trunk loses frame synchronization.
Out-of-Frame (OOF) Condition Detection
On red when two of the four or five framing data bits received
are in error.
Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) Detection
On red when RAl is received.
4.9.6
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
H
4.9.7
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN3
Serial Port DB-9
Connections
Although the DTI-U40 ETU can connect directly to the Telco TI
Smart Jack, your Telco may require you to purchase and install a
separate Channel Service Unit (CSU) between the Smart Jack and
the DTI-U40 ETU.
MDF
TA
TELCO
T1
Provider
CSU/DSU
4-Wire
Cable
TB
RA
RB
MDF
TA
TELCO
T1
Provider
4-Wire
Cable
TB
RA
RB
Figure 6-38 DTI-U40 ETU Connectors
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 73
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.10
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
4.10.1
Description
The EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU allows multiple IPK systems to be connected
with a K-CCIS connection. This ETU combines the functionality of
the EXP-U ETU and two DTI-U( ) ETUs (one DTI for system 1 and
one DTI for system 2).
Figure 6-39 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
4.10.2
Installation
One EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU can be installed only in S1 of the basic
cabinet of system 2. A maximum of four cabinets can be connected.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 74
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.10.3
Switch Settings
Table Table 6-31 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU DSW 1 Switch Settings shows
the switch settings for DSW 1 and Table 6-32 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
DSW 2 Switch Settings shows the DSW 2 switch settings.
Table 6-31 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU DSW 1 Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Purpose
On
Manufacture inspection mode
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
1
2
3
4
DSW 1
5
6
7
8
Do Not change the factory default settings for this switch.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 75
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-32 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU DSW 2 Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Purpose
On
Manufacture inspection mode
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
On
For maintenance use
Off
Normal Operation (default)
1
2
3
4
DSW 2
5
6
7
8
Do Not change the factory default settings for this switch.
SW
Description
Momentary Switch
4.10.4
Resets ETU operation
Jumper Settings
Table 6-33 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU Jumper Settings
Jumper
Setting
Purpose
Open
Normal Operation (default)
Short:
Maintenance mode
Open
Maintenance mode
Short:
Normal Operation (default)
CN 11
CN 12
Do Not change the factory default settings.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 76
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.10.5
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-34 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU LED Description.
Table 6-34 EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU LED Description
LED
On
Flashing
Off
Live 2
Host Side
Operation
Stopped
Connected
Not Connected
Live 1
Remote Side
Operation
Stopped
Connected
Not Connected
Talk
Channel Activity
Active
N/A
Idle
LED 1
For manufacture
inspection
N/A
N/A
N/A
LED 2
For manufacture
inspection
N/A
N/A
N/A
For manufacture
inspection
N/A
N/A
N/A
LED 3
4.10.6
Description
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
CN 1
Connects to the backplane.
CN 2
Connects to CN3 on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU or CN 3 on the
EXP-U( ) ETU (Installed in the first expansion cabinet using
an expansion cable).
CN 3
For Maintenance
CN 4
For Maintenance
CN 5
RS232 COM Port for manufacture inspection
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 77
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.10.7
Connections
Examples of configurations allowed for the EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU are
shown below:
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
Figure 6-40 Connect EXPT ETU to CPUI ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 78
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
EXP-U( ) ETU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
Figure 6-41 Connect EXPT to EXP to CPUI ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 79
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.11
IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
4.11.1
Description
IPT(4)-U10 ETU
This IP Gateway ETU is an optional Interface that can combine trunk
calls into Gateway trunks.
This ETU can emulate TLI(2)-U, DID(4)-U( ), COI(4)-U( ), COID-U( ),
or DTI-U( ) ETU. Refer to the applicable ETU assignment for the
trunk capacity.
IPT(8)-U10 ETU
This IP Gateway ETU is an optional Interface that can combine trunk
calls into Gateway trunks.
This ETU can emulate COI(8)-U( ), COID(8)-U( ), or DTI-U( ) ETU.
Refer to the applicable ETU assignment for the trunk capacity.
Figure 6-42 IPT(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 80
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.11.2
Options
Refer to Table 6-35 IP Gateway Options.
Table 6-35 IP Gateway Options
No.
4.11.3
Configuration
Number of
Ports
Installation Slot
IPT(4)
IPT(8)
Basic
Expansion
1
COI
4
8
S1~S8
S1~S8
2
COID
4
8
S1~S8
S1~S8
3
DID
4
4
S1~S8
S1~S8
4
TLI
2
2
S1~S8
S1~S8
5
DTI
4
8
S1~S8
S1~S8
Installation
The Gateway ETU can be installed in KSU slots that support the
applicable ETU simulated.
The IPT(4)-U( )ETU is converted to IPT(8)-U( ) by installing daughter
board IPE(4)-U( ) Unit.
Refer to Elite IP Gateway Card Installation Manual for detailed
instructions.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four IPT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any slot.
The system is limited by 16 trunks.
A maximum of two IPT(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any slot. The
system is limited by 16 trunks.
The maximum number of IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the
CO/PBX lines in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 15 IPT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any slot. The
system is limited by 64 trunks.
A maximum of seven IPT(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any slot.
The system is limited by 64 trunks.
The maximum number of IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other trunk cards installed. This ETU shares the
CO/PBX lines in the system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 81
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.11.4
Switch Settings
Switch S1 must be in power down (PD) for ETU installation, and
placed in PU to activate the ETU. After the ETU is activated, S1 is
placed in PD to power down the ETU for removal.
4.11.5
LED Indications
H
H
HS
When Switch S1 is placed to PD, this LED lights red. The IPT
ETU starts shutdown. When shut down is complete, this LED
goes off along with all others to indicate that the ETU can be
removed from the KSU.
CH 1~8
Indicates the status of associated channel or trunk as in COID/
DID as follows:
H
H
H
Trunk Status
COID LED
DID LED
Not Installed or Idle
Off
Off
Incoming
Off
On
Busy
On
On
Live
Flashes red when ETU is receiving power from the KSU.
Ethernet Status
Two built-in LEDs (one green and one yellow) on the RJ-45
indicate Ethernet connection status. The yellow LED is On
when the Ethernet link is up. The green LED flashes to indicate
activity.
Status
This bi-color (red and green) LED shows status of all Gateway
trunks. When an error is detected, the location is indicated by
the following table.
Trunk Status
LED Condition
Error Location
Power On
Off
BIOS, Hardware
Start DSP download
Red
DSP Driver
Red and Green
DSP Download
Green
Application Load
DSP download OK
Successful Application
Start
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 82
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.11.6
IPT(4)-U( ) ETU to IPT(8)-U( ) ETU Conversion
The IPE(4)-U10 Unit is attached to the IPT(4)-U( ) ETU to convert it
to the IPT(8)-U( ) ETU. This unit comes with two attached standoffs
with an extra screw in the bottom.
4.11.7
1.
Remove the screw from the bottom of each standoff.
2.
Line up the IPE(4)-U10 Unit standoffs with Holes 1 and 2 and
connector J1 with IPT(4)-U( ) ETU connector J5, and press
down until the IPE(4)-U10 Unit is firmly attached to the
IPT(4)-U( ) ETU.
3.
Install the two previously removed screws through holes 1 and
2 to Connect the standoffs to the IPT(4)-U( ) ETU.
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
4.11.8
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
RJ-45
Connects to the Ethernet.
Connections
RJ-45
Gateway
VoIP
Trunk
Card Card
Trunk
Ethernet
Figure 6-43 IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 83
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.12
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
4.12.1
Description
The Integrated Service Digital network (ISDN)-Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) is a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
service that provides 23 B channels and one D channel (23B + D) for
voice call trunking. The B channels provide 23 CO/DID connections.
Figure 6-44 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 84
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.12.2
Installation
When a PRT(1)-U( ) ETU is installed, a CLKG-U( ) Unit must be
installed on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any slot.
The maximum number of PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other trunk cards installed. The system is limited by 16
trunks.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any slot.
The maximum number of PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other trunk cards installed. The system is limited by 64
trunks.
4.12.3
The maximum number of PRT(1)-U( ) ETU and DTI-U( ) ETUs
that can be installed is 14 per system.
Switch Settings
SW1, a 4-position DIP switch, assigns the Protocol. Refer to
Table 6-36 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU SW1 Settings.
SW1-4 is not used and must be OFF.
Table 6-36 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU SW1 Settings
SW1–1
SW1–2
SW1–3
SW1–4
Protocol
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NI-2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
4ESS (AT&T Custom)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
AT&T 5ESS (Lucent Custom)
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
DMS-100 (Custom) ,
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DMS-100 (National ISDN) ,,
,
Nortel Specification NIS-A211-1
,,
Nortel Specification NIS-A233-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 85
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Switch SW2 is an 8-position rotary switch that can be set even during
operation. A small flat screwdriver can be used to set positions as
follows:
Position 0
Alarm Indications
Position 1
B Channels 01~12 Status Indication using LEDs
1~12
Position 2
B Channels 13~23 Status Indication using LEDs
1~12
Positions 3
CO Trunks 01~12 assigned to PRT ETU Status
Indication using LEDs 1~12
Positions 4
CO Trunks 13~23 assigned to PRT ETU Status
Indication using LEDs 1~12
Positions 5 & 6 Not Used
Position 7
4.12.4
Inspection Mode in production line
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-37 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-37 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
LIVE
ETU Status
LED
Channel/
Trunk Status
On
Flashing
Operation Stopped
Normal Operation
(Power On)
On (Alarms)
SW2 Position 0
On
SW2 Position 1
Off
No Power
On
SW2 Position 3
LED 1
Channel 1
Layer 1 Active
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 1 Busy
LED 2
Channel 2
SLIP
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 2 Busy
LED 3
Channel 3
RAI
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 3 Busy
LED 4
Channel 4
LOF
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 4 Busy
LED 5
Channel 5
AIS
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 5 Busy
LED 6
Channel 6
CRC Error
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 6 Busy
LED 7
Channel 7
Active Call
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 7 Busy
LED 8
Channel 8
Not Used
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 8 Busy
LED 9
Channel 9
Not Used
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 9 Busy
LED 10 Channel 10
Not Used
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 10 Busy
LED 11 Channel 11
Not Used
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 11 Busy
LED 12 Channel 12
Not Used
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 12 Busy
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 86
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-37 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LED
Channel/
Trunk Status
Not Used
On
SW2 Position 2
On
SW2 Position 4
LED 1
Channel 13
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 13 Busy
LED 2
Channel 14
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 14 Busy
LED 3
Channel 15
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 15 Busy
LED 4
Channel 16
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 16 Busy
LED 5
Channel 17
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 17 Busy
LED 6
Channel 18
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 18 Busy
LED 7
Channel 19
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 19 Busy
LED 8
Channel 20
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 20 Busy
LED 9
Channel 21
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 21 Busy
LED 10 Channel 22
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 22 Busy
LED 11 Channel 23
N/A
Channel Busy
CO Trunk 23 Busy
LED 12 Not Used
N/A
Not Used
Not Used
4.12.5
Alarm Conditions
A brief description of each alarm condition referred to under the
SW2, position 0 alarm indications is given below.
H
H
H
H
H
Layer 1 Status
LED Lights red when layer 1 is active. The LED is off when
layer 1 is inactive.
Controlled Slip indication (SLIP)
When the difference between the timing of a synchronous
receiving terminal and the received signal exceeds the
buffering ability of the synchronous terminal, the LED lights red.
Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) Detection
When RAI is received the LED lights red.
Loss of Frame (LOF) Condition Detection
When two of the four or five framing data bits received are in
error, the LED lights red.
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection
When the system is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal from a
PRT trunk, the LED lights red.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 87
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Error Event Detection
When a CRC Error occurs, the LED lights red.
Active Call
LED Lights red to indicate an active call.
4.12.6
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
4.12.7
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN3
9-pin RS-232C connector used for maintenance
Connections
MDF
TA
ISDN PRI
Provider
TB
ISDN PRI
CSU/DSU
RA
RB
The CSU may not always be required.
Figure 6-45 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU Connector
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 88
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.13
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
4.13.1
Description
The Tie Line Interface ETU supports the termination and operation of
up to two E&M Tie lines (4-wire, type I and type V, and 10/20 pps
Dial Pulse or DTMF).
Immediate, wink start, second dial tone, and delay dial
signaling can be combined on this ETU.
CN1
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
TYPE V
TYPE V
SW101
TYPE I
SW201
TYPE I
Figure 6-46 TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 89
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.13.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four TLI(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of TLI(2)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed for
the depends on other trunk cards installed. The system is limited by
16 trunks.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 16 TLI(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of TLI(2)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed for
the depends on other trunk cards installed. The system is limited by
64 trunks.
4.13.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-38 TLI(2)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-38 TLI(2)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW101
When lines provided by this unit are
used for back-to-back connections,
set to Type V.
When connection is to a Central
Office, set to Type I.
Default: Type V
Switch Type I or
Type V for Line 1
SW201
When lines provided by this unit are
used for back-to-back connections,
set to Type V.
When connection is to a Central
Office, set to Type I.
Default: Type V
Switch Type I or
Type V for Line 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 90
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.13.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-39 TLI(2)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-39 TLI(2)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
4.13.5
Description
On
Flashing
Off
Operation
Stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No
Power
LED 1
ETU status
LED 2
Line 1 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LED 3
Line 2 status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
4.13.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
Connections
Side A
Telco
Side B
MDF
E
E
M
T
T R
M
T T
R
T R
R
R T
R
Figure 6-47 TLI(2)-U( ) ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 91
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 5
STATION ETUS
The station Electronic Telephone Units are installed in the interface slots of the KSU.
5.1
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
5.1.1
Description
The DPH(4)-U( ) ETU provides connection for four doorphones
(DP-D-1A), and also provides the associated four Door Lock
Release relays.
Doorphones and relays are paired together so that a station user
talking into a doorphone, controls only that Door Lock Release relay
when the feature code is dialed.
The DPH(4)-U( ) ETU has two audio paths to be shared by four
doorphones. Two simultaneous doorphone calls are allowed.
Doorphones 1/3 and 2/4 are paired together.
Figure 6-48 DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 92
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.1.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one DPH(4)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
Expanded Port Package
Only one DPH(4)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The DP-D-1A Doorphone that is connected to the ETU has the
following dimensions:
H
H
H
5.1.3
Height:
5.125 in.
130.18 mm
Width:
3.875 in.
98.43 mm
Depth:
1.00 in.
25.4 mm
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-40 DPH(4)-U( ) ETU Default Jumper Settings.
Table 6-40 DPH(4)-U( ) ETU Default Jumper Settings
5.1.4
Jumper
Setting
Description
S101
Shorted
Remove short bar to increase DP1 and DP3
receive volume by 6 dB.
S201
Shorted
Remove short bar to increase DP2 and DP4
receive volume by 6 dB.
S102
Shorted
Remove short bar to increase DP1 and DP3
transmit volume by 6 dB.
S202
Shorted
Remove short bar to increase DP2 and DP4
transmit volume by 6 dB.
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red Normal Operation
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (Power On)
Off
No Power
LED 1 indication are listed below.
H
H
Steady Red
A Circuit is Busy.
Off
All Circuits are Idle.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 93
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.1.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
Relay
Connections are Provided at the MDF.
Doorphone Connections are Provided at the MDF.
MDF
DPH 1
T
R
DPH 2
T
R
Doorphone
Doorphone
Doorphone
DPH 3
T
R
Doorphone
DPH 4
T
R
00 00 00 00 00
00000
00000
00000
00000
00 00 00 00 00
00000
00 00 00 00 00
Figure 6-49 DPH(4)-U( ) ETU Doorphone Connections
5.1.6
Specifications
H
Relay contacts are 24 Vdc at 500 mA.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 94
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.2
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
5.2.1
Description
The Electronic Station Interface ETU contains eight circuits. Each
circuit can support any Attendant Console, Multiline Terminal, or
Single Line Telephone adapter.
Figure 6-50 ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 95
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.2.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four ESI(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of ESI(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by 32
stations. This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the
system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 15 ESI(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of ESI(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by
120 stations. This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the
system.
5.2.3
Switch Settings
SW1 resets the ETU.
5.2.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red Normal Operation
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power On)
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below.
H
H
5.2.5
Steady Red
Some port(s) busy
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 96
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.2.6
Connections
BK
RD
To
MDF
GN
To Telephone
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-51 ESI(8)-U( ) ETU Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 97
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.3
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
5.3.1
Description
The ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU is the basic Electronic Station Interface ETU
that provides an 8-channel interface for Multiline Terminals,
Attendant Consoles, Single Line Telephone Adapter SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
and DBM(B)-U( ) Box. This ETU can be expanded to 16 channels by
installing the ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 6-52 ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 98
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.3.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by 32
stations. This ETU shares the total number of Station ports in the
system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 15 ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by
120 stations. This ETU shares the total number of Station ports in the
system.
Chapter 3 System Specifications, Section 4 KSU Power-Based ETU
Quantity Limitations on page 3-9 for Universal Slots.
5.3.3
Switch Settings
SW1 resets the ETU.
5.3.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red Normal Operation
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power On)
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below.
H
H
Steady Red
Some port(s) busy
Off
All ports idle
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 99
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.3.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
5.3.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
EXCN1
Connects to EXCN1 on the ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.
EXCN2
Connects to EXCN2 on the ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.
Connections
BK
RD
To
MDF
GN
To Telephone
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-53 ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 100
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
5.4.1
Description
The ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU is the expansion Electronic Station Interface
ETU that provides an additional 8-channel interface for Multiline
Terminals, Attendant Consoles, Single Line Telephone Adapter
SLT(1)-U10 ADP, and DBM(B)-U10 Box. This expansion ESI ETU is
piggybacked on the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU.
RJ-45
RJ-45
Figure 6-54 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 101
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of two ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8. The system is limited by 32 stations.
The maximum number of ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. This ETU shares the total
number of stations in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of five ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs, piggybacked on an ESIB(8),
can be installed in slots S1~S8. The system is limited by 120
stations.
The maximum number of ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. This ETU shares the total
number of stations in the system.
Chapter 3 System Specifications,Section 4 KSU Power-Based ETU
Quantity Limitations on page 3-9 for Universal Slots.
5.4.3
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
5.4.4
EXCN1
Connects to EXCN1 on the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU.
EXCN2
Connects to EXCN2 on the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU.
MJ1
Connects to MDF RJ-61 (four ESI ports 1~4).
MJ2
Connects to MDF RJ-61 (four ESI ports 5~8).
Connections
BK
RD
GN
To Telephone
To
MDF
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-55 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 102
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.5
Pin Assignments
The pin assignments are for connecting eight Multiline Terminals to
the ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU. Refer to Table 6-41 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU MJ1
Pin Assignments and Table 6-42 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU MJ2 Pin
Assignments.
Table 6-41 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU MJ1 Pin Assignments
MJ1
Pin
(RJ-61)
Signal
Signal Name
Pin Color
1
T4
CH3–Tip
WHT–BRN
2
T3
CH2–Tip
WHT–GRN
3
T2
CH1–Tip
WHT–ORN
4
R1
CH0–Ring
BLU–WHT
5
T1
CH0–Tip
WHT–BLU
6
R2
CH1–Ring
ORN–WHT
7
R3
CH2–Ring
GRN–WHT
8
R4
CH3–Ring
BRN–WHT
Table 6-42 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU MJ2 Pin Assignments
MJ2
Pin
(RJ-61)
Signal
Signal Name
Pin Color
1
T8
CH7–Tip
WHT–BRN
2
T7
CH6–Tip
WHT–GRN
3
T6
CH5–Tip
WHT–ORN
4
R5
CH4–Ring
BLU–WHT
5
T5
CH4–Tip
WHT–BLU
6
R6
CH5–Ring
ORN–WHT
7
R7
CH6–Ring
GRN–WHT
8
R8
CH7–Ring
BRN–WHT
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 103
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.5
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
5.5.1
Description
The OPX(2)-U( ) ETU is the interface for two off-premise extensions.
This ETU has a built-in ringing signal generator (RSG). A maximum
of 1600Ω of loop resistance (including the Single Line Telephone) is
acceptable between the OPX(2)-U( ) ETU and a Single Line
Telephone.
This ETU also provides circuitry for loop status detection, talk
battery, sending ringing signals from the RSG unit to the Single Line
Telephones, and dial pulse detection.
The PBR circuit in the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU or the PBR( )-U( )
ETU is required with Single Line Telephone Connection.
Figure 6-56 OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 104
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.5.2
Installation
The extension can be run up to approximately three miles (5 km)
using 24 AWG wiring.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of six OPX(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of OPX(2)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by 32
stations. This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the
system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 22 OPX(2)-U ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of OPX(2)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by
120 stations. This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the
system.
5.5.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red Normal Operation
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power On).
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below.
H
H
5.5.4
Steady Red
One port busy
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 105
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.5.5
Connections
BK
RD
To
MDF
GN
Single Line
Telephone
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-57 OPX(2)-U( ) ETU CN1 Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 106
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.6
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
5.6.1
Description
SLI(4)-U( ) ETU
The Single Line Interface ETU supports a maximum of four Single
Line Telephones and/or analog voice mail ports. This ETU provides
Ringing Signal Generator (RSG), and Message Waiting (MW) LED
voltage to Single Line Telephones.
SLI(8)-U( ) ETU
The Single Line Interface ETU supports a maximum of eight Single
Line Telephones and/or voice mail ports. This ETU provides Ringing
Signal Generator (RSG), and Message Waiting (MW) LED voltage to
Single Line Telephones.
Figure 6-58 SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 107
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.6.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of six SLI(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
A maximum of three SLI(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by 32
stations of which 8 would be ESI ports. This ETU shares the total
number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 22 SLI(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
A maximum of 14 SLI(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by
120 stations of which 8 would be ESI ports. This ETU shares the
total number of station ports in the system.
5.6.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red Normal Operation
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power On).
Off
No Power
BUSY indications are listed below.
H
H
5.6.4
Steady Red
Some port(s) busy
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 108
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.6.5
Connections
BK
RD
GN
Single Line
Telephone
To
MDF
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-59 SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 109
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.7
SLIB(4)-U10 ETU
5.7.1
Description
The SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU is the basic Single Line Interface ETU that
provides a 4-channel interface for a Single Line Telephone, and also
provides Ringing Signal Generator (RSG), Message Waiting (MW)
LED voltage, and Caller ID to Single Line Telephones.
This ETU can be expanded to eight channels by installing the
SLIE(4)-U10 ETU.
Figure 6-60 SLIB(4)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 110
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.7.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of six SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by 32
stations of which 8 would be ESI ports. This ETU shares the total
number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 14 SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8
in any KSU.
The maximum number of SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by
120 stations of which 8 would be ESI ports. This ETU shares the
total number of station ports in the system.
5.7.3
When initially installing the SLIB(4)-U10 ETU, it may be necessary to
press the RESET switch for the ETU to boot up properly.
Switch Settings
Table 6-43 SLIB(4)-U10 ETU SW2 Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Purpose
ON
4 Channels (Default)
OFF
8 Channels
1
ON
2
OFF
ON
SW2
See Table below for SW2-2 and
SW2-3 details
3
OFF
ON
SLI(4)/(8) -U10 Mode
(Caller-ID Disable) (Default)
OFF
SLIB/SLIE(4)-U( ) Mode
(Caller-ID Enable)
4
R2500 or lower requires SW2-4 to be ON for the SLIB(4)-U( ) to
operate. R3000 or higher requires SW2-4 to be OFF for the
SLIB(4)-U( ) to operate.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 111
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-44 SW2-2/SW2-3 Details
SW 2-2
SW 2-3
Function
ON
ON
Factory Test
OFF
ON
Firmware Upgrade
ON
OFF
Not Used
OFF
OFF
Normal Operation
(Default)
Table 6-45 SLIB(4)-U10 ETU SW3 Switch Settings
5.7.4
SW 3-1
SW 3-2
SW 3-3
SW 3-4
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Country Selection
North America (Default)
LED Indications
LED 1 (LIVE) indications are:
H
H
H
Flashing Red (Normal Operation)
Steady Red (Operation Stopped, Power On.)
Off (No Power)
LED 2 (BUSY) indications are:
H
H
Steady Red (Some ports Busy
Off (All ports idle)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 112
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.7.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
5.7.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN4
Connects to CN4 on the SLIE(4)-U( ) ETU.
CN5
Connects to CN5 on the SLIE(4)-U( ) ETU.
Connections
BK
RD
GN
Single Line
Telephone
To
MDF
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-61 SLIB(4)-U10 ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 113
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.8
SLIE(4)-U10 ETU
5.8.1
Description
The SLIE(4)-U10 ETU is the expansion Single Line Interface ETU
That plugs into the SLIB(4)-U10 ETU to provide an additional
4-channel interface for a Single Line Telephone, and also provides
Ringing Signal Generator (RSG) and Message Waiting (MW) LED
voltage to Single Line Telephones.
Figure 6-62 SLIE(4)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 114
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.8.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of three SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs with the SLIE(4)-U10 ETU
installed can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The maximum number of SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs with the SLIE(4)-U10
ETU installed depends on other station cards installed. The system is
limited by 32 stations of which eight would be ESI ports. This ETU
shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 14 SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs with the SLIE(4)-U10 ETU
installed can be installed in slots S1~S8 in any KSU.
The maximum number of SLIB(4)-U10 ETUs with the SLIE(4)-U10
ETU installed depends on other station cards installed. The system is
limited by 120 stations of which eight would be ESI ports. This ETU
shares the total number of station ports in the system.
5.8.3
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
5.8.4
CN4
Connects to CN4 on the SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU.
CN5
Connects to CN5 on the SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU.
Connections
BK
RD
GN
Single Line
Telephone
To
MDF
YL
RJ-11
Figure 6-63 SLIB(4)-U10 ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 115
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 6
VOICE MAIL ETUS
6.1
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
6.1.1
Description
The CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU is a Digital Voice Mail system that
supports a maximum of four ports.
This ETU is a PC platform installed in the Electra Elite IPK that
contains Flash ROM data storage for voice recording and application
software. A digital signal processor/voice processing section
handles the following functions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
DTMF detection
DTMF generation
General tone detection
FAX CNG tone detection
PCM compression for audio recording/playback
Automatic gain control (AGC)
A serial port (direct connect speeds up to 19.2 Kbps)
This ETU provides 2 or 4 ports for digital voice mail. Refer to Table
6-46 Configuration Support Table.
Table 6-46 Configuration Support Table
Function
Configuration Support
Applications
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Call Forwarding
Supported
Connections
Connects to backplane connector of the KSU.
Hardware
One CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
Message Notification
Through message waiting lamp.
Operator Console
100 (default)
Positive disconnect: Digital Signal
MDM-F-20 Unit
Used for remote connection.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 116
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
COM1
Figure 6-64 CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 117
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-65 CMS-U30 ETU
6.1.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU or one CMS-U30 ETU can be
installed in slots S1~S8.
Expanded Port Package
Only one CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU or one CMS-U30 ETU can be
installed in slots S1~S8.
Each system can support only one CMS, CTI/VP, FMS, VMS, or VMP
ETU.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that KSU
is off.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 118
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.1.3
Switch Settings
For Revision Q00431 v 6.68 or higher, refer toTable 6-47 CMS(2)/
(4)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions.
Table 6-47 CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions
DIP
1
DIP
2
DIP
3
DIP
4
ON
ON
Description
To enable HostKey and run Manufacturing
Test (NEC Production only)
ON
To enable HostKey with floppy disk redirection
and run Manufacturing Test (NEC Production
only)
ON
ON
ON
To connect to CoSession using modem
instead of direct cable connection
ON
To start BRU Host with direct cable connection
ON
To start BRU Host with modem connection
ON
To connect to CoSession using direct cable
connection but not start voice mail software
(Troubleshooting or Maintenance Mode)
Used for Revision Q00431 v 6.68 or higher.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 119
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.1.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-48 CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indicators.
Table 6-48 CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indicators
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LIVE
ETU status
Receiving
Power
Not Used
No Power
CH1
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH2
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH3
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH4
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
MB
MB Switch Status
ON
Not Used
OFF
BIOS
DOS Status
BIOS Error
Not Used
No error
BCLR
Application Status
Red DOS
started
(VM Not
Ready)
Not Used
Idle
Green VM
Running
Orange Error
If BCLR LED is orange, check error type on console screen.
After error is corrected, LED automatically changes to green.
Do Not connect link between console and ETU until BCLR turns
green during booting.
HD
Flash Status
Not Used
Compact
Flash Disk
Active
Flash
Inactive
Do not reset the ETU while the HD LED is flashing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 120
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-49 CMS-U30 ETU LED Indications
LED
Name
Description
LED 1
APP1
Indicates status of voice mail application software
Green Application running without errors
Amber Application running with errors
Red
Application not running
LED 2
APP 2
Not Used
LED 3
Drive
HDD active light is red when the hard drive is accessed
Do not reset the ETU while this switch is on.
LED 4
CF Power
On when shutdown switch in Run to indicate power on the
ETU
LED 5
ICGA
Live LED flashes every 125 ms during normal operation
LED 6
Shut Down
Switch
Indicates that the switch has no software control.
On red only when SHUTDOWN switch is in Run
LED 7
Shutdown
On red when SHUTDOWN switch is in SHUT DOWN to
indicate that voice mail can be safely removed form the KSU
LED 8
Power
On red when ETU is receiving power from the KSU
LED 9
FED DSP
Used only for development purposes
LED 10
CH 1
On red when voice channel 1 is Off-Hook
LED 11
CH 2
On red when voice channel 2 is Off-Hook
LED 12
CH 3
On red when voice channel 3 is Off-Hook
LED 13
CH 4
On red when voice channel 4 is Off-Hook
LED 14
CH 5
On red when voice channel 5 is Off-Hook
LED 15
CH 6
On red when voice channel 6 is Off-Hook
LED 16
CH 7
On red when voice channel 7 is Off-Hook
LED 17
CH 8
On red when voice channel 8 is Off-Hook
The first four channel LEDs are also used during startup to show that the
BICOM driver is loaded (LED 1), Scan disk successfully completed (LED 2),
CoSession Host successfully Loaded (LED 3), and voice mail started
successfully (LED 4). After the system is up and running and all channels are
ready to receive calls, these LEDs are Off. When voice mail does not start
successfully, all eight channel LEDs and LED 1 are On.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 121
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.1.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
J2 and J3
Used to install the MDM-F-20 Unit.
J9
Connects to the backplane.
9-pin RS-232 (COM2)
Connector is not used (MDM-F-20 Unit).
RJ-11 modem port (COM2)
Remote connector on serial interface (MDM-F-20 Unit).
9-pin RS-232 (COM1)
Local serial connector on main ETU for direct connection.
6.1.6
Jumper Settings
J1
6.1.7
Used only on FMS/CMS
Pin 1 to Pin 2
No external modem connected (default)
Pin 2 to Pin 3
External modem connected
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
J2
Connects to the backplane.
J6
Used for Compact flash drive on FMS.
J10
Not used.
J11)
COM port for console programming connection
J12
Port expansion connector for DSP-U30
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 122
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
6.2.1
Description
The CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU is a 4-, 8-, 12-, or 16-port
Digital Voice Mail system that can support TeLANophy, inbound or
outbound faxing and Hospitality/HVM applications.
The EliteMail VP cannot support TeLANophy or faxing and
Hospitality/HVM applications, but it can be upgraded to EliteMail CTI
when these features are required.
For a 4- or 8-port system, only the System Board and one slot are
required. For the 12- or 16-port system, the Daughter Board that
attaches to the System board, and the Port Expansion Board that
requires another slot are also required.
This ETU is a PC platform, installed in the Electra Elite IPK system,
that contains hard disk space for voice recording storage and
application software. A digital signal processor/voice processing
section handles the following functions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
DTMF detection/generation
General tone detection
FAX CNG tone detection
PCM compression for audio recording/playback
Automatic gain control
A serial port (direct connect speeds up to 115,200 bps) used
for direct connection console programming and backup/restore
A LAN port with an RJ-45 connector (activated only with CTI)
Up to two fax ports (activated only with CTI)
A built-in modem for remote console programming that
supports up to 19.2 Kbps
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 123
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-50 Configuration Support
Function
Support
Applications
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (no transfer)
Call Forwarding
Supported
Connections
KSU backplane connection
RJ-45 LAN connection
RJ-11 Modem connection
VGA connection for monitor support
PS2 Keyboard and Mouse connections
Hardware
One CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
Message Notification
Uses message waiting lamp
Operator Console
100 (default)
Positive connect: Digital signal
A
B
C
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
Figure 6-66 EliteMail CTI System Board
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 124
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2.1.1
System Board Components
The components identified in Figure 6-66 EliteMail CTI
System Board are listed and described in Table 6-51
System Board Components.
Table 6-51 System Board Components
Item
Description
A
Backplane connector
B
Switch SW2
Not used. Keep indicated default settings.
C
Switch SW1
Not used. Keep indicated default settings.
D
Port Expansion Board (PEB) cable
E
Modem connector
F
Hard Drive (HD) LED
G
Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector
H
Local Area Network (LAN) connector
I
Keyboard connector
J
Mouse connector
K
COM Serial Port connector
L
VGA Monitor connector
M
Switch SW3
DIP switch 1 default is Off so the voice messaging
application starts when the board is turned On. Set
this switch On to start OS/2 software only.
DIP switch 2 default is Off for direct serial remote
access connections. Set this switch On for modem
connections.
DIP switches 3 and 4 are not used and should be left
On.
N
The power button cuts the power to the board from
the PC and the hard drive and should not be used.
O
Voice messaging software LED
Green when software is active
Amber when active with possible application problem
Red when inactive or shut down
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 125
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-51 System Board Components (Continued)
Item
Description
P
Shutdown switch
Default is On. Place Off to shut down the software
and system board properly before turning off the
telephone system and disconnecting the system
board.
Place On before restarting – The board restarts only
when the switch is On.
Q
Shutdown LED
Red when switch is On
Green when switch is Off
After the LED goes off, turn off power to the KSU and
disconnect the board.
R
Make Busy switch and LED
Do not use. Must always be On with a red LED.
A
B
C
D
F
H
J
E
G
I
K
L
M
Figure 6-67 EliteMail CTI Daughter Board
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 126
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2.1.2
Daughter Board Components
The components identified in Figure 6-68 EliteMail CTI
Port Expansion Board are listed and described inTable
6-52 Daughter Board Components.
Table 6-52 Daughter Board Components
Item
Description
A
F206 LED
B
CGA LED
C
Application LED
D~K
VM Channel LEDs 1~8 respectively
L, M
Fax Channel LEDs Channel 1, Channel 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
L
G
I
K
M
Figure 6-68 EliteMail CTI Port Expansion Board
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 127
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2.1.3
Port Expansion Board
The components identified in Figure 6-68 EliteMail CTI
Port Expansion Board are listed and described in Table
6-53 Port Expansion Board Components.
Table 6-53 Port Expansion Board Components
Item
A
Backplane connector
B
MB LED – Always On when board is installed
C
MB switch – Do not use, leave On
D
F206 LED
E
CGA Live LED
F~M
6.2.2
Description
VM Channels 9~16, respectively
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU can be installed in a
system.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
Only one CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU can be installed in a
system.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Each system can support only one CMS, CTI/VP, FMS, VMS, or VMP
ETU.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that KSU
is off.
6.2.3
LED Indications
The HD LED flashes red when the hard drive is active.
Do not reset the ETU when the HD LED is flashing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 128
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.3
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)- U( )
6.3.1
Description
The FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU is a Digital Voice Mail system that
supports a maximum of eight ports.
This ETU is a PC platform installed in the Electra Elite IPK that
contains Flash ROM data storage for voice recording and application
software. A digital signal processor/voice processing section
handles the following functions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
DTMF detection
DTMF generation
General tone detection
FAX CNG tone detection
PCM compression for audio recording/playback
Automatic gain control (AGC)
A serial port (direct connect speeds up to 19.2 Kbps)
This ETU provides 2-, 4-, or 8-ports for digital voice mail. Refer to
Table 6-54 Configuration Support Table.
Table 6-54 Configuration Support Table
Function
Configuration Support
Applications
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Call Forwarding
Supported
Connections
Connects to backplane connector of the KSU
Hardware
One FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
Message Notification
Through message waiting lamp
Operator Console
100 (default)
Positive disconnect: Digital Signal
MDM-F-20 Unit
Used for remote connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 129
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
COM1
Figure 6-69 FMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 130
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-70 FMS(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 131
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-71 FMS-U30 ETU
6.3.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU or one FMS-U30 can be installed
in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
Only one FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU or one FMS-U30 can be installed
in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Each system can support only one CMS, CTI/VP, FMS, VMS, or VMP
ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 132
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that KSU
is off.
6.3.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-55 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Switch Settings, for
Revision Q26031 v 6.65 or lower. For Revision Q26031 v 6.68 or
higher, refer to Table 6-56 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch
Functions.
Table 6-55 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Switch Settings
Switch
Description
1
Normally Off.
(On to enable COM1.)
2
Normally Off.
When 1 and 2 are both On, COM1 is enabled for
HOSTKEY and the VM application is stopped for
Maintenance.
3
On to enable COM2 for remote RS-232/RJ-11.
Off to allow COM1 local connection.
4
Not Used.
Used for Revision Q26031 v 6.65 or lower.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 133
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-56 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions
DIP
1
DIP
2
DIP
3
DIP
4
ON
ON
Description
To enable HostKey and run Manufacturing
Test (NEC Production only).
ON
To enable HostKey with floppy disk redirection
and run Manufacturing Test (NEC Production
only).
ON
ON
ON
To connect to CoSession using modem
instead of direct cable connection.
ON
To start BRU Host with direct cable
connection.
ON
To start BRU Host with modem connection.
ON
To connect to CoSession using direct cable
connection but not start voice mail software
(Troubleshooting or Maintenance Mode).
Used for Revision Q05631 v 6.68 or higher.
6.3.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-57 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-57 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LIVE
ETU status
Receiving
Power
Not Used
No Power
CH1
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH2
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH3
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH4
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH5
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH6
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 134
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-57 FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications (Continued)
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
CH7
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
CH8
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not
Used
MB
MB Switch Status
ON
Not Used
OFF
BIOS
DOS Status
BIOS Error
Not Used
No error
BCLR
Application Status
Red DOS
started
(VM Not
Ready)
Not Used
Idle
Green VM
Running
Orange Error
If BCLR LED is orange, check error type on console screen.
After error is corrected, LED automatically changes to green.
Do Not connect link between console and ETU until BCLR
turns green during booting.
HD
Flash Status
Not Used
Compact
Flash Disk
Active
Flash
Inactive
Do not reset the ETU while the HD LED is flashing.
Table 6-58 FMS-U30 ETU LED Indications
LED
Name
Description
LED 1
APP1
Indicates status of voice mail application software
Green Application running without errors
Amber Application running with errors
Red
Application not running
LED 2
APP 2
Not Used
LED 3
Drive
HDD active light is red when the hard drive is
accessed
Do not reset the ETU while this switch is
on.
LED 4
CF Power
On when shutdown switch in Run to indicate power
on the ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 135
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-58 FMS-U30 ETU LED Indications (Continued)
LED
Name
Description
LED 5
ICGA
Live LED flashes every 125 ms during normal
operation
LED 6
Shut Down
Switch
Indicates that the switch has no software control.
On red only when SHUTDOWN switch is in Run
LED 7
Shutdown
On red when SHUTDOWN switch is in SHUT
DOWN to indicate that voice mail can be safely
removed form the KSU
LED 8
Power
On red when ETU is receiving power from the KSU
LED 9
FED DSP
Used only for development purposes
LED 10
CH 1
On red when voice channel 1 is Off Hook
LED 11
CH 2
On red when voice channel 2 is Off Hook
LED 12
CH 3
On red when voice channel 3 is Off Hook
LED 13
CH 4
On red when voice channel 4 is Off Hook
LED 14
CH 5
On red when voice channel 5 is Off Hook
LED 15
CH 6
On red when voice channel 6 is Off Hook
LED 16
CH 7
On red when voice channel 7 is Off Hook
LED 17
CH 8
On red when voice channel 8 is Off Hook
The first four channel LEDs are also used during startup to show
that the BICOM driver is loaded (LED 1), Scan disk successfully
completed (LED 2), CoSession Host successfully Loaded (LED 3),
and voice mail started successfully (LED 4). After the system is up
and running and all channels are ready to receive calls, these LEDs
are Off. When voice mail does not start successfully, all eight
channel LEDs and LED 1 are On.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 136
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.3.5
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
J2 and J3
Used to install the MDM-F-20 Unit.
J9
Connects to the backplane.
9-pin RS-232 (COM2)
Not used (MDM-F-20 Unit).
RJ-11 modem port (COM2)
Remote connector on serial interface (MDM-F-20 Unit)
9-pin RS-232(COM1)
Local serial connector on main ETU for direct connection
6.3.6
FMS-U30 ETU Jumper Settings
J1
6.3.7
Used only on FMS/CMS
Pin 1 to Pin 2
No external modem connected (default)
Pin 2 to Pin 3
External modem connected
FMS-U30 ETU Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
J2
Connects to the backplane.
J6
Used for Compact flash drive on FMS.
J11
COM port for console programming connection
J12
Port expansion connector for DSP-U30
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 137
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.4
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
6.4.1
Description
The VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU is a 2-, 4-, or 8-port Digital Voice Mail
system.
This ETU is a PC platform installed in the Electra Elite IPK and
contains hard disk space for voice recording storage and application
software. A digital signal processor/voice processing section handles
the following functions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
DTMF detection
DTMF generation
General tone detection
FAX CNG tone detection
PCM compression for audio recording/playback
Automatic gain control (AGC)
A serial port (direct connect speeds up to 19.2 Kbps) to
connect external modem
This ETU provides 2-, 4-, or 8-ports for digital voice mail. The 2- and
4-port require the included digital signal processor (DSP); the 8-port
configuration requires a DSP-F-21 Unit. Refer to This ETU provides
2-, 4-, or 8-ports for digital voice mail. The 2- and 4-port require the
included digital signal processor (DSP); the 8-port configuration
requires a DSP-F-21 Unit. Refer to Table 6-59 Configuration Support
Table.
Table 6-59 Configuration Support Table
Function
Applications
Call Forwarding
Connections
Hardware
Message Notification
MDM-F-20 Unit
Configuration Support
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Supported
Connects to backplane connector of the KSU.
One VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
Through message waiting lamp
Used for remote connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 138
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-port VMS(8)-U( ) ETU shown
with 4-port auxiliary DSP installed.
For VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU, the
auxiliary is not required.
Option Kit required for remote
maintenance is purchased
separately.
DIP Switch
Up = Off
Down = On
9-pin RS-232
COM 2 Ports
Modem Port RJ-11
Make Busy Switch
COM 1
Local Connection
Figure 6-72 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 139
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-73 VMS-U30 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 140
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.4.2
Installation
The VMS(2)-U10 ETU has two channels of built-in Voice Mail.
The VMS(4)-U10 ETU has four channels of built-in Voice Mail.
The VMS(8)-U10 ETU has eight channels of built-in Voice Mail.
Basic Port Package
Only one VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU or one VMS-U30 ETU can be
installed in each system in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
Only one VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU or one VMS-U30 ETU can be
installed in each system in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Each system can support only one CMS, CTI/VP, FMS, VMS, or VMP
ETU.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that the
KSU is off.
6.4.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-60 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Settings.
(Revision Q30931 v 6.65 or lower). For Revision Q30931 v 6.68 or
higher, refer to Table 6-61 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch
Functions.
Table 6-60 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Settings
Switch
Description
1
Normally Off.
(On to enable COM1.)
2
Normally Off.
When 1 and 2 are both On, COM1 is enabled for HOSTKEY
and the VM application is stopped for Maintenance.
3
On to enable COM2 for remote RS-232/RJ-11.
Off to allow COM1 local connection.
4
Not Used.
Used for Revision Q30931 v 6.65 or lower.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 141
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-61 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU DIP Switch Functions
DIP
1
DIP
2
DIP
3
DIP
4
ON
ON
Description
To enable HostKey and run Manufacturing
Test (NEC Production only).
ON
To enable HostKey with floppy disk redirection
and run Manufacturing Test (NEC Production
only).
ON
ON
ON
To connect to CoSession using modem
instead of direct cable connection.
ON
To start BRU Host with direct cable
connection.
ON
To start BRU Host with modem connection.
ON
To connect to CoSession using direct cable
connection but not start voice mail software
(Troubleshooting or Maintenance Mode).
Used for Revision Q00631 v 6.68 or higher.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 142
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.4.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-62 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-62 VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Descriptio
n
LIVE
On
Flashing
Off
ETU status
Receiving
power
Not Used
No Power
CH1
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH2
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH3
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH4
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH5
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH6
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH7
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
CH8
Port status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not used
MB
MB Switch
status
ON
Not Used
OFF
BIOS
BIOS Error
Status
BIOS Error
Not Used
No error
BCLR
Application
status
Red
DOS started
(VM not
ready)
Green
VM running
Orange
Error
Not Used
Idle
If BCLR LED is orange, check error type on console screen.
After error is corrected, LED automatically changes to green.
Do Not connect link between console and ETU until BCLR
turns green during booting.
HDD
Hard Disk
status
Not Used
Hard Disk
active
Hard Disk
inactive
Do not reset the ETU while the HDD LED is flashing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 143
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Refer to Table 6-63 VMS-U30 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-63 VMS-U30 ETU LED Indications
LED
Name
Description
LED 1
APP1
Indicates status of voice mail application software
Green Application running without errors
Amber Application running with errors
Red
Application not running
LED 2
APP 2
Not Used
LED 3
Drive
HDD active light is red when the hard drive is accessed
Do not reset the ETU while this switch is On.
LED 4
CF Power
On when shutdown switch in Run to indicate power on the
ETU
LED 5
ICGA
Live LED flashes every 125 ms during normal operation
LED 6
Shut Down
Switch
Indicates that the switch has no software control.
On red only when SHUTDOWN switch is in Run
LED 7
Shutdown
On red when SHUTDOWN switch is in SHUT DOWN to
indicate that voice mail can be safely removed form the KSU
LED 8
Power
On red when ETU is receiving power from the KSU
LED 9
FED DSP
Used only for development purposes
LED 10
CH 1
On red when voice channel 1 is Off Hook
LED 11
CH 2
On red when voice channel 2 is Off Hook
LED 12
CH 3
On red when voice channel 3 is Off Hook
LED 13
CH 4
On red when voice channel 4 is Off Hook
LED 14
CH 5
On red when voice channel 5 is Off Hook
LED 15
CH 6
On red when voice channel 6 is Off Hook
LED 16
CH 7
On red when voice channel 7 is Off Hook
LED 17
CH 8
On red when voice channel 8 is Off Hook
The first four channel LEDs are also used during startup to show that the
BICOM driver is loaded (LED 1), Scan disk successfully completed (LED 2),
CoSession Host successfully Loaded (LED 3), and voice mail started
successfully (LED 4). After the system is up and running and all channels are
ready to receive calls, these LEDs are Off. When voice mail does not start
successfully, all eight channel LEDs and LED 1 are on.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 144
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.4.5
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
9-pin RS-232 (COM2)
Not used (MDM-F-20 Unit)
RJ-11 modem port (COM2)
Remote connector on serial interface (MDM-F-20 Unit)
9-pin RS-23 (COM1)
Local Serial connector on main ETU for direct connection
6.4.6
VMS-U30 ETU Jumper Settings
J7
6.4.7
Used only on VMS
Pin 1 to Pin 2
Compact flash is master drive.
Pin 2 to Pin 3
Hard Drive is master drive (default).
VMS-U30 ETU Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
J2
Connects to the backplane.
J6
Used for Compact flash drive on FMS.
J9
RJ-45 LAN connector for network connection
J11
COM port for console programming connection
J12
Port expansion connector for DSP-U30
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 145
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 7
OPTIONAL ETUS
This section describes optional Electronic Telephone Units that provide additional
functions for an Electra Elite IPK system.
7.1
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
7.1.1
Description
The Automatic Call Distribution ETU interfaces the Elite ACD Plus
Server with the Electra Elite IPK KSU.
COM 1
Figure 6-74 ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 146
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.1.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one ACD(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system. The
system is limited by 32 stations.
Expanded Port Package
Only one ACD(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system. The
system is limited by 120 stations.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that KSU
is off.
7.1.3
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-64 ACD(8)-U10 LED Indications.
Table 6-64 ACD(8)-U10 LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
LIVE
ETU status
Receiving
power
Not Used
No Power
CH1
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH2
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH3
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH4
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH5
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH6
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH7
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
CH8
Port Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle/Not Used
MB
MB Switch
Status
ON
Not Used
OFF
BIOS
BIOS Error
Status
BIOS Error
Not Used
No Error
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 147
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-64 ACD(8)-U10 LED Indications (Continued)
LED
Description
BCLR
On
Application Red
Status
DOS started
(ACD not ready)
Flashing
Off
Not Used
Idle
Green
ACD running
If BCLR LED is orange, check error type on console screen. After
error is corrected, LED automatically changes to green. Do Not
connect link between console and ETU until BCLR turns green
during booting.
HD
Compact
Flash Status
Not Used
Compact Flash
Active
Compact Flash
Inactive
Do not reset the ETU while the HD LED is flashing.
7.1.4
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
J9
Connects to the backplane.
COM1
9-pin RS-232 Local Serial connector for direct
connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 148
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.2
ACD(8)-U30 ETU
7.2.1
Description
The Automatic Call Distribution ETU interfaces the Elite ACD Plus
Server with the Electra Elite IPK KSU.
Figure 6-75 ACD(8)-U30 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 149
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.2.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one ACD(8)-U30 ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system. The
system is limited by 32 stations.
Expanded Port Package
Only one ACD(8)-U30 ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system. The
system is limited by 120 stations.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that KSU
is off.
7.2.3
Switch Settings
H
H
H
S1
Resets ETU.
S2
Dip Switch 2 is used for ETU startup in DOS mode
without loading drivers.
Dip Switch 3 is used for ETU startup in DOS mode
and loading drivers.
Dip Switches 1 and 3 are not used.
S3
SHUTDOWN switch is used to start or stop the
application.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 150
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.2.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-65 ACD(8)-U30 ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-65 ACD(8)-U30 ETU LED Indications
LED
Name
Description
LED 1
APP1
Indicates status of voice mail application software
Green ACD application running
Red
DOS started but ACD Application is not ready
LED 2
APP 2
Not Used
LED 3
Drive
HDD active light is red when the hard drive is accessed
Do not reset the ETU while this LED is on.
LED 4
CF Power
On when SHUTDOWN switch is in Run to indicate power on
the ETU
LED 5
ICGA
Live LED flashes every 125 ms during normal operation
LED 6
Shut Down
Switch
Indicates that the switch has no software control.
On red only when SHUTDOWN switch is in Run
LED 7
Shutdown
On red when SHUTDOWN switch is in SHUT DOWN to
indicate that ACD(8)-U30 ETU can be safely removed form
the KSU
LED 8
Power
On red when ETU is receiving power from the KSU
LED 9
FED DSP
Used only for development purposes
LED 10
CH 1
On red when voice channel 1 is Off Hook
LED 11
CH 2
On red when voice channel 2 is Off Hook
LED 12
CH 3
On red when voice channel 3 is Off Hook
LED 13
CH 4
On red when voice channel 4 is Off Hook
LED 14
CH 5
On red when voice channel 5 is Off Hook
LED 15
CH 6
On red when voice channel 6 is Off Hook
LED 16
CH 7
On red when voice channel 7 is Off Hook
LED 17
CH 8
On red when voice channel 8 is Off Hook
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 151
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.2.5
7.2.6
Jumper Settings
H
H
J1
Not Used
J7
Not Used
ACD(8)-U30 ETU Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
J2
Connects to the backplane.
J6
Used for Compact flash drive on FMS.
J9
RJ45 LAN connector is used for network connection.
J11
9-pin RS232 local serial connector is used for direct
connection.
J12
Port expansion connector is used for DSP-U30 installation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 152
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.3
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU
7.3.1
Description
The Base Station Unit ETU interfaces the KSU with the ZT II Zone
Transceiver for wireless communication with a PS II Personal
Station.
Figure 6-76 BSU(2)-U( ) ETU
7.3.2
Installation
When a BSU(2)-U( ) ETU is installed, a CLKG-U( ) Unit must be
installed on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of three BSU(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of eight BSU(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 153
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.3.3
Switch Settings
Refer toTable 6-66 BSU(2)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-66 BSU(2)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
SW1
Description
Momentary
Switch
BSU ETU Reset
Pressing SW1 interrupts all Wireless users connected to
the BSU(2)-U( ) ETU. Use this switch only as a last
resort.
SW2-1
Description
Off
Reports BSU ID to Main S/W
(Master)
On
Does not report BSU ID to Main S/W
(Slave)
SW2-2
Description
Off
Boot by Flash memory (Default)
On
Boot from E-Prom (IC30)
SW2-3
Description
Off
Normal Operation (Default)
On
Test Mode
SW2-4
Description
Off
Watch Dog Timer On (Default)
On
Watch Dog Timer Off
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 154
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.3.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-67 BSU(2)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-67 BSU(2)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
1
Link Status
for ZT1
Layer 1: Up
Layer 2: Up
Layer 1: Up
Layer 2:
Down
Layer 1: Down
Layer 2: Down
2
Link Status
for ZT2
Layer 1: Up
Layer 2: Up
Layer 1: Up
Layer 2:
Down
Layer 1: Down
Layer 2: Down
3
Not Used
Always Off
4
5
Status for
ZT1
6
Status for
ZT2
7
Not Used
Refer to Table 6-68 ZT Status Table for LEDs 5
and 6.
Always Off
8
9
BSU Status
Alarm
Normal
Operation
Not Operating
10
LIVE
Operation
stopped
(Power still
on)
Normal
Operation
No Power
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 155
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-68 ZT Status Table for LEDs 5 and 6
Lamp Off Line is not Connected
Lamp On indications are shown below.
No Flicker (ZT is in standby)
On
Lamp
Off
Time (0.2s)
Flash cycle is 0.1 seconds (Not Supported)
Lamp
On
Time (0.2s)
Off
Flash cycle is 0.2 seconds. Remaining indications depend on the
number of PS connections.
1 PS connection
On
Lamp
Time (0.2s)
Off
2 PS connections
On
Lamp
Off
Time (0.2s)
3 PS Connections (ZT is busy)
On
Off
Lamp
Time (0.2s)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 156
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.3.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
7.3.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
For future use.
Connections
MDF
RJ-45
ZT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ-45
ZT
RJ-45
RJ-45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8
Figure 6-77 BSU(2)-U( ) ETU Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 157
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.4
BSU(4M)-U20 ETU
7.4.1
Description
The BSU(4M)-U20 ETU is the Master Base Station Interface Unit
ETU that provides connection for four Base Stations and up to 16
simultaneous calls on the Electra Elite IPK Wireless – DECT feature.
Only one BSU(4M)-U20 ETU can be installed in the Basic or
Expanded Electra Elite IPK system.
Figure 6-78 BSU(4M)-U20 ETU
7.4.2
Installation
As a single unit, the BSU(4M)-U20 ETU (Master) can be installed in
slots S1~S8 in any KSU. Two Slave ETUs [BSU(2S) or BSU(6S)]
can be cascaded on four corner posts to the Left of the BSU(4M) in
accordance with the tables on the next page. The complete
assembly requires three adjacent slots and limits installation of the
BSU(4M) to slots S3~S8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 158
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
No.
Slot N-2
Slot N-1
Slot N
No. of Base
Stations
1
None
None
BSU(4M) ETU
4
2
None
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
6
3
None
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
10
4
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
8
5
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
12
6
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
12
7
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
16
Note
Base Station number assignments are shown in the table below:
Slot
N
N-1
N-2
ETU
Channel
BS No.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
5
9
6
10
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
Note
BSU(4M) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
When BSU(2S) ETU is installed, these numbers are not
assigned.
BSU(6S) ETU
When BSU(2S) ETU is installed, these numbers are not
assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 159
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.4.3
LED Indications
LIVE LED (Red)
On indicates communication between this ETU
and the Main CPU.
LINK (0~3) LED
On indicates Layer 1 and Layer 2 link between
the Wireless – DECT and the indicated Base
Station (1~4).
Flashes (0.5sec ON-0.5sec OFF) when Layer 1
Link between Wireless – DECT and BSU ETU is
established, but not Link 2.
Off indicates that Link 1 is not established.
Busy (0~3) LED
Status
Flashes when the indicated Base Station (1~4)
is busy. Refer to Figure 6-81 Busy LED Flash
Pattern.
Flashing Cycle
(sec)
No calls
exist
ON
OFF
0.2
1 call exists
2.0
ON
OFF
2 calls exist
ON
OFF
3 calls exist
ON
OFF
ON
4 calls exist
1.6
0.2 0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
1.2
0.2
0.2
2.0
OFF
Figure 6-79 Busy LED Flash Pattern
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 160
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.4.4
Connectors
CN 1
Connects to the backboard
CN 4
Connects to RJ-45 connector at mid-top of the BSU(2S) or
BSU(6S) ETU.
CN 5
Connects to RJ-45 connector at mid-bottom of the BSU(2S)
or BSU(6S) ETU.
The BSU(4M) has two serial interfaces: The upper port is for KGAP
Applications, Cable Delay Measurement, and IPK to Wireless Card
administration. The lower port is for Applications, telephone
registration, and system information. The "Administration Program"
is used to communicate with ether port, depending on operation
required. The specifications for the Serial Ports are as follows:
Specification
RS-232C
Connector
DB-9 Female
DCE/DTE
DCE (connected by straight cable to PC)
Speed
19200 bps
Data Length
8 bits
Parity
None
Stop Bit
None
Flow Control
Hardware Handshake
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 161
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.5
BSU(2S)-U20 ETU
7.5.1
Description
The BSU(2S)-U20 ETU is the Base Station Interface Unit Slave ETU
that provides connection for two additional Base Stations when
connected to the BSU(4M)-U20 (Master) ETU.
A maximum of two BSU(2S)-U20 ETUs can be installed in the Basic
or Expanded Electra Elite IPK system.
Figure 6-80 BSU(2S)-U20 ETU
7.5.2
Installation
The BSU(2S)-U20 ETU (Slave) is installed on four corner posts on
the front of a BSU(4M)-U20 ETU or on the front of a BSU(6S)-U20 or
on front of another BSU(2S). Slave ETUs are cascaded on posts to
the left of the BSU(4M)-U20 in accordance with the tables on the
next page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 162
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
No.
Slot N-2
Slot N-1
Slot N
No. of Base
Stations
1
None
None
BSU(4M) ETU
4
2
None
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
6
3
None
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
10
4
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
8
5
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
12
6
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
12
7
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
16
Note
Base Station number assignments are shown in the table below:
Slot
N
N-1
N-2
ETU
Channel
Base Station
No.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
5
9
6
10
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
Note
BSU(4M) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
When BSU(2S) ETU is installed, these numbers are not
assigned.
BSU(6S) ETU
When BSU(2S) ETU is installed, these numbers are not
assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 163
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.5.3
LED Indications
LIVE LED (Red)
On indicates communication between this ETU
and the Main CPU.
LINK (0 or 1) LED
On indicates Layer 1 and Layer 2 link between
the Wireless – DECT and the indicated Base
Station (5/6 or 11/12) is established.
Flashes (0.5 sec. ON-0.5 sec. OFF) when Layer
1 Link between Wireless – DECT and BSU ETU
is established, but not Link 2.
Off indicates that Link 1 is not established.
Busy (0 or 1) LED Flashing when the indicated Base Station (5/6 or
11/12) is busy. Refer to Figure 6-81 Busy LED
Flash Pattern.
Status
Flashing Cycle
(sec)
NO calls
exist
ON
OFF
0.2
1 call exists
2.0
ON
OFF
2 calls exist
ON
OFF
3 calls exist
ON
OFF
ON
4 calls exist
0.2
1.6
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
1.2
0.2
0.2
2.0
OFF
Figure 6-81 Busy LED Flash Pattern
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 164
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.5.4
Connectors
CN 1
Connects to the backboard
CN 4
Connects to RJ-45 connector at mid-top of another
BSU(2S), BSU(6S), or BSU(4M) ETU.
CN 5
Connects to RJ-45 connector at mid-bottom of another
BSU(2S), BSU(6S), or BSU(4M) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 165
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.6
BSU(6S)-U20 ETU
7.6.1
Description
The BSU(6S)-U20 ETU is the Base Station Interface Unit slave ETU
that provides connection for an additional six Base Stations when
used with the BSU(4M)-U20 (Master) ETU
A maximum of two BSU(6S)-U20 ETUs can be installed in the Basic
or Expanded Electra Elite IPK system.
Figure 6-82 BSU(6S)-U20 ETU
7.6.2
Installation
The BSU(6S)-U20 ETU (Slave) is installed on four corner posts on
the front of a BSU(4M)-U20 ETU or on the front of a BSU(2S)-U20 or
on front of another BSU(6S). Slave ETUs are cascaded on posts to
the left of the BSU(4M)-U20 in accordance with the tables on the
next page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 166
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
No.
Slot N-2
Slot N-1
Slot N
No. of Base
Stations
1
None
None
BSU(4M) ETU
4
2
None
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
6
3
None
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
10
4
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
8
5
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
12
6
BSU(2S) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
12
7
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
BSU(4M) ETU
16
Note
Base Station number assignments are shown in the table below:
Slot
N
N-1
N-2
ETU
Channel
BS No.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
5
9
6
10
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
Note
BSU(4M) ETU
BSU(6S) ETU
When BSU(2S) ETU is installed, these numbers are not
assigned.
BSU(6S) ETU
When BSU(2S) ETU is installed, these numbers are not
assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 167
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.6.3
LED Indications
LIVE LED (Red)
On to indicate communication between this ETU
and the Main CPU.
LINK (0~5) LED
On to indicate Layer 1 and Layer 2 link between
the Wireless – DECT and indicated Base
Station (5~10 or 11~16).
Flashes (0.5sec ON-0.5sec OFF) when Layer 1
Link between Wireless – DECT and BSU ETU is
established, but not Link 2.
Off to indicate that Link 1 is not established.
Busy (0~5) LED
Status
Flashing when the indicated Base Station (5~10
or 11~16) is busy. Refer to Figure 6-83 Busy
LED Flash Pattern.
Flashing Cycle
(sec)
NO calls
exist
ON
OFF
0.2
1 call exists
2.0
ON
OFF
2 calls exist
ON
OFF
3 calls exist
ON
OFF
ON
4 calls exist
0.2
1.6
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
1.2
0.2
0.2
2.0
OFF
Figure 6-83 Busy LED Flash Pattern
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 168
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.6.4
Connectors
CN 1
Connects to the backboard
CN 4
Connects to RJ-45 connector at mid-top of the BSU(2S),
another BSU(6S), or BSU(4M) ETU.
CN 5
Connects to RJ-45 connector at mid-bottom of the
BSU(2S), another BSU(6S), or BSU(4M) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 169
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.7
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
7.7.1
Description
The Common Channel Handler is an optional Interface ETU that
provides a common channel signal through the DTI-U30 ETU to a
K-CCIS network and controls the signaling between the KTS and the
CPU. Each CCH ETU supports four K-CCIS links.
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU firmware V2.0 or higher is required for Electra Elite
IPK compatibility.
Figure 6-84 CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 170
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.7.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one CCH(4)-U( ) ETU can be installed in any interface slot.
Expanded Port Package
Only one CCH(4)-U( ) ETU can be installed in any interface slot.
7.7.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-69 CCH(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-69 CCH(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
7.7.4
Setting/Description
SW1
Momentary Switch
Resets the CCH ETU. When this switch is pressed, all
K-CCIS users connected to the CCH ETU are interrupted.
Use this switch only after all other options have failed.
SW2–1
Off:
On:
Normal Operation (Default)
Test Mode
SW2–2
Off:
On:
Boot from Flash Memory (Default)
Boot from E-PROM (IC30)
SW2–3
Off:
On:
Normal Operation (Default)
Test Mode
SW2–4
Off:
On:
Watch Dog Timer On (Default)
Watch Dog Timer Off
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-70 CCH(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-70 CCH(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
1
Link Status for
CCH1
Layer 2: Up
Not Used
Layer 2: Down
2
Link Status for
CCH2
Layer 2: Up
Not Used
Layer 2: Down
3
Link Status for
CCH3
Layer 2: Up
Not Used
Layer 2: Down
4
Link Status for
CCH4
Layer 2: Up
Not Used
Layer 2: Down
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 171
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-70 CCH(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications (Continued)
7.7.5
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
5
Link Status for
CCH1
Data Sent/
Received
Not Used
Idle
6
Link Status for
CCH2
Data Sent/
Received
Not Used
Idle
7
Link Status for
CCH3
Data Sent/
Received
Not Used
Idle
8
Link status for
CCH4
Data Sent/
Received
Not Used
Idle
9
CCH status
Alarm
Normal
Operation
Not Operating
10
LIVE
Operation
Stopped
(Power Still
On)
Normal
Operation
No Power
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
7.7.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Performs maintenance functions.
Connections
There are no physical connections to the MDF for the CCH(4)-U( )
ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 172
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.8
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
7.8.1
Description
The Multiline Conference Bridge allows any intercom user or outside
party calling to a port of the CNF(8)-U( ) ETU to join or make a
multiparty conference call.
Each CNF(8)-U( ) ETU supports one 8-party conference or two
4-party conferences regulated by a switch setting.
The system recognizes this ETU as SLI(8)-U( ) ETU. This ETU
shares the total number of station ports in the system.
Figure 6-85 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 173
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.8.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of two CNF(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of CNF(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by 32
stations. This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the
system.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of two CNF(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
The maximum number of CNF(8)-U( ) ETUs that can be installed
depends on other station cards installed. The system is limited by
120 stations. This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the
system.
7.8.3
Switch Settings
The CNF(8)-U( ) ETU has the following switches.
H
H
H
Reset Switch
Refer to Table 6-71 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Reset Switch.
Conference Time Switch
Refer to Table 6-72 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Maximum Conference
Time Switch.
Party Size Switch
Table 6-71 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Reset Switch
Switch
Setting
Description
SW2
Press to Reset
Host Reset Switch
Table 6-72 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Maximum Conference Time Switch
Setting
Switch
Max Conference Time
SW3-2
SW3-3
ON
ON
1 Hour
ON
OFF
2 Hour
OFF
ON
3 Hour
OFF
OFF
No Limit
CTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 174
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-73 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU Party Size Switch
7.8.4
Switch
Setting
Description
SW3-1
ON
1 Eight-Party Conference
SW3-1
OFF
2 Four-Party Conferences
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-74 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-74 CNF(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
Status
ETU Status
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
Operation
No
Power
CH 0
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 1
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 2
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 3
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 4
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 5
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 6
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
CH 7
Status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 175
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.8.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
J1
Connects to the backplane.
J2
Not currently used
J3
Nine-pin RS-232C connector for maintenance
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 176
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.9
ECR-U( ) ETU
7.9.1
Description
The External Control Relay ETU provides common audible tone
signaling using relay contacts for external ringing equipment and an
audible output for external paging systems. Four External Tone
Ringer Control relays, one Night Chime relay, three External Paging
relays, and two General Purpose relays are provided.
Figure 6-86 ECR-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 177
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
External BGM
Source
Maximum Power Capacity
for RLYs 1~3 is 10 W
Pin 2
Pin 1
External
Amplifier
CN2 Connector
SPKR OUT
RLY 1
Zone A
RLY 2
Zone B
Zone Paging
Output from
MDF
RLY 3
Zone C
Pin 3
CN 2 Connector
Pin 4
CN 3
SPKR OUT
External
Amplifier
External
Paging
RCA
Jack
Figure 6-87 ECR-U( ) ETU Block Diagram
7.9.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one ECR-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
Expanded Port Package
Only one ECR-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 178
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.9.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red Normal Operation
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power On).
Off
No Power
Busy LED indications are listed below.
H
H
7.9.4
Steady Red
Some Relays Are Busy.
Off
All Relays Are Idle.
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN2
Contacts are used for Relays.
Refer to CN4 below.
H
CN3
H
Both-way Audio Connection is used for External
Paging.
CN4
Audio output is used for Tone Ringer and Night
Chime.
Table 6-75 Connector Descriptions (CN2)
Pin Number
13~16
Description
Not Used
12
11
General Purpose Relay #1
10
9
5~8
General Purpose Relay #0
Not Used
4
Zone Paging Audio Input
3
2
External Paging BGM input
1
Refer to Chapter 5 Installing KSUs, Table 5-1 MDF Cable
Connections on page 5-5 for all other ECR-U( ) ETU cable
connections.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 179
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.9.5
Specifications
H
H
H
H
H
Relays
All relays are rated 24 Vdc at 500 mA.
External Tone
Output Power -10 dBm
Ringer/Night Chime
Output Impedance 600Ω
External Paging
Output power -10 dBm
Output Impedance
600Ω
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 180
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.10
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
7.10.1
Description
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an optional Ethernet interface for the Electra
Elite IPK KSU that supports eight Ethernet ports. Each port has two
LEDs that indicate status and activity.
A HUB is a switching point for data that comes together from
individual ports. A switch determines the port where the data should
be forwarded and regulates transmission. The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
provides an efficient platform when multiple ETUs that require
Ethernet connection are installed in the Electra Elite IPK KSU. One
port can be a source port, and another port can be set as a target
port to mirror the source and monitor data traffic.
Figure 6-88 HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 181
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.10.2
Installation
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU cannot be installed in a KSU that contains an
EliteMail VP or CTI system.
This ETU has an attached green cable that must be connected to
frame ground.
Basic Port Package
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The system is limited by 32 stations. This ETU shares the total
number of station ports in the system.
Expanded Port Package
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The system is limited by 120 stations. This ETU shares the total
number of station ports in the system.
7.10.3
Switch Settings
Press switch SW1 to Reset the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
7.10.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-76 HUB(8)-U( ) LEDS on page 6-182.
Table 6-76 HUB(8)-U( ) LEDS
LED
ON
LED1
7.10.5
OFF
Blinking
No Power to ETU
Normal Operation
RJ45C Yellow
100 Mbps
10 Mbps
N/A
RJ45C Green
LINK
No Link
Data Tx/Rx
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
CN3
Three pin Jumper. Pins 2 and 3 are shorted for
Normal operation.
CN5
Channel 1~4 RJ45C Connectors
CN6
Channel 5~8 RJ45C Connectors
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 182
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.11
IAD(8)-U( )
7.11.1
Description
The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU is an optional interface integration device ETU
for the Electra Elite IPK KSU. The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU supports various
IP applications such as the IP CCH ETU application and the
MEGACO Station Application. Currently used configurations are
indicated in Figure 6-89 IAD(8)-U( ) ETU on page 6-183.
Figure 6-89 IAD(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 183
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-77 IAD(8)-U( ) Configurations
Ports
Installation slot
Electra Elite IPK
DTI(8)-U-U( )
8
S1~S8
IP CCH ETU
ESI(8)-U( )
8
S1~S8
Megaco Station ETU
Configuration
7.11.2
Application
Boot Up Sequence Status Identification
Status of the IAD(8)-U( ) ETU during boot up is shown in Table 6-78
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU LED Boot Sequence Indications.
Table 6-78 IAD(8)-U( ) ETU LED Boot Sequence Indications
State
D8
D6
D4
D2
D7
D5
D3
D1
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8
*D12
LIVE
Approximate
Time
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Flash
1 second
(from Cold Boot)
2
ON
ON
ON
ON
Off
Off
Off
Off
Flash
5 seconds
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Flash
3 seconds
4
Off
Off
Off
Off
ON
ON
Off
Off
Flash
5 seconds
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
ON
ON
Flash
5 seconds
6
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Flash
5 seconds
* LIVE LED D12 also flashes when ETU is receiving power from the KSU.
7.11.3
Installation
This ETU can be installed in any KSU slot that supports the
applicable ETU simulated.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of three IAD(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8 when used as an ESI or DTI-U.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 14 IAD(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8
when used as an ESI.
A maximum of eight IAD(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8 when used as a DTI-U.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 184
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.11.4
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-79 IAD(8)-U( ) ETU Switches.
Table 6-79 IAD(8)-U( ) ETU Switches
Switch
Setting
Description
S1
Press to Reset
Host Reset Switch
S2
Shown below
Eight-position DIP Switch
S2-1~3
Always Off
Reserved
S2-4
On (default) to enable
Off to disable
Auto Card Discovery Selection On only for first power on to
recognize ETU and set defaults
or for ESI(8)-U( ) ETU simulation
S2-5
Always On to enable 8
ports
(Off enables 4 ports)
Number of Voice Ports Selection
S2-6~8
7.11.5
S2-6 and S2-7 On for
DTI mode.
S2-6 On for ESI Mode
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU Mode
Selection to show simulated ETU
Ethernet Status
Two Built-in LEDs (One green and one yellow) on the front of each
RJ-45 Connector indicate Ethernet connection status. The yellow
LED is On when the link is up; the green LED is On to indicate
activity.
7.11.6
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
P1
Connects to the backplane.
J1, J10, J11
Reserved for future use.
J5
RJ-45 Ethernet connector for future use
J6
Default RJ-45 Ethernet connector
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 185
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.12
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU
7.12.1
Description
The IPCA( )-U( ) ETU is a pure IP switch ETU for use with the Electra
Elite IPK KSU. The IPCA( )-U( )ETU can manage call control for a
maximum of 30 IP software telephones. The MG(8)-U( ) ETU is
required for IP telephones to communicate with existing Electra Elite
IPK telephones or various available trunks.
Figure 6-90 IPCA( )-U10
7.12.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one IPCA( )-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The IPC system is limited by 30 IP stations. This ETU shares the
total number of station ports in the system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 186
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Expanded Port Package
Only one IPCA( )-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The IPC system is limited by 30 IP stations. This ETU shares the
total number of station ports in the system.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU.
7.12.3
7.12.4
Installation Procedure
1.
Ensure that Switch S3 is in SHUTDOWN.
2.
Insert IPCA-U( ) ETU in Electra Elite IPK KSU.
3.
Connect LAN cable to the LAN.
4.
Ensure that Switch S3 is in RUN.
5.
Wait for the green AP1 LED to come On.
Shut Down Procedure
1.
Ensure that Drive LED is not flashing.
2.
Place Switch S3 in SHUTDOWN.
3.
Wait for red SHUT DOWN LED to come On.
4.
Remove the IPCA-U( ) from the KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 187
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.12.5
Switch Settings
H
H
H
H
H
S1
Used to Reset the ETU.
S2-1
Normal Off. On to set default networking values.
When IP address setting is lost, the IPCA-U( ) can
be rebooted with switch S2-1 On to set temporary
default networking values:
IPC IP Address Assignment: 192.168.0.1
IPC Subnet Mask Assignment: 255.255.255.0
IPC Router Address Assignment: 0.0.0.0
DHCP Client Assignment: Disable
IPC Host Name: mgc
S2-2
Used to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) Log File for
troubleshooting.
S2-3/4
Not used
S3
SHUTDOWN switch used to start or stop the
application
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 188
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.12.6
LED Indications
Refer toTable 6-80 IPCA( )-U( )ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-80 IPCA( )-U( )ETU LED Indications
LED
Name
Color
Controller
ON
OFF
1
AP1
Green
AP
Application on
Normal
Application
stopped
(default)
2
AP2
Red
AP
MG ETU
registered
MG ETU not
registered
(default)
3
Drive
Red
BIOS
Accessing drive
Not accessing
drive (default)
4
CF PWR
Red
Compact Flash
power On
Compact
Flash power
Off
6
Switch S3 LED
Red
Hardware
Switch S3 in
RUN
Switch S3 in
SHUT DOWN
(default)
Application
Running – Do
not remove
ETU
7
SHUT DOWN
Red
BIOS
Application shut
down – OK to
remove ETU
10
CH 1
Red
AP
Channel used
Channel not
used (default)
11
CH 2
Red
AP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
12
CH 3
Red
AP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
13
CH 4
Red
AP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
14
CH 5
Red
AP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
15
CH 6
Red
AP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
16
CH 7
Red
AP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
17
CH 8
Red
APP
Channel used
Not used
(default)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 189
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.12.7
7.12.8
Jumper Settings
H
H
J1
Not Used.
J7
Not Used.
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
H
J2
Connects to the backplane.
J4
Connection is used for SODimm Memory card.
J6
Used for Compact Flash drive on FMS.
J9
RJ45 LAN connector is used for network connection.
J11
Serial Port
J12
Not Used
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 190
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.13
IVR Application
7.13.1
Description
The EliteApps – Interactive Voice Response application is a
man-machine interface that uses scripting language to play prompts
that guide a caller to select different available options using a
touchtone telephone key pad (DTMF tones).
This application is implemented using a VMP(4)-U( ) ETU and an
IVR Hard Disk Drive Kit to support four ports for IVR applications.
When the DSP-U( ) module is attached eight ports are available.
Figure 6-91 VMP(8)-U( ) ETU With IVR HDD
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 191
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.13.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one VMP ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system. The
system is limited by 32 stations.
Expanded Port Package
Only one VMP ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system. The
system is limited by 120 stations.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that KSU
is off.
7.13.3
Switch Settings
The following default switch settings are used for the VMP(4)/(8)-U( )
ETU. Typically these settings should remain at factory default.
Table 6-81 Switch Settings for VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
Switch
Default
Setting
SW 1
Off
Resets the ETU. Leave at factory default setting.
SW 2-1
Off
Not used for IVR ETU. Leave at factory default setting.
SW 2-2
Off
Restores the ETU to factory default settings if set to On.
Leave at factory default unless factory defaults must be restored, then set
SW2-2 and SW2-3 to On.
SW2-3
Off
Restores the ETU to factory default settings if set to On.
Leave at factory default unless factory defaults must be restored, then set
SW2-2 and SW2-3 to On.
SW3
Off
Toggles to switch the IVR application On or Off.
Description
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 192
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.13.4
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-82 VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-82 VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Flashing
Off
Not Used
Not Used
Application Software
Running without errors Green
Running with errors
Amber
Not Running
Red
LED 2, AP2
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
LED 3, DRIVE
Hard Drive Access
Red if accessed
Not Used
When not
accessed
LED 4, CF PWR
Power to the ETU
Red if power is on
Not Used
No power to ETU
LED 5, ICGA
Live LED
Not Used
Red every
125ms during
operation
Operation is shut
down
LED 6, Switch S3
Indication
Do not remove Voice
Mail from KSU
Red when S3 in
RUN
Not Used
S3 not in RUN
position
LED 7, SHUT DOWN
Safe to remove Voice
Mail from KSU
Red when S3 in
SHUT DOWN
Not Used
S3 not in SHUT
DOWN position
LED 8, Power
Receiving KSU power
Red if power is on
Not Used
No KSU power
LED 9, FED DSP
For development only
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
LED 10, CH1
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 11, CH2
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 12, CH3
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 13, CH4
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 14, CH5
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 15, CH6
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 16, CH7
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 17, CH8
OFF/ON HOOK status Red for Off-hook
Not Used
On Hook
LED 1, AP1
Description
On
The first four channel LEDS are also used during startup to signify:
LED 1 - BICOM driver loaded
LED 2 - Scandisk completed successfully
LED 4 - Application started successfully
After system is up and running these LEDs are turned off, and all channels are ready to receive calls.
When the VMP(4)/(8) fails to start, all eight channel LEDs and the BCLR LED (AP1) are on.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 193
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-83 VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Ready LED Indications shows the
status of the VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU after it has been installed,
initialized and is ready to process calls.
Table 6-83 VMP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU Ready LED Indications
LED
Description
Status
Running without errors
Solid Green
Power to the ETU
Solid Red
Live LED
Blinking Red
LED 7, SHUT DOWN
Initialized application
Solid Green
LED 8, Power
Receiving KSU power
Solid Red
LED 1, AP1
Application Software
LED 4, CF PWR
LED 5, ICGA
7.13.5
Jumper Settings
The following jumper settings apply.
J1
Setting
Pin 1 to Pin 2
IVR Integration (default)
Pin 2 to Pin 3
Not Used
J7
Setting
Pin 1 to Pin 2
Not Used
Pin 2 to Pin 3
Hard Drive is master drive (default)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 194
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.13.6
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
J2
Connects to the backplane.
J8
Connects to Hard Disk memory.
J9
RJ45 LAN connector for network connection
J11
9-pin RS232 local serial connector for direct connection
J12
Port expansion connector for DSP-U( ) module
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 195
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.14
MG(8)-U( ) ETU
7.14.1
Description
The MG(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-path gateway ETU between the
IPCA( )-U10 and the CPUI( )-U( ).
Figure 6-92 MG(8)-U( ) ETU
7.14.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one MG(8)-U( )ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The system is limited to 16 trunks. This ETU does not take away
from the total number of trunks in the system, but dedicates these
trunks as CO ports 17~24.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 196
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Expanded Port Package
Only one MG(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8.
The system is limited to 64 trunks. This ETU shares the total number
of trunk ports in the system.
7.14.3
Switch Settings
H
H
S1
Reset Switch
S2
Eight position DIP switch
Refer to Table 6-84 MG(8)-U( ) ETU S2 Switch Settings.
Table 6-84 MG(8)-U( ) ETU S2 Switch Settings
S2
Description
Default
1
ETU Type Selection. Refer to Table 6-85 ETU Common
Settings for the IAD Platform.
2
3
4
Four/eight channel Assignment: On: 8 channel, Off: 4
channel
On
5
On to Enable 1st Power On
On
6
Default IP Address Setting On/Off
Off
When MG(8)-U10 ETU is booted with Switch 6 On, the
following defaults are set:
MG IP Address Assignment: 192.168.0.2
MG Subnet Mask Assignment: 255.255.255.0
MG Router Address Assignment: 0.0.0.0
DHCP Client Assignment: Disable
7
On to output Log data for system communications.
Used for troubleshooting.
Off
8
On to output Log data for MEGACO.
Used for troubleshooting.
Off
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 197
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-85 ETU Common Settings for the IAD Platform
ETU Type
7.14.4
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
COI
On
On
On
COID
On
On
Off
DID
On
Off
On
TLI
On
Off
Off
DTI
Off
On
On
MG
Off
On
Off
ESI
Off
Off
On
Not Used
Off
Off
Off
LED Indications
7.14.4.1
Normal State
Refer to Table 6-86 Normal State LEDs.
Table 6-86 Normal State LEDs
LED
ON
Channel LEDs
1~8 Status
Busy
OFF
Idle
Operation
Stopped
Power On
Live Led
7.14.4.2
FLASHING
Normal
Operation
Power Off
For Initialization
Refer toTable 6-87 Initialization LEDs.
Table 6-87 Initialization LEDs
LED
1
LED
2
LED
3
LED
4
LED
5
LED
6
LED
7
LED
8
Power On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Searching IPCA( )-U10
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Initialized
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Condition
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 198
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.14.5
Connectors
The following connectors are included:
H
H
H
H
H
H
P1
Connects to the backplane.
J1
Used for Serial Interface Test Port.
J5
Ethernet Port 2 is not used.
J6
Ethernet Port 1 is used to connect to the LAN.
J10
Not used
J13
Not used
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 199
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.15
PBR( )-U( ) ETU
7.15.1
Description
The Pushbutton Receiver (PBR) ETU detects and translates DTMF
tones generated by Single Line Telephones, modems, or facsimile
machines. This ETU is required when the four built-in CPUI( )/U( )
ETU PBR channels are not enough to support all the PBR
requirements of the system, or the channels on the CPUI( )/U( )
ETU are assigned for the Automated Attendant and DISA features.
Figure 6-93 PBR( )-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 200
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.15.2
Installation
Basic Port Package
Only one PBR( )-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8 to provide
four circuits. Four circuits are built-in on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU for a
maximum of eight PBR circuits.
Expanded Port Package
Only one PBR( )-U( ) ETU can be installed in slots S1~S8 to provide
four circuits. Four circuits are built-in on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU for a
maximum of eight PBR circuits.
7.15.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
H
H
Blinking Red
Indicates Normal Operation.
Steady Red
Operation is Stopped with power On.
Off
Power is Off.
LED 1 indications are listed below.
H
H
7.15.4
On
Some circuit(s) are receiving DTMF signaling.
Off
All PBR(s) are idle.
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
CN1
Used to Connect to the backplane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 201
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16
VMP( )-U40 ETU
7.16.1
Description
This ETU is a PC-platform that contains disk space for voice
recording storage and application software. It can be configured as
a 2-port, 4-port, or 8-port interface.
The 2- or 4-port interface includes one digital signal processor
(DSP); a DSP-U30 Unit must be installed for the 8-port interface.
Major features include:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A faster running 486-based processor allows quicker boot and
faster operation.
Cosession direct connection speed of 57,000 baud is
supported as the only direct connection speed for all U40
ETUs.
Port upgrades are performed by replacing the Compact Flash
drive with another drive with the needed port configuration.
All ETUs have a built-in modem for remote console
programming. An external modem and single-line port can
also be used for remote programming. The internal modem is
accessed from the automated attendant by dialing the modem
extension ID that is only an ID used by voice mail, not an
extension on the telephone system.
The voice mail application efficiently shuts down after active
calls are completed, and the ETU turns off when the shutdown
switch is placed in SHUTDOWN (Q51231 or higher database is
required).
The system manager can select a special language for a
particular subscriber at the console, and the subscriber hears
the language when login is complete. The default language
must be the system default language (Q51231 or higher
database is required).
A database entity, the Language Selection Box, allows outside
callers to choose a language. Each database entity (e.g.,
personal message box) also has the selected language
associated with it (Q51231 or higher database is required).
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 202
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-94 VMP( )- U40 ETU
7.16.2
Installation
The VMP(2)-U40 ETU has two channels of built-in Voice Mail.
The VMP(4)-U40 ETU has four channels of built-in Voice Mail.
The VMP(8)-U40 ETU has eight channels of built-in Voice Mail.
Only one VMP(2)/(4)/(8)-U40 ETU can be installed in any interface
slot in the Basic or Expanded Port Package of the Electra Elite IPK
system.
This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system.
When installing this ETU, make all ETU DIP switch setting
changes before inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that the
KSU is off.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 203
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16.3
Installing Flash Drive on the VMP( )-U40 ETU
Use the following instructions to install the Flash Drive.
1.
Remove the VMP( )-U40 ETU and selected Flash Drive from
the box.
2.
Locate slot CN6 on VMP( )-U40 ETU.
3.
The side with the SanDisk name in large red letters should be
facing up, as shown in Figure 6-95 Installing the Flash Drive on
the VMP( )-U40 ETU.
Figure 6-95 Installing the Flash Drive on the VMP( )-U40 ETU
The Flash Drive goes in only one way, and does not take much
force to insert it.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 204
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Push the drive in until it is fully seated, as shown in Figure 6-96
Flash Drive Seated on VMP( )-U40 ETU.
Figure 6-96 Flash Drive Seated on VMP( )-U40 ETU
5.
Ensure that jumper J1 is set across pins 1 and 2.
6.
Ensure that jumper J7 is set across pins 1 and 2.
7.
Insert Sony battery CR-2032 into BATT1 connector with the +
sign facing up as shown in Figure 6-96 Flash Drive Seated on
VMP( )-U40 ETU on page 6-205. When an eight port ETU is
used go to 7.16.5 Installing DSP( )-U30 on VMP( )-U40 ETU on
page 6-210, otherwise your voice mail ETU is ready for
installation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 205
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16.4
Installing Hard Drive on the VMP( )-U40 ETU
Warning! Handle the hard drive carefully! Do not drop the drive or
apply pressure to it! Do not touch the printed circuit board of the
drive or ETU unnecessarily. Doing so can make a drive inoperable!
This unit makes extensive use of CMOS technology that is very
susceptible to static; therefore, extreme care must be taken to avoid
static discharge when handling.
1.
Before mounting the drive make note of the connection to the
hard drive, notice the four pins to the left of the drive, These
pins are not connected for normal operation, see Figure 6-97
Connecting the Hard Drive.
Figure 6-97 Connecting the Hard Drive
2.
Check jumper J-7 and make sure it is on pins 2-3, see Figure 698 Plus Sign on Battery Displayed Up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 206
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Check jumper J-1 and make sure it is on pins 1-2, see Figure 698 Plus Sign on Battery Displayed Up.
4.
Insert Sony battery CR-2032 into BATT1 connector, the + sign
should be facing up as shown in Figure 6-98 Plus Sign on
Battery Displayed Up.
J-1 — make sure
it is set to pins
2-3.
BATT1 Connector
— install battery
with the + facing
up.
J-7 — make sure
it is set to pins 23 for hard drive.
Figure 6-98 Plus Sign on Battery Displayed Up
5.
Insert keyed end of ribbon cable into connector CN8, the keyed
connector only goes into connector CN8 one way and should
not be forced. The red stripe of the cable is towards the bottom
of the ETU as given in Figure 6-99 Connecting the Ribbon
Cable on page 6-208.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 207
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notice the four pins to
the left of the drive.
These pins are not
connected for normal
operation.
Red Stripe
Figure 6-99 Connecting the Ribbon Cable
6.
Place hard drive on table with printed circuit board side up and
the pins facing the card as shown in Figure 6-99 Connecting
the Ribbon Cable.
7.
Connect the hard drive to the cable making sure that the four
pins on right side of the drive are not connected as shown in
Figure 6-100 Leaving Four Pins Unconnected.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 208
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notice the four pins to
the left of the drive.
These pins are not
connected for normal
operation.
Figure 6-100 Leaving Four Pins Unconnected
8.
Carefully place the hard drive on the ETU as shown in Figure 6101 Placing the Hard Drive on the ETU.
Figure 6-101 Placing the Hard Drive on the ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 209
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
9.
Holding the drive so it does not move turn the ETU over and put the
four mounting screws in place as shown in Figure 6-102 Placing the
Four Mounting Screws. The screws only need to be lightly torque
down. Over Tightening The Screws Can Damage The Board.
Figure 6-102 Placing the Four Mounting Screws
7.16.5
Installing DSP( )-U30 on VMP( )-U40 ETU
For an 8-port VMP( )-U40 ETU, the DSP-U30 must be installed.
Refer to Figure 6-103 Installing the DSP-U30 on the VMP( )-U40
ETU.
1.
Wearing a grounding strap, remove the VMP( )-U40 and
DSP-U30 from the box and lay on a flat work surface.
2.
Locate connector CN12 in the center of the ETU and position
the DSP-U30 over it. Press down firmly on the DSP-U30 unit
until a secure connection is made. Ensure that all the standoffs
are snapped completely.
3.
Place Switch SW3 in RUN.
4.
Install the ETU in the KSU.
5.
Turn ON the KSU system power.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 210
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
Wait for the APP1 LED to turn green, then connect the support
PC to the VMP(8)-U40 ETU.
7.
Verify that eight ports are shown on the banner screen.
8.
When the unit is to be installed at another location, shut down
the voice mail application by pressing the ESC key.
9.
Enter Y for yes, and enter the password (default is nec).
10.
From the Utility menu enter x to exit to DOS.
11.
Disconnect from the system.
12.
Place SW3 in SHUT DOWN.
13.
Wait for the SHUT DOWN LED to light red.
14.
Turn OFF the KSU power and remove the ETU from the KSU.
15.
Make sure to transport the ETU in the original packaging.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 211
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
DSP-U30
Piggybacked on ETU
Auxiliary DSP
Figure 6-103 Installing the DSP-U30 on the VMP( )-U40 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 212
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16.6
Switch Settings
Table 6-88 VMP( )-U40 ETU Switch Settings
Reset Power Switch SW1
Used for development only
DIP Switch SW2
1
2
3
4
Description
Enable HostKey and run Manufacturing Test (NEC
Production use only.
ON
ON
Enable HostKey with floppy disk redirection and run
Manufacturing Test (NEC Production use
only.Production use only.
ON
Connect to Cosession using modem instead of direct
cable.
ON
ON
ON
ON
Start BRU host with direct cable connection
ON
Start BRU host with modem connection
ON
Connect to Cosession using direct cable connection,
but do not start voice mail software (for
troubleshooting and maintenance only)
SHUTDOWN Switch SW3
Used to identify the position of SW3
RUN
LED 6 is on red.
SHUT DOWN
LED 7 is on red.
7.16.7
Jumper Settings
Table 6-89 VMP( )-U40 ETU Jumper Settings
J1
1-2
External modem not connected (default)
2-3
External modem connected
J7
1-2
Compact Flash is master drive
2-3
HDD is master drive (default)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 213
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16.8
VMP( )-U40 LED Indications
Table 6-90 VMP( )-U40 ETU LED Indications (on back of ETU
LED No.
Name
On
Flashing
Off
1
AP1
Application
Software
Green (Run no
errors)
Amber (Run
with errors)
Red (Not
running)
Not Used
Not Used
2
AP2
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
3
DRIVE access
Red for access
Not Used
Not accessed
4
CF POWER
Red
(Receiving
ETU power)
Not Used
No ETU power
5
LIVE
6
SW3 in RUN
Red (don’t
remove ETU)
Not Used
Not in RUN
7
SW3 in
SHUTDOWN
Red (ETU can
be removed)
Not Used
Not
SHUTDOWN
8
Power
Red (ETU
Receiving
KSU power)
Not Used
No KSU power
9
Development
only
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
10
CH1
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
11
CH2
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
12
CH3
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
13
CH4
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
14
CH5
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
15
CH6
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
16
CH7
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
17
CH8
Red (Off Hook)
Not Used
On Hook
Not Used
Red every
125ms during
operation
Operation
shutdown
CH LEDs 1~4 light during startup to indicate:
LED1
BICOM driver loaded
LED2
Scandisk completed successfully
LED3
CoSession Host loaded successfully
LED4
Voice Mail started successfully
After the system is up and running these LEDs are off, and channels can receive calls.
When Voice Mail fails to start, all CH LEDs and the AP1 LED are on.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 214
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.16.9
Connectors
Table 6-91 VMP( )-U40 ETU Connectors
Connector
CN2
Backplane connector
CN4
SO-MIDD memory connector
CN6
Compact Flash Connector
CN8
Hard Drive connector
CN9
Ethernet Port
CN11
COM port for console programming connection
CN12
Port expansion connector for DSP-U30 Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 215
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.17
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
7.17.1
Description
The Voice Recording Service ETU provides record/playback of voice
messages for the Automated Attendant, Voice Prompt, and Delay
Announcement features. The VRS(4)-U( ) ETU must use the built-in
PBR circuits on the CPUI( )/U( ) ETU for Automated Attendant or
DISA.
Figure 6-104 VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 216
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Each VRS(4)-U( ) ETU has four record/playback channels. The
maximum voice recording time for each channel is 240 seconds. The
technician can select one of four message lengths. The available
message lengths and the maximum number of messages that can
be recorded are listed in the table below.
7.17.2
Message Length
Maximum Number of
Recorded Messages
15 seconds
16
30 seconds
8
60 seconds
4
120 seconds
2
Installation
Basic Port Package
A maximum of two VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of two VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots
S1~S8.
7.17.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 6-92 VRS(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 6-92 VRS(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch Settings
Function
SW1–1
SW1–2
SW1–3
Recording Decibel
Adjustment
Off
Off
Off
0 decibels (default)
On
Off
Off
1 decibel
Off
On
Off
2 decibels
On
On
Off
3 decibels
Off
Off
On
4 decibels
On
Off
On
5 decibels
Off
On
On
6 decibels
On
On
On
7 decibels
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
6 - 217
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 6-92 VRS(4)-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings (Continued)
Switch Settings
SW1-4
SW2
7.17.4
Function
On
Record Gain
Off
Record Pad (default)
N/A
Test/Reset Switch
LED Indications
Refer to Table 6-93 VRS(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications.
Table 6-93 VRS(4)-U( ) ETU LED Indications
7.17.5
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
BSY
1
Channel 1
status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
BSY
2
Channel 2
status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
BSY
3
Channel 3
status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
BSY
4
Channel 4
status
Busy
Not Used
Idle
LIVE
ETU Status
Operation
stopped
(Power On)
Normal
operation
No power
Connectors
The following connector is included:
H
7.17.6
CN1
Connects to the backplane.
Pins
Two pins, SP1 and SP2, are located on the top right of the VRS ETU.
These pins are for maintenance. Do not change the factory default
settings on these pins. Pins 2 and 3 are short-circuited (default).
___________________________________________________________________________________
6 - 218
Installing ETUs (Circuit Cards)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 7
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 7-1
Section 2
Music on Hold ................................................................................................. 7-1
2.1
Connecting Audio Sources to the KSU ....................................................... 7-1
Section 3
Station Background Music ............................................................................ 7-1
Section 4
Paging Connections ....................................................................................... 7-2
Section 5
Connecting a KSU to a Personal Computer ................................................ 7-2
5.1
Connecting the PC to the KSU .................................................................... 7-2
5.2
Connecting the Printer to the KSU .............................................................. 7-3
5.3
Remote Programming using the Built-in Modem (Modem Kit Unit) ............ 7-3
5.4
Elite LAN PC Programming Device ............................................................. 7-4
5.4.1
Dimensions ........................................................................................................ 7-4
5.4.2
Power Requirements ......................................................................................... 7-4
5.4.3
Reset Switch...................................................................................................... 7-4
5.4.4
Serial Interface................................................................................................... 7-5
5.4.5
RJ-45 Ethernet Interface ................................................................................... 7-5
5.4.6
Ethernet Cable................................................................................................... 7-6
5.4.7
LED Information................................................................................................. 7-7
5.4.8
Connecting to the Electra Elite IPK/Elite 48/192................................................ 7-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 7
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 7-1
Music Source Connections ......................................................................................... 7-1
Figure 7-2
Connecting a PC to the KSU ...................................................................................... 7-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures
Installing Electra Elite IPK KSU
Common Optional Equipment Chapter
7
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Electra Elite IPK system supports Music on Hold, Station Background Music and
external paging. This chapter provides information regarding these options.
SECTION 2
MUSIC ON HOLD
The Electra Elite IPK KSU allows an internal or external Music on Hold source to be
connected to the Electra Elite IPK system. When an internal music source is used
(digital music), external music on hold is not available.
2.1
Connecting Audio Sources to the KSU
Connect the plug end into the audio jack on the side of the base KSU.
Figure 7-1 Music Source Connections
SECTION 3
STATION BACKGROUND MUSIC
Station Background Music can be provided using an internal or an external source.
The same connection method used for Music on Hold is used for Station Background
Music.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
7-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
PAGING CONNECTIONS
When connecting External Paging, the ECR-U( ) ETU is the interface with Paging In/
Out, Background Music (External Speaker) Out and/or External Tone Ringer/Night
Chime Out.
SECTION 5
CONNECTING A KSU TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER
To use the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Least Cost Routing (LCR), Wireless,
and PC Programming, specialized software must installed in the user PC and the PC
must be connected via a serial port to the KSU.
5.1
Connecting the PC to the KSU
Using RS-232C straight cable, connect the PC to one of the COM ports on the
side of the KSU. Refer to Figure 7-2 Connecting a PC to the KSU.
The functions and the communication port connections are:
Function
Port
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
COM 1
PC Programming
COM 1
Wireless Programming
COM 1
Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
COM 2
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
COM 3
Serial-port characteristics include:
Characteristic
Value
Baud Rate
38.4 K (maximum)
Parity
None
Stop Bit
1 stop bit
Data Bit
8 bits
Port Type
DCE
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-2
Installing Electra Elite IPK KSU Common Optional Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 7-2 Connecting a PC to the KSU
5.2
Connecting the Printer to the KSU
When using the charge control ability, connect the printer to the KSU to allow
the printing of the charge data. Connect the printer to the serial port on the
side of the KSU with an RS-232C straight cable. Use the COM 2 port to
connect the printer.
5.3
Remote Programming using the Built-in Modem (Modem Kit Unit)
PC programming abilities include Remote Programming.
Connect the CO line to the modem extension number. The following
characteristics apply to the built-in modem.
Characteristic
Value
Baud Rate
14.4Kpbs
Parity
None
Stop Bit
1
Data Bit
8
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
7-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4
Elite LAN PC Programming Device
5.4.1
Dimensions
The diagram to the
right indicates the
dimensions for the
LAN PC Programming
Device.
5.4.2
Power Requirements
The LAN PC
Programming Device
is shipped with a
12Vdc, 1A power
supply.
5.4.3
Reset Switch
The LAN PC
Programming Device
has a reset switch that
is located next to the
RJ-45 connector. The
reset switch reboots
the device when
pressed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-4
Installing Electra Elite IPK KSU Common Optional Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.4
Serial Interface
The LAN PC Programming Device has a female DCE DB-25 serials
port that supports the RS-232 serial standards.
Note 1 The device server can alternately be powered up via the serial port
using one of these pins.
Note 2 The minus (-) is sometimes shown as A (TXA), and the plus sign is
sometimes shown as B (TXB).
5.4.5
RJ-45 Ethernet Interface
The back panel on the LAN PC
Programming Device contains a
9-30 Vdc power plug, a reset
switch, and an RJ-45
(10Base-T) Ethernet port that
supports up to 10 Mbps.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
7-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.6
Ethernet Cable
RJ-45 Connector
Ethernet Interface Signals
This drawing shows a typical RJ-45 connector. The color indications
are not standard but are typical of an Ethernet patch cable. Pin 1 is
located at the top of the connector (Orange + White). The drawn
view is from the end of the connector.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-6
Installing Electra Elite IPK KSU Common Optional Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.7
LED Information
The LAN PC Programming Device has the following LEDs:
Link (Green)
Net Tx/Rx (Yellow)
LED
L (Green)
On to indicate the network port is
connected to the network.
Net Tx/Rx (Yellow)
Flashes to indicate the network packets are
transmitting and receiving.
Collision (Red)
On to indicate network collisions.
Diagnostic (Red)
On or flashes in combination with the Status
LED to indicate error detection.
On, Status LED flashes:
1x: EPROM checksum error
2x: RAM error
3x: Token Ring error
4x: EEPROM checksum error
5x: Duplicated IP address on the network
Flashes, Status LED flashes:
4x: Faulty network connection
5x: No DHCP response received
Status (Green)
On to indicate that the physical serial port
does not have a connection to or from the
network.
Flashes to indicate that the physical serial
port has a connection to or from the
network.
Collision (Red)
Diagnostic (Red)
Status (Green)
Meaning
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
7-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4.8
Connecting to the Electra Elite IPK/Elite 48/192
The LAN PC Programming Device allows the system to be
programmed via a LAN or WAN. Refer to the diagram below.
Elite LAN PC
Programming Device
Null Adapter
LAN/WAN NETWORK
The Electra Elite IPK uses a DB9 cable.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-8
Installing Electra Elite IPK KSU Common Optional Equipment
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ....................................................................................... 8-1
Section 2
Multiline Terminals ......................................................................................... 8-1
2.1
DTR-2DT-1 TEL .......................................................................................... 8-1
2.2
DTR-4D-1 TEL ............................................................................................ 8-3
2.3
DTH-8-1 TEL ............................................................................................... 8-4
2.4
DTH-8D-1 TEL ............................................................................................ 8-5
2.5
DTH-16-1 TEL ............................................................................................. 8-6
2.6
DTH-16D-1 TEL .......................................................................................... 8-7
2.7
DTH-16(BL)-1 TEL ...................................................................................... 8-8
2.8
DTH-16LD-1 TEL ........................................................................................ 8-9
2.9
DTH-32D-1 TEL ........................................................................................ 8-10
2.10
ITH-8D-2/3 TEL ......................................................................................... 8-11
2.11
ITH-16D-2/3 TEL ....................................................................................... 8-12
2.12
DCR-60-1 Console .................................................................................... 8-13
Section 3
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System ........................................ 8-14
Section 4
Applying Power to IP Terminals ................................................................. 8-15
Section 5
Connecting an IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC ................... 8-17
Section 6
Connecting the Attendant Console to a Multiline Terminal ..................... 8-19
Section 7
Adjusting the LCD on a Multiline Terminal ................................................ 8-20
Section 8
Installing Line Cards and Plastic Panels ................................................... 8-21
8.1
Installing the Line Card and Plastic Panel ................................................. 8-21
8.2
Removing the Plastic Panel ...................................................................... 8-22
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 9
Installing a Directory Card on a Multiline Terminal .................................. 8-22
Section 10
Installing a Button Set on a Multiline Terminal ......................................... 8-24
Section 11
Adjusting the Height on a Multiline Terminal ............................................ 8-25
Section 12
Removing or Installing the Base Plate on a Multiline Terminal ............... 8-26
Section 13
12.1
Removing the Base Plate ......................................................................... 8-26
12.2
Installing the Base Plate ........................................................................... 8-27
Wall Mounting Multiline Terminals ............................................................. 8-28
13.1
13.2
Wall Mounting a Multiline Terminal using the Base Plate ........................ 8-28
13.1.1
Adjusting the Hanger Hook ......................................................................... 8-28
13.1.2
Wall Mounting the Telephone ...................................................................... 8-29
13.1.3
Removing the Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal from the Base Plate .......... 8-32
13.1.4
Wall Mounting the Base Plate on a Switch Box ........................................... 8-32
Wall Mounting a Multiline Terminal using the Wall Mount Unit
(WM-R Unit) ............................................................................................. 8-34
13.2.1
Removing the Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal from the
Wall Mount Unit ........................................................................................... 8-36
13.2.2
Mounting the Wall Mount Unit on a Switch Box ........................................... 8-37
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8-1
DTR-2DT-1 TEL ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8-2
DTR-4D-1 TEL ........................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-3
DTH-8-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ................................................................................. 8-4
Figure 8-4
DTH-8D-1 TEL Multiline Terminal .............................................................................. 8-5
Figure 8-5
DTH-16-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ............................................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-6
DTH-16D-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ............................................................................ 8-7
Figure 8-7
DTH-16(BL)-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ........................................................................ 8-8
Figure 8-8
DTH-16LD-1 TEL Multiline Terminal .......................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-9
DTH-32D-1 TEL Multiline Terminal .......................................................................... 8-10
Figure 8-10
ITH-8D-2/3 TEL Multiline Terminal ........................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-11
ITH-16D-2/3 TEL Multiline Terminal ......................................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-12
DCR-60-1 Console ................................................................................................... 8-13
Figure 8-13
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System ........................................................ 8-14
Figure 8-14
Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal .............................................................8-14
Figure 8-15
Plug in AC-R Adapter ...............................................................................................8-15
Figure 8-16
Switch SW2 Position ................................................................................................ 8-16
Figure 8-17
IP Terminal Rear Connector Locations ................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8-18
Typical Network IP Connection ................................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8-19
Connecting the DCR Console to a Multiline Terminal ..............................................8-19
Figure 8-20
Connecting the Line Cord and AC Adapter when Installing a
DCR Attendant Console ........................................................................................... 8-19
Figure 8-21
Attendant Console and Multiline Terminal ............................................................... 8-20
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8-22
Adjusting the LCD on a Multiline Terminal ............................................................... 8-20
Figure 8-23
Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a Multiline Terminal ................................ 8-21
Figure 8-24
Installing Plastic Panel on a DTH/DTR Multiline Terminal ....................................... 8-21
Figure 8-25
Removing the Plastic Panel from the Multiline Terminal .......................................... 8-22
Figure 8-26
Attaching Directory Card to Directory Card Holder .................................................. 8-22
Figure 8-27
Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal ....................................... 8-23
Figure 8-28
Removing the Button Set from a Multiline Terminal ................................................. 8-24
Figure 8-29
Inserting a New Button Set into a Multiline Terminal ............................................... 8-24
Figure 8-30
Raising the Height on the DTH/DTR/ITH Multiline Terminal .................................... 8-25
Figure 8-31
Lowering the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal .................................................. 8-25
Figure 8-32
Removing Base Plate ............................................................................................... 8-26
Figure 8-33
Installing Base Plate ................................................................................................. 8-27
Figure 8-34
Removing the Hanger Hook on a Multiline Terminal ................................................ 8-28
Figure 8-35
Sliding the Hanger Hook into Position ...................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8-36
Removing the Cutout ............................................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-37
Bundling the Line Cord ............................................................................................. 8-29
Figure 8-38
Wall Mounting the Base Plate .................................................................................. 8-30
Figure 8-39
Installing the Multiline Terminal ................................................................................ 8-30
Figure 8-40
Plugging in Line Cord ............................................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8-41
Hiding Excess Cord .................................................................................................. 8-31
Figure 8-42
Removing the Multiline Terminal .............................................................................. 8-32
Figure 8-43
Wall Mounting Base Plate on Switch Box ................................................................ 8-32
Figure 8-44
Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal .............................................................................. 8-33
Figure 8-45
Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall ................................................................ 8-34
Figure 8-46
Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the Wall Mount Unit ........................................... 8-35
Figure 8-47
Plugging in Line Cord ............................................................................................... 8-35
Figure 8-48
Hiding Excess Cord Behind the Wall Mount Unit ..................................................... 8-36
Figure 8-49
Removing Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mount Unit ........................................... 8-36
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8-50
Mounting Wall Mount Unit on the Switch Box .......................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-51
Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal .............................................................................. 8-37
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
v
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
List of Figures
Installing Electra Elite IPK
Multiline Terminals
Chapter 8
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Electra Elite IPK system supports several different Electra Elite IPK and Electra
Elite Multiline Terminals and an Attendant Console. This chapter describes each
terminal and the console and provides instructions for attaching the terminals to the
system and for wall mounting.
SECTION 2
MULTILINE TERMINALS
2.1
DTR-2DT-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has two programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), nine function keys, a built-in speakerphone, and a
large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages. This terminal is available
in black or white.
This terminal has a built-in data port that is available for analog devices. Each
terminal requires a digital port.
The DTR-2DT-1 TEL does not support adapters.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTR-2DT-1 TELs can be installed in the Basic Port
Package. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTR-2DT-1 TELs can be installed in the Expanded Port
Package. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8-1 DTR-2DT-1 TEL
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-2
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
DTR-4D-1 TEL
This digital display Multiline Terminal has four multifunction keys, four
programmable line keys (each with a 2-color LED), nine function keys, two
volume keys, four softkeys a built-in speakerphone, and a large LED to
indicate incoming calls and messages. This terminal is available in black only.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTR-4D-1 TELs can be installed in the Basic Port Package.
The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that can be
installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTR-4D-1 TELs can be installed in the Expanded Port
Package. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-2 DTR-4D-1 TEL
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
DTH-8-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has eight programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with AD(A)-R,
AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R, CT(U)-R, or HF-R, Unit. This terminal is
available in black or white.
The DTR-8-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-8-1 TEL and can also be used with the
Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTH-8-1/DTR-8-1 TELs can be installed in the Electra Elite
IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTH-8-1/DTR-8-1 TELs can be installed in the Electra Elite
IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-3 DTH-8-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-4
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
DTH-8D-1 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has eight programmable line keys (each with
the 2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a Large LED to
indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with AD(A)-R,
AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R, CT(U)-R, HF-R, or IP-R(IPK) Unit. This terminal
is available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
The DTR-8D-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-8D-1 TEL and can also be used with
the Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTH-8D-2/DTR-8D-1 TELs can be installed in the Electra
Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTH-8D-1/DTR-8D-1 TELs can be installed in the Electra
Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-4 DTH-8D-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
DTH-16-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with AD(A)-R,
AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R, CT(U)-R, or HF-R, Unit. This terminal is
available in black or white.
The DTR-16-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-16-1 TEL and can also be used with
the Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTH-16-1/DTR-16-1 TELs can be installed in the Electra
Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTH-16-1/DTR-16-1 TELs can be installed in the Electra
Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-5 DTH-16-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-6
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
DTH-16D-1 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a
2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R,
AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R, CT(U)-R, HF-R, or IP-R (IPK) Unit. This terminal is
available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
The DTR-16D-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-16D-1 TEL and can also be used
with the Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTH-16D-1/DTR-16D-1 TELs can be installed in an Electra
Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTH-16D-1/DTR-16D-1 TELs can be installed in an
Electra Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-6 DTH-16D-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.7
DTH-16(BL)-1 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a
2-color LED), a built-in half-duplex speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with AD(A)-R,
AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R, CT(U)-R, HF-R, or IP-R (IPK) Unit. This terminal
is available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Back-Lighted (BL)
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and four softkeys.
The DTR-16(BL)-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-16(BL)-1 TEL and can also be
used with the Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTH-16(BL)-1/DTR-16(BL)-1 TELs can be installed in an
Electra Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTH-16(BL)-1/DTR-16(BL)-1 TELs can be installed in an
Electra Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-7 DTH-16(BL)-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-8
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.8
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys, a built-in
speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED to indicate incoming calls and
messages, and compatibility with AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R,
CT(U)-R, HF-R or IP-R (IPK) Unit. This terminal is available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
This terminal is equipped with two additional 8-character LCDs. These can be
programmed to identify the line key designations.
The DTR-16LD-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-16LD-1 TEL and can also be used
with the Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTH-16LD-1/DTR-16LD-1 TELs can be installed in an
Electra Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTH-16LD-1/DTR-16LD-1 TELs can be installed in an
Electra Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-8 DTH-16LD-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.9
DTH-32D-1 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a
2-color LED), 16 one-touch keys, a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a
large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with
AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R, CT(U)-R, HF-R, or IP-R (IPK) Unit.
This terminal is available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
System software can be changed so this Multiline Terminal can have 24
programmable line keys and eight one-touch keys.
The DTR-32D-1 TEL is similar to the DTH-32D-1 TEL and can also be used
with the Electra Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTH-32D-1/DTR-32D-1 TELs can be installed in an Electra
Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTH-32D-1/DTR-32D-1 TELs can be installed in an
Electra Elite IPK system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 8-9 DTH-32D-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 10
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.10
ITH-8D-2/3 TEL
This IP Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a 2-color
LED), 16 one-touch keys, a built-in full-duplex speakerphone, headset jack, a
large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with
AD(A)-2R or PS(A)-R Unit. This terminal is available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 24 ITH-8D-2/3 TELs can be installed in an Electra Elite IPK
system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK/IP Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 112 ITH-8D-2/3 TELs can be installed in an Electra Elite IPK
system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK/IP Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 120.
ACR or in-line power is required.
Some headsets introduce hum or echo on IP terminals.
Figure 8-10 ITH-8D-2/3 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.11
ITH-16D-2/3 TEL
This IP Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a 2-color
LED), 16 one-touch keys, a built-in full-duplex speakerphone, headset jack, a
large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with
AD(A)-2R or PS(A)-R Unit. This terminal is available in black or white.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 24 ITH-16D-2/3 TELs can be installed in an Electra Elite IPK
system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK/IP Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 112 ITH-16D-2/3 TELs can be installed in an Electra Elite IPK
system. The combined total of all Electra Elite IPK/IP Multiline Terminals that
can be installed is 120.
ACR or in-line power is required.
Some headsets introduce hum or echo on IP terminals.
Figure 8-11 ITH-16D-2/3 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 12
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.12
DCR-60-1 Console
The Attendant Console has 60 programmable line keys (each with a 2-color
LED). These 60 line keys can be programmed as 48 Direct Station Selection
keys, 12 function keys, or as outside line keys. An AC adapter is required and
provided with the Attendant Console.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of four DCR-60-1 Consoles can be installed in any Electra Elite
IPK system. An Attendant Position can have four associated DCR-60-1
Consoles.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of four DCR-60-1 Consoles can be installed in any Electra Elite
IPK system. An Attendant Position can have four associated DCR-60-1
Consoles.
Figure 8-12 DCR-60-1 Console
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
CONNECTING A MULTILINE TERMINAL TO THE SYSTEM
This instruction applies to all DTH/DTR/IP Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
except DTR-2DT-1 TEL.
1.
Plug the telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of the Multiline
Terminal. The handset is also attached to the bottom side of the Multiline
Terminal.
Figure 8-13 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System
2.
Lead the telephone and handset cords through the appropriate grooves.
Figure 8-14 Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 14
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
APPLYING POWER TO IP TERMINALS
The ITH-8D/16D-2 terminals support two different methods to power the terminal:
H
AC-R
Plug the optional AC-R AC Adapter input Jack in the terminal base unit, and
plug the 2-prong wall plug of the AC Adapter in a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
Figure 8-15 Plug in AC-R Adapter
H
POE (Power Over Ethernet)
Power Over Ethernet (sometimes called In-Line Power) is a LAN technology
that allows standard 10/100 Base-T data cables to pass electrical current from a
power source to a requesting end device.
Refer to Table 8-1 Power Configuration Switch Settings and Figure 8-16 Switch
SW2 Position to allow different power sources for the ITH-8D/16D-2 terminals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Power Configuration Switch Settings
Table 8-1 Power Configuration Switch Settings
Power Method
Equipment Used
AC Adapter
NEC AC-R AC Adapter (27V 750 mA)
NEC POE
Equipment
NEC POWER PATCH PANEL
(SN1604 PWRMS)
NEC BF200/24 POE Switching Hub
Cisco Equipment
(CDP)
Cisco Catalyst PRW series
CISCO POWERED PATCH PANEL
Switch SW2
Position
1
Default
2
Figure 8-16 Switch SW2 Position
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 16
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 5
CONNECTING AN IP MULTILINE TERMINAL TO THE NETWORK AND PC
These instructions for connecting an IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC
apply to ITH-8D/16D-2 Multiline Terminals. Refer to Figure 8-17 IP Terminal Rear
Connector Locations.
1.
Connect the LAN Network 10/100 Base-T cable to the LAN (=) connector.
2.
The IP terminal has a switching HUB to connect a PC to the LAN Network.
Connect the 10/100 Base-T/TX straight cable used for this connection to the
PC(x) connector and to the PC.
REARVIEW
VIEW
REAR
totoLAN
LAN
totoPC
PC
The
PC
PCconnector
connectorononthethe
IPIP
terminal
terminal
is isexclusively
exclusively
forfora PC
a PCconnection,
connection,
not
not
a second
a second
IPIP
Note:
Note:The
terminal.
terminal.
Figure 001 Rear Connector Locations of IP terminal
Figure 8-17 IP Terminal Rear Connector Locations
Refer to Figure 8-18 Typical Network IP Connection.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
IP Subscriber
LAN
Circuit
PC
Main Unit
AC-R Unit
AC Adapter input jack
Not Required when POE or
In-Line Power is available.
Figure 8-18 Typical Network IP Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 18
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 6
CONNECTING THE ATTENDANT CONSOLE TO A MULTILINE TERMINAL
An Attendant DCR-60-1 Console can be attached to a Multiline Terminal using the
following procedure.
1.
Place the Multiline Terminal and the Attendant Console face down.
2.
Using the joining plate provided with the Attendant Console, attach the plate to
the Multiline Terminal and the Attendant Console.
Figure 8-19 Connecting the DCR Console to a Multiline Terminal
3.
Connect the line cord and the AC adapter to the indicated locations on the
bottom of the Attendant Console.
Line Cord Jack
AC Adapter Plug
Figure 8-20 Connecting the Line Cord and AC Adapter when Installing a
DCR Attendant Console
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
When the Attendant Console and the Multiline Terminal are properly connected,
they sit side-by-side as shown in Figure 8-21 Attendant Console and Multiline
Terminal.
Use only the AC adapter, provided with the Attendant Console. Using a different
AC adapter may cause problems. Check that the supplied voltage matches that
specified for the adapter and plug it in an outlet.
Figure 8-21 Attendant Console and Multiline Terminal
SECTION 7
ADJUSTING THE LCD ON A MULTILINE TERMINAL
Electra Elite IPK display Multiline Terminals have an adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD). The LCD can be adjusted by pulling up or pushing down as desired.
Figure 8-22 Adjusting the LCD on a Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 20
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 8
INSTALLING LINE CARDS AND PLASTIC PANELS
8.1
Installing the Line Card and Plastic Panel
Line key designations are entered on the line card that is then placed on the
telephone to provide a quick reference of key designations. The line cards
can be changed as necessary. The plastic panel is placed on top of the line
card to hold it in place.
1.
Place the line card over the keys on the Multiline Terminal.
When replacing an existing plastic panel or line card refer to
paragraph 8.2 Removing the Plastic Panel.
Line Card
Multiline Terminal
Figure 8-23 Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a Multiline Terminal
2.
Place the plastic panel over the line card and push the corners of the
plastic panel until they click into place.
Plastic Panel
Multiline Terminal
Figure 8-24 Installing Plastic Panel on a DTH/DTR Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.2
Removing the Plastic Panel
Lift up on the plastic panel as illustrated in Figure 8-25 Removing the Plastic
Panel from the Multiline Terminal and remove it from the telephone.
Figure 8-25 Removing the Plastic Panel from the Multiline Terminal
SECTION 9
INSTALLING A DIRECTORY CARD ON A MULTILINE TERMINAL
A directory card can be attached to DTH/DTR/ITH Multiline Terminals. The directory
card can be used to record often dialed numbers or other important information.
1.
After recording the information on the lined insert, reinsert it between the plastic
panels of the directory card. Attach the directory card to the directory card
holder as illustrated in Figure 8-26 Attaching Directory Card to Directory Card
Holder. Note that the open end slides into the directory card holder.
Directory Card
Directory Card
Holder
Figure 8-26 Attaching Directory Card to Directory Card Holder
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 22
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Locate the two grooves on the top of the telephone as illustrated in Figure 8-27
Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal. Push the directory
card holder into the grooves on the Multiline Terminal until they snap into place.
To remove the directory card, press the two sides of the directory card holder
inward until the tabs release and pull the holder out of the grooves.
Multiline Terminal
Grooves
Directory Card
Holder
Figure 8-27 Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10
INSTALLING A BUTTON SET ON A MULTILINE TERMINAL
The BS( )-R Unit button set can be installed on a Multiline Terminal to accommodate
French and Spanish languages. The keypad provides the appropriate language
designations.
1.
Remove the plastic cover. (Refer to paragraph 8.2 Removing the Plastic Panel
on page 8-22.)
2.
Pull up on the tab and lift the button pad away from the telephone to remove the
existing button.
Figure 8-28 Removing the Button Set from a Multiline Terminal
3.
Slide the new button set into the grooves located on the inside of the telephone,
then press down on the button set to snap it into place.
Figure 8-29 Inserting a New Button Set into a Multiline Terminal
4.
Insert the line card and plastic panel on the Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 24
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 11
ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT ON A MULTILINE TERMINAL
The base plate on the Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal is hinged to allow the height
of the terminal to be raised or lowered.
1.
Grasp in the middle of the hollow spaces at the top and pull up until the retaining
tabs click to raise the base plate. Refer to Figure 8-30 Raising the Height on the
DTH/DTR/ITH Multiline Terminal.
Figure 8-30 Raising the Height on the DTH/DTR/ITH Multiline Terminal
2.
After the height is adjusted, pull the line cord though the groove in the bottom of
the Multiline Terminal and adjust it.
3.
Push on the adjustment tabs on the side of the stand and push downward to
lower the base plate. Refer to Figure 8-31 Lowering the Base Plate on the
Multiline Terminal.
Figure 8-31 Lowering the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 12
REMOVING OR INSTALLING THE BASE PLATE ON A MULTILINE TERMINAL
DTH/DTR/ITH Multiline Terminals come equipped with a base cover.
12.1
Removing the Base Plate
1.
Extend the base plate to maximum height.
2.
Press the tabs as illustrated in Figure 8-32 Removing Base Plate, and
slide the base cover in the direction of the arrows until it clicks.
Figure 8-32 Removing Base Plate
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 26
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
12.2
Installing the Base Plate
1.
Line up the four tabs on the extended base cover with corresponding
slots on the Multiline Terminal as illustrated in Figure 8-33 Installing Base
Plate.
2.
Slide the cover in the direction of the arrows until it clicks in place.
Figure 8-33 Installing Base Plate
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 13
WALL MOUNTING MULTILINE TERMINALS
You can wall mount a DTH/DTR/IP connection Multiline Terminal (except for
DTR-2D-1 TEL) using the base cover or an optional wall mount unit. A wall mount
unit must be used if adapters are installed on the Multiline Terminal.
13.1
Wall Mounting a Multiline Terminal using the Base Plate
13.1.1
Adjusting the Hanger Hook
1.
Remove the hook from the unit.
Hanger Hook
Figure 8-34 Removing the Hanger Hook on a Multiline Terminal
2.
Turn the hook with the tab toward the top.
3.
Slide the hook until it glides into position forming the hanger
hook for the handset.
Figure 8-35 Sliding the Hanger Hook into Position
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 28
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
13.1.2
Wall Mounting the Telephone
1.
Extend and remove the base cover from the telephone. Refer
to Section 12 Removing or Installing the Base Plate on a
Multiline Terminal.
2.
Remove cutout shown in Figure 8-36 Removing the Cutout.
Figure 8-36 Removing the Cutout
3.
Plug line cord in the wall receptacle. Leave about 8 inches of
cord and bundle the rest as shown in Figure 8-37 Bundling the
Line Cord.
Figure 8-37 Bundling the Line Cord
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Turn the base cover upside down, feed the line cord through
the cutout and attach the cover to the wall using six screws as
shown in Figure 8-38 Wall Mounting the Base Plate.
Figure 8-38 Wall Mounting the Base Plate
5.
Install the Multiline Terminal over the four tabs on the base
cover, and push down until it clicks in place.
Figure 8-39 Installing the Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 30
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
Plug the line cord into the Multiline Terminal as illustrated in
Figure 8-40 Plugging in Line Cord.
Figure 8-40 Plugging in Line Cord
7.
Push spare line cord behind the Multiline Terminal as shown in
Figure 8-41 Hiding Excess Cord.
Line Cord
Figure 8-41 Hiding Excess Cord
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
13.1.3
Removing the Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal from the Base Plate
To remove the Multiline Terminal, press the tabs at the bottom as
shown in Figure 8-42 Removing the Multiline Terminal, and push up
on the Telephone until it comes loose.
Figure 8-42 Removing the Multiline Terminal
13.1.4
Wall Mounting the Base Plate on a Switch Box
1.
Locate the screw holes on the base cover and hang the cover
over the screws on the switch box as illustrated in Figure 8-43
Wall Mounting Base Plate on Switch Box.
Figure 8-43 Wall Mounting Base Plate on Switch Box
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 32
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Hang the Multiline Terminal on the base cover.
Figure 8-44 Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal
Because of strength variation in switch boxes, this method is
not recommended.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
13.2
Wall Mounting a Multiline Terminal using the Wall Mount Unit
(WM-R Unit)
The Wall Mount Unit is used to attach any DTH/DTR/IP connection Multiline
Terminal (except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL) to the wall. This unit connects to the
back side of the telephone.
When adapters are used, the Multiline Terminal must be installed on the wall
using the WM-R Unit.
1.
Plug line cord in the wall receptacle. Leave about 8 inches of cord and
bundle the rest.
2.
Feed the line cord through the opening in the wall mount unit as
illustrated in Figure 8-45 Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall.
3.
Attach the WM-R Unit using six screws.
Figure 8-45 Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall
4.
Install the Multiline Terminal over the four tabs on the base cover, and
push down until it clicks in place as illustrated in Figure 8-46 Attaching
the Multiline Terminal to the Wall Mount Unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 34
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8-46 Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the Wall Mount Unit
5.
Plug the line cord into the Multiline Terminal as illustrated in
Figure 8-47 Plugging in Line Cord.
Figure 8-47 Plugging in Line Cord
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
Push spare line cord behind the Multiline Terminal as shown in
Figure 8-48 Hiding Excess Cord Behind the Wall Mount Unit.
Figure 8-48 Hiding Excess Cord Behind the Wall Mount Unit
13.2.1
Removing the Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mount
Unit
To remove the Multiline Terminal, press the tabs at the bottom as
shown in Figure 8-49 Removing Multiline Terminal from the Wall
Mount Unit, and push up on the Multiline Terminal until it comes
loose.
Figure 8-49 Removing Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mount Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 36
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
13.2.2
Mounting the Wall Mount Unit on a Switch Box
1.
Locate the screw holes on the wall mount unit and hang the
cover over the screws on the switch box as illustrated in Figure
8-50 Mounting Wall Mount Unit on the Switch Box.
This method is not recommended because of varied strength of
switch boxes.
Figure 8-50 Mounting Wall Mount Unit on the Switch Box
2.
Hang the Multiline Terminal on the base cover.
Figure 8-51 Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
8 - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 38
Installing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ..................................................................................... 9-1
Section 2
Preparing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation...................................................................................... 9-1
Section 3
Installing Adapters ....................................................................................... 9-4
3.1
AC-R Unit (AC Adapter) ............................................................................ 9-4
3.1.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Connecting the AC-R Unit .................................................................. 9-4
AD(A)-R/AD(A)-2R Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter) .................................. 9-6
3.2.1
Connecting Cables to the AD(A)-R Unit ............................................. 9-7
3.2.2
Switch Settings ................................................................................. 9-11
3.2.3
Installing the AD(A)-R Unit on a Multiline Terminal .......................... 9-12
AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit (Port Adapters) ............................................ 9-14
3.3.1
Switch Settings ................................................................................. 9-14
3.3.2
Installing AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit on a Multiline Terminal.............. 9-15
CT(A)-R Unit (Computer Telephony Adapter)......................................... 9-18
3.4.1
Installing the CT(A)-R Unit................................................................ 9-19
3.4.2
Connecting the CT(A)-R Unit to the PC............................................ 9-21
3.4.3
Installing the Optional Headset......................................................... 9-21
3.4.4
Installing the Driver on the PC .......................................................... 9-22
CT(U)-R Unit (Computer Telephony Adapter)......................................... 9-22
3.5.1
Installing the CT(U)-R Unit................................................................ 9-23
3.5.2
Connecting the CT(U)-R Unit to the PC............................................ 9-25
3.5.3
Installing the Optional Headset......................................................... 9-25
3.5.4
Installing the Driver on the PC .......................................................... 9-25
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.6
3.7
3.8
HF-R Unit (Handsfree Unit) ..................................................................... 9-26
3.6.1
Installing an HF-R Unit on any DTR/DTH Multiline Terminal
(except DTR-2DT-1 and ITH-8D/16D-2............................................. 9-26
3.6.2
Installing the External Microphone ................................................... 9-27
IP-R(IPK) Unit.......................................................................................... 9-28
3.7.1
IP-R(IPK) Unit Specifications............................................................ 9-28
3.7.2
Applying Power to the IP-R(IPK) Unit............................................... 9-29
3.7.3
Installing the IP-R(IPK) Unit on the Electra Elite IPK Terminal ......... 9-30
3.7.4
Connection Example ........................................................................ 9-33
3.7.5
Quick Setup and Configuration Procedures ..................................... 9-33
Dterm Voice Security Recorder ................................................................ 9-36
3.8.1
Description........................................................................................ 9-36
3.8.2
Connection Configuration ................................................................. 9-36
3.8.3
Connectors ....................................................................................... 9-37
3.8.4
Requirements for Installation............................................................ 9-37
3.8.5
Installation Procedures for Windows 98 or ME................................. 9-38
3.8.6
Installation Procedures for Windows 2000 or XP ............................. 9-38
3.8.7
VSR Application Software ................................................................ 9-40
3.8.8
VRS User Interface Tab Options ...................................................... 9-41
3.8.9
VSR Playback Tab ........................................................................... 9-41
3.8.10 VRS Record Tab .............................................................................. 9-44
3.8.11 About Tab ......................................................................................... 9-45
3.8.12 Options Tab ...................................................................................... 9-46
3.8.13 File Management Tab....................................................................... 9-48
3.8.14 Custom Program Settings ................................................................ 9-48
3.9
Installing Add on Module (ADM).............................................................. 9-51
3.9.1
Connecting the Interface Unit: .......................................................... 9-51
3.9.2
Wall Mounting ADM and Multiline Terminal...................................... 9-54
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
NEC Conference Max™.......................................................................... 9-56
3.10.1 Description........................................................................................ 9-56
3.10.2 Installation......................................................................................... 9-57
3.10.3 Keypad Functions ............................................................................ 9-57
3.10.4 Programming Options....................................................................... 9-58
3.10.5 Compliance....................................................................................... 9-59
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
List of Figures and Tables
Chapter 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-1
Raising the Base Plate ............................................................................................... 9-1
Figure 9-2
Removing the Multiline Terminal Base Plate .............................................................. 9-2
Figure 9-3
Modifying Base Plate for Adapter Installation ............................................................. 9-3
Figure 9-4
AC-R Unit (AC Adapter) ............................................................................................. 9-4
Figure 9-5
Connecting the AC Adapter to an Installed Adapter ................................................... 9-5
Figure 9-6
AD(A)-R/AD(A)-2R Unit .............................................................................................. 9-6
Figure 9-7
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a Recording Device using an
AD(A)-R Unit (Example) ............................................................................................. 9-6
Figure 9-8
AD(A)-R Unit Connection without Pause Control ....................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-9
AD(A)-R Unit Connection with Pause Control ............................................................ 9-7
Figure 9-10
Removing AD(A)-R Unit Cover ................................................................................... 9-8
Figure 9-11
Attaching Cables to the AD(A)-R Unit ........................................................................ 9-8
Table 9-1
AD(A)-R Unit Cable Connections ............................................................................... 9-9
Figure 9-12
AD(A)-R Unit Cable Access Port .............................................................................. 9-11
Figure 9-13
AD(A)-R Switch Default Settings .............................................................................. 9-11
Table 9-2
AD(A)-R Unit Switch Settings ...................................................................................9-12
Figure 9-14
Attaching the AD(A)-R Unit to the Multiline Terminal ............................................... 9-13
Figure 9-15
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to an Analog Telephone using an
AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit (Example) ..................................................................... 9-14
Figure 9-16
AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit Switches ....................................................................... 9-14
Table 9-3
AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit Switch Settings ....................................................................9-15
Figure 9-17
Attaching the AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Units to the Multiline Terminal ...............................9-16
Figure 9-18
Installing the Ferrite Core on the AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Units ........................................ 9-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
v
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-19
CT(A)-R Unit ............................................................................................................ 9-18
Figure 9-20
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a PC using a CT(A)-R Unit (Example) .............. 9-18
Figure 9-21
Attaching the CT(A)-R Unit to the Terminal ............................................................. 9-20
Figure 9-22
Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CT(A)-R Unit ............................................... 9-21
Figure 9-23
Attaching the Headset to the Multiline Terminal ....................................................... 9-21
Figure 9-24
CT(U)-R Unit ............................................................................................................ 9-23
Figure 9-25
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a PC using a CT(U)-R Unit (Example) .............. 9-23
Figure 9-26
Attaching the CT(U)-R Unit to the Multiline Terminal ............................................... 9-24
Figure 9-27
Connecting the USB Cable to the CT(U)-R Unit ...................................................... 9-25
Figure 9-28
Attaching the HF-R Unit to the Multiline Terminal .................................................... 9-26
Figure 9-29
Microphone with Mute .............................................................................................. 9-27
Table 9-4
IP-R(IPK) Unit Specifications ................................................................................... 9-28
Figure 9-30
IP Terminal Rear Connector Locations .................................................................... 9-29
Figure 9-31
IP-R(IPK) Unit SW1 Setting for Power Source ........................................................ 9-29
Table 9-5
Switch SW1 Setting for Power Configuration ........................................................... 9-30
Figure 9-32
Raising the Base Plate ............................................................................................. 9-30
Figure 9-33
Removing the Base Plate ......................................................................................... 9-31
Figure 9-34
Removing Cutouts .................................................................................................... 9-31
Figure 9-35
Plugging in the IP-R(IPK) Unit .................................................................................. 9-32
Figure 9-36
Attaching the Base Plate .......................................................................................... 9-32
Figure 9-37
Connection Example ................................................................................................ 9-33
Figure 9-38
Dterm Voice Security Recorder ................................................................................. 9-36
Figure 9-39
VSR Connection Configuration ................................................................................ 9-37
Figure 9-40
Wizard Welcome Screen .......................................................................................... 9-38
Figure 9-41
Search and Installation Options ............................................................................... 9-39
Figure 9-42
Software Not Compatible Warning ........................................................................... 9-39
Figure 9-43
Hardware Update Completed ................................................................................... 9-40
Figure 9-44
VSR User Interface Tab Options .............................................................................. 9-41
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
List of Figures and Tables
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-45
VSR Playback Tab ................................................................................................... 9-42
Figure 9-46
Caller ID or Comment Editor .................................................................................... 9-43
Figure 9-47
View Levels and Control Recording ......................................................................... 9-44
Figure 9-48
VRS About Tab ........................................................................................................ 9-45
Figure 9-49
Select VSR Setup Options ....................................................................................... 9-46
Figure 9-50
Manage Calls at Completion .................................................................................... 9-47
Figure 9-51
File Management Tab ..............................................................................................9-48
Figure 9-52
Comvurgent Options for Additional Adjustments ...................................................... 9-49
Figure 9-53
Customizing Application to Meet Requirements ....................................................... 9-50
Figure 9-54
ADM Interface Unit ................................................................................................... 9-51
Table 9-6
DSW1 Switch Positions ............................................................................................ 9-52
Figure 9-55
ADM and Multiline Terminal with Base Covers Removed ........................................ 9-53
Figure 9-56
Installing the Connector Plate .................................................................................. 9-54
Figure 9-57
Installing Base Units on the Wall .............................................................................. 9-55
Figure 9-58
NEC Conference Max™ ........................................................................................... 9-56
Table 9-7
Keypad Functions .....................................................................................................9-57
Table 9-8
Programming Options ..............................................................................................9-58
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
vii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
List of Figures and Tables
Installing Electra Elite IPK
Optional Terminal Equipment
Chapter 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Electra Elite IPK system provides several adapters that allow peripheral
equipment to be attached to the Multiline Terminals. This optional equipment
enhances the Electra Elite IPK system and can be purchased separately as a
customer business grows. Each Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal (except
DTR-2DT-1) can have up to two adapters installed at the same time. Only one
IP-R(IPK) Unit or IPW-2U Unit is allowed per terminal. This chapter describes each
adapter and provides applicable installation instructions.
SECTION 2
PREPARING ELECTRA ELITE IPK MULTILINE TERMINAL FOR ADAPTER
INSTALLATION
To prepare the Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal for adapter installation:
1.
Unplug the telephone line from the terminal.
2.
Grasp in the middle of the hollow spaces at the top and pull up until the retaining
tabs click to raise the base plate. Refer to Figure 9-1 Raising the Base Plate.
Figure 9-1 Raising the Base Plate
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Press down on the tabs indicated in Figure 9-2 Removing the Multiline Terminal
Base Plate, and push forward on the base plate to remove it.
Figure 9-2 Removing the Multiline Terminal Base Plate
4.
When an adapter is installed for the first time, the base cover on the Multiline
Terminal must be modified. Two adapters can be installed in the Multiline
Terminal, and two separate cutouts are provided. Remove the applicable
cutout/cutouts on the bottom of the base plate. When only one adapter is being
installed and it needs an AC-R Unit for power, remove only the right cutout as
shown in Figure 9-3 Modifying Base Plate for Adapter Installation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9-2
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Remove for Cable
Connector
Remove for AC
Adapter Plug
Remove for Adapter
Figure 9-3 Modifying Base Plate for Adapter Installation
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
INSTALLING ADAPTERS
3.1
AC-R Unit (AC Adapter)
This unit shown on Figure 9-4 AC-R Unit (AC Adapter) provides power to
ancillary devices or to an Attendant Console. The AC-R Unit must be
connected to some adapters that are installed on a Multiline Terminal. When
more than one adapter is installed on a Multiline Terminal, only one AC-R Unit
is necessary.
Figure 9-4 AC-R Unit (AC Adapter)
The power requirements for the AC-R Unit are:
J
J
J
3.1.1
Input: 110~240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 45 VA
Output: 27 Vdc, 750 mA
⊕
Polarity:
Connecting the AC-R Unit
1.
Unplug the AC-R Unit from the AC outlet.
Failing to do this can damage the unit and/or the
Multiline Terminal.
2.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation on page 9-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9-4
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
The Plug Puller shown in Figure 9-4 AC-R Unit (AC Adapter) is
a hollow cylindrical sleeve with a post and a circular rim on the
base. The plug of the adapter is inserted in this hole, and the
sleeve is pulled over the back of the plug to seat the post that
can then be used to unplug the adapter.
4.
Locate the plug on the ancillary device that is connected to the
bottom of the Multiline Terminal and plug in the AC Adapter.
Figure 9-5 Connecting the AC Adapter to an Installed Adapter
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
AD(A)-R/AD(A)-2R Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter)
This Ancillary Device Adapter, shown on Figure 9-6 AD(A)-R/AD(A)-2R Unit,
allows connection of a tape recorder to all Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
except the DTR-2DT-1. The AD(A)-2R is used with ITH-8D/16D-2 Multiline
Terminals.
Figure 9-6 AD(A)-R/AD(A)-2R Unit
Figure 9-7 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a Recording Device using an
AD(A)-R Unit (Example) illustrates how the AD(A)-R Unit is connected to the
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU and to the recording device.
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal + AD(A)-R Unit
ESI
ETU
Line Cord
(2-line)
Figure 9-7
Mini-Plug
Mini-Plug
Connection Cord
Recording
Device
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a Recording Device using
an AD(A)-R Unit (Example)
When installing the AD(A)-R Unit, connect the cables to the AD(A)-R Unit, set
the dip switches, and then install the AD(A)-R Unit on the Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9-6
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.1
Connecting Cables to the AD(A)-R Unit
The first step in installing the AD(A)-R Unit is to connect the cables
between the recording device and the AD(A)-R Unit.
Cable terminal connectors are located on the side of the AD(A)-R
Unit. Cables should be connected on this unit before installing the
unit on the Multiline Terminal.
Cables can be connected to determine whether or not pause control
is provided for the recording.
AD(A)-R Unit
Recording
Device
Mini-Plug
Mini-Plug
Connection Cord
Earphone
CN2
Figure 9-8 AD(A)-R Unit Connection without Pause Control
Remote
Mini-Plug
Mini-Plug
Connection Cord
T6 (Shielded Wire)
AD(A)-R Unit
T7 (Wire)
Recording
Device
Mini-Plug
Mini-Plug
Connection Cord
Line In
CN2
Figure 9-9 AD(A)-R Unit Connection with Pause Control
To connect the cables:
1.
Cut off the plug on one end of the cable.
2.
Remove the screw as illustrated in Figure 9-10 Removing
AD(A)-R Unit Cover and open the unit cover.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Remove Screw
Figure 9-10 Removing AD(A)-R Unit Cover
3.
Locate the adapter terminals on the unit.
4.
Remove the cap on the adapter terminal to expose the metal
receptacle. Push the cable in the applicable receptacle, and
replace the cap. Line up the slot on the cap with the slot on the
metal receptacle to ensure proper contact. Refer to Figure 9-11
Attaching Cables to the AD(A)-R Unit.
Attach the cables to the AD(A)-R Unit according to Table 9-1
AD(A)-R Unit Cable Connections.
Figure 9-11 Attaching Cables to the AD(A)-R Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
9-8
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 9-1 AD(A)-R Unit Cable Connections
Terminal
Number
Cables to Connect
Terminal Specifications
When warning tone is not being
sent from the recorder, connect wire
pair input from tone generator to
T1:T2. The warning tones from the
generator are sent to T1:T2 on a
dedicated wire pair while the
speech path is sent from the
AD(A)-R on T3:T4 over a separate
wire pair to the recorder.
Input Terminal: T1 and T2 are enabled
for tone generating device when
switches SW1-3 and SW1-4 are OFF.
When switches SW1- 3 and SW1-4 are
ON, a humming sound may be recorded
due to impedance mismatch.
Input Impedance on T1 and T2: 100K Ω
Input Level on T1 and T2: –15 dB ~ 40
dB
T3:T4
Connect recorder device wire pair
speech input to T3:T4.
When the recorder used supplies a
warning tone, this tone may also be
sent over the T3:T4 wire pair back
to the terminal.
Input/Output Terminal:
Refer to dip switch settings in Table 9-2
AD(A)-R Unit Switch Settings.
T5
Connect the bare end of the control
cable.
When a Multiline Terminal is idle, this
contact is closed. When the Multiline
Terminal goes off-hook (using the
handset, headset, or speakerphone),
this contact is open.
When recording device owner’s manual
specifies start on open circuit, connect
T5 and T6.
T6
Connect the shielded end of the
control cable.
Provides common connection for
control cable.
T7
Connect the bare end of the control
cable.
When the Multiline Terminal is idle, this
contact is open. When the Multiline
Terminal is busy (using the handset,
headset, or speakerphone), this contact
is closed.
When recording device owner’s manual
specifies start on closed circuit, connect
T6 and T7.
T1
T2
T8
T9
Unused
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 9-1 AD(A)-R Unit Cable Connections (Continued)
Terminal
Number
Cables to Connect
Terminal Specifications
Notes:
When recording in handsfree (half-duplex) mode using the built-in speakerphone, the
record warning tone may not be audible to the far-end party.
The transmit recording level is lower than the receiving voice level for intercom calls;
the transmit recording level for CO calls is normal.
Depending on the recording device(s), separate cables may be required for the
warning tone and speech path. Then connect the warning tone cables to input
terminals T1 and T2 on the AD(A)-R Unit (T3 and T4 are used as the recording device
input).
When remote control of the recorder is necessary, the record start/stop control is
provided by connecting to T5 (or T7) and T6 on the AD(A)-R Unit. (Connecting to T5 or
T7 is determined by the specifications of the recording device.)
When a warning tone is provided from the recording equipment, it should be input via
T3 and T4 on AD(A)-R Unit. Do not use T1 and T2 to input beep tone.
Conversations cannot be recorded from terminals connected to an AP(R)/AP(A)-R
Unit.
Speakerphone calls through the HF-R Unit cannot be recorded.
5.
Insulate the end of the cable that needs to be shielded with
insulating tape.
6.
Feed the installed cable through the cable access port, located
on the back of the unit, as illustrated in Figure 9-12 AD(A)-R
Unit Cable Access Port.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 10
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Cable Access Port
Cable
Figure 9-12 AD(A)-R Unit Cable Access Port
3.2.2
Switch Settings
The AD(A)-R Unit has two switch locations; SW1/SW2 and the DSW
switches. The location of the switches on the AD(A)-R Unit is
illustrated in Figure 9-13 AD(A)-R Switch Default Settings. The dip
switches (DSW) allow a technician to configure the unit for specific
settings.
Figure 9-13 AD(A)-R Switch Default Settings
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To provide control to the recorder or to enable/disable the record
start warning tones, refer to Table 9-2 AD(A)-R Unit Switch Settings.
Table 9-2 AD(A)-R Unit Switch Settings
Switch
Description/Settings
SW1-1
Connects to Multiline Terminal
Connect = Default
SW1-2
Not Used
SW2-1
Sets External Equipment Impedance to 600 Ω
SW2-2
Used for Complex Impedance Devices
(< 30 Ω Input Impedance)
SW1
SW2
DSW 1
Output Hook Signal to External Device
On = Output
Off = No Output (Default)
DSW 2
Record Confirmation Tone
On = Tone On
Off = Tone Off (Default)
Dip
DSW 3
Switches and
(DSW) DSW 4
Use T1/T2
On = Disable (Default)
Off = Enable
DSW 5
Reset Signal Upgrade
On = Normal (Default)
Off = Debugging
Firmware Upgrade
DSW 6~8 On = Firmware Upgrade
Off = Disable (Default)
Do not connect T1 and T2 when DSW switches 3 and 4 are On.
3.2.3
Installing the AD(A)-R Unit on a Multiline Terminal
The AD(A)-R Unit should be installed after the cables have been
connected and the switches set.
1.
If wall mounting the Multiline Terminal, a WM-R Unit must be
used. Refer to Section 13 Wall Mounting Multiline Terminals on
page 8-28.
Unplug the telephone cord (and the AC-R Unit cord if installed)
from the Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 12
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Plug the tabs marked A and B into adapter slots, then snap the
tab on the other end of the adapter into the receptacle marked
C. Refer to Figure 9-14 Attaching the AD(A)-R Unit to the
Multiline Terminal.
Figure 9-14 Attaching the AD(A)-R Unit to the Multiline Terminal
3.
Replace the base plate (or wall mount unit) and attach the line
cord. Refer to Section 3 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the
System on page 8-14.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit (Port Adapters)
The AP(A)-R Unit Analog Port Adapter without Ringer and the AP(R)-R Unit
Analog Port Adapter with Ringer are used to install a Single Line Terminal,
Modem, Credit Card Reader, Wireless Headset, or other compatible analog
device.
The AP(R)-R Unit generates ringing signals and requires an AC-R Unit.
The AP(A)-R Unit and the AP(R)-R Unit can be installed on all Multiline
Terminals except the DTR-2DT-1 and ITH-8D/16D-2.
Figure 9-15 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to an Analog Telephone using an
AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit (Example) illustrates how the AP(A)-R Unit/
AP(R)-R Unit is connected to the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU and to an analog
telephone.
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal + AP(A)-R Unit or AP(R)-R Unit
ESI
ETU
Line Cord (2-line)
Core
Line Cord (2-line)
Analog
Telephone
AC Adapter
(use only with AP(R)-R Unit)
Figure 9-15 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to an Analog Telephone using an
AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit (Example)
3.3.1
Switch Settings
The AP(A)-R Unit and AP(R)-R Unit have three switch locations.
Refer to Table 9-3 AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit Switch Settings for a
description of each switch and an explanation of the settings.
Figure 9-16 AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit Switches
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 14
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 9-3 AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit Switch Settings
Switch
Description/Settings
SW1-1
Connects to Multiline Terminal (Default).
SW1-2
Not Used
SW3-1
Sets impedance to 600 Ω for devices such as
modems or facsimile machines.
SW3-2
Used for complex impedance devices such as
Single Line Telephones.
SW1
SW3
Dip
Switches DSW 1~8 Leave switches at default.
(DSW)
3.3.2
Installing AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit on a Multiline Terminal
The AP(A)-R and AP(R)-R Units should be installed after the switch
settings have been set.
If wall mounting the Multiline Terminal, a WM-R Unit must be
used. Refer to Section 13 Wall Mounting Multiline Terminals on
page 8-28.
1.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation on page 9-1.
2.
Plug the tabs marked A and B into adapter slots, then snap the
tab on the other end of the adapter into the receptacle marked
C. Refer to Figure 9-17 Attaching the AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Units
to the Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-17 Attaching the AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Units to the
Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 16
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Install the ferrite core (provided with the unit) about two inches
from the line cord plug.
2”
AP(A)-R Unit
or
AP(R)-R Unit
Figure 9-18 Installing the Ferrite Core on the AP(A)-R/
AP(R)-R Units
4.
Connect the line cord to the unit, limiting the cable length from
the AP(A)/AP(R)-R Unit to the Single Line Telephone to a
maximum of 50 feet.
5.
If only installing the AP(R)-R Unit, plug the AC Adapter
(AC-R Unit) power cord into the indicated AP(R)-R Unit
receptacle and connect it to a power source. (Refer to
Figure 9-5 Connecting the AC Adapter to an Installed
Adapter on page 9-5.)
Replace the base plate (or wall mount unit) and attach the line
cord. (Refer to Section 3 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the
System on page 8-14.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
CT(A)-R Unit (Computer Telephony Adapter)
The Computer Telephony Adapter, CT(A)-R Unit allows a Multiline Terminal to
be connected to a PC. The PC can perform all Multiline Terminal functions
using a TAPI-compatible application software (Microsoft Telephony
Application Programming Interface).
The Multiline Terminal must be located within five feet (1.5 m) of the PC. An
AC-R Unit is necessary.
This adapter can be installed on any Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal
except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL and ITH-8D/16D-2.
Figure 9-19 CT(A)-R Unit
Figure 9-20 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a PC using a CT(A)-R Unit
(Example) shows how the CT(A)-R Unit is connected to the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
and to the PC. The required AC-R Unit adapter is not shown.
PC
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal + CT(A)-R Unit
ESI
ETU
Line Cord (2-line)
CT(A)-R Unit
RS-232C Cable (Straight)
[CT(A)-R Unit: D-sub9 Male Pin]
Optional Headset
Figure 9-20 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a PC using a CT(A)-R Unit (Example)
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 18
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4.1
Installing the CT(A)-R Unit
The CT(A)-R Unit should be installed before connecting the PC and
before connecting the ESI port to the Multiline Terminal.
1.
2.
If wall mounting the Multiline Terminal, a WM-R Unit must be
used. Refer to Section 13 Wall Mounting Multiline Terminals on
page 8-28.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation on page 9-1.
Plug the tabs marked A and B into adapter slots, then snap the
tab on the other end of the adapter into the receptacle marked
C. Refer to Figure 9-21 Attaching the CT(A)-R Unit to the
Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-21 Attaching the CT(A)-R Unit to the Terminal
3.
Replace the base plate (or wall mount unit) and attach the line
cord. Refer to Section 3 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the
System on page 8-14.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 20
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4.2
Connecting the CT(A)-R Unit to the PC
Connect RS-232C cable from the PC to the CT(A)-R Unit as shown
in Figure 9-22 Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CT(A)-R Unit.
Figure 9-22 Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CT(A)-R Unit
3.4.3
Installing the Optional Headset
Install the headset and anchor it in the cord slot on the Multiline
Terminal as shown in Figure 9-23 Attaching the Headset to the
Multiline Terminal.
Figure 9-23 Attaching the Headset to the Multiline Terminal
Headsets that have open style receivers (i.e., Mirage, Duoset and
Duopro) can cause echo problems on ITH-8D/16D-2 telephones.
The echo suppression and receiver gain of the telephone determines
the severity of the echo when using any headset.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Due to the environment where the telephones or headsets are
located, ambient noise may affect performance. Please contact NEC
for the recommended headset to use with VoIP applications.
3.4.4
Installing the Driver on the PC
Using the download from Web provided with the CT(A)-R Unit install
the driver onto your PC. Refer to the CT(A)-R Unit installation
instructions for installing the driver.
3.5
CT(U)-R Unit (Computer Telephony Adapter)
The CT(U)-R Unit Computer Telephony Adapter allows a Multiline Terminal to
be connected to a PC using the PC USB port.
Connecting using the USB port provides telephony and sound device control.
The general functions of the CT(U)-R Unit include:
J
Telephony Control
The application is based on the Microsoft Telephony Application
Programming Interface (TAPI) and provides call handling on the PC
(e.g., call, answer, hold, transfer, conference, or caller ID).
J
User Interface to Support Dterm Emulation
This interface provides the functions of the Dterm such as normal
telephone indications, LCD, line keys or hookswitch.
J
Sound Support
Allows voice recording or recording playing on an audio device assigned
to a PC. Voice Mail and Live Record are supported on the PC.
J
Plug and Play
An AC-R Unit is necessary when using this unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 22
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
This adapter can be installed on any Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal
except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL and ITH-8D/16D-2.
Figure 9-24 CT(U)-R Unit
Figure 9-25 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a PC using a CT(U)-R Unit
(Example) shows how the CT(U)-R Unit is connected to the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
and to the PC. The required AC-R Unit is not shown.
PC
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal + CT(U)-R Unit
ESI
ETU
Line Cord (2-line)
USB Cable
CT(U)-R Unit
Optional Headset
Figure 9-25 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to a PC using a CT(U)-R Unit (Example)
3.5.1
Installing the CT(U)-R Unit
The CT(U)-R Unit should be installed after the switch settings have
been set.
If wall mounting the Multiline Terminal, a WM-R Unit must be
used. Refer to Section 13 Wall Mounting Multiline Terminals on
page 8-28.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation on page 9-1.
2.
Plug the tabs marked A and B into adapter slots, then snap the
tab on the other end of the adapter into the receptacle marked
C. (Refer to Figure 9-26 Attaching the CT(U)-R Unit to the
Multiline Terminal.)
Figure 9-26 Attaching the CT(U)-R Unit to the Multiline Terminal
3.
Replace the base plate (or wall mount unit) and attach the line
cord. Refer to Section 3 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the
System on page 8-14.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 24
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
3.5.2
Attach the AC-R to the CT(U)-R Unit. Refer to Figure 9-5
Connecting the AC Adapter to an Installed Adapter on page
9-5.
Connecting the CT(U)-R Unit to the PC
Connect USB cable from the PC to the CT(U)-R Unit as shown in
Figure 9-27 Connecting the USB Cable to the CT(U)-R Unit.
Figure 9-27 Connecting the USB Cable to the CT(U)-R Unit
3.5.3
Installing the Optional Headset
Install the headset and anchor it in the cord slot on the Multiline
Terminal as shown in Figure 9-23 Attaching the Headset to the
Multiline Terminal on page 9-21.
3.5.4
Installing the Driver on the PC
Using the download from Web with the CT(U)-R Unit install the driver
onto your PC. Refer to the CT(U)-R Unit installation instructions for
installing the driver.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.6
HF-R Unit (Handsfree Unit)
The Handsfree Unit provides full-duplex handsfree communication for a
desktop user. Large or enclosed areas may cause poor full-duplex operation.
This unit comes with the handsfree adapter and an external microphone unit.
This adapter can be installed on any DTR/DTH Multiline Terminal except
DTR-2DT-1 and ITH-8D/16D-2 (R1500 or higher).
3.6.1
Installing an HF-R Unit on any DTR/DTH Multiline Terminal (except
DTR-2DT-1 and ITH-8D/16D-2
1.
With terminal upside down, facing from the bottom of the open
cover, install this unit in terminal adapter Slot 1.
Figure 9-28 Attaching the HF-R Unit to the Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 26
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.6.2
2.
Plug the tabs marked A and B into adapter slots, then snap the
tab on the other end of the adapter into the receptacle marked
C. Refer to Figure 9-28 Attaching the HF-R Unit to the Multiline
Terminal.
3.
Replace the base plate (or wall mount unit) and attach the line
cord. Refer to Section 3 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the
System on page 8-14.
Installing the External Microphone
An external microphone can be installed on the HFU-U Unit. These
instructions apply to the external microphone obtained from NEC.
The microphone is equipped with a locking mute button and a red
LED indicator that is off when the microphone is in mute.
Figure 9-29 Microphone with Mute
1.
Plug the microphone cord into the jack on the HF-R Unit.
The microphone should be one~three feet away from the
Multiline Terminal with the Mic grate facing the user.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7
IP-R(IPK) Unit
The Elite IP-R(IPK) Unit allows connection to an IAD(8)-U( ) ETU with a
MEGACO Station Package in the Electra Elite IPK.
Installing the IP-R(IPK) Unit in the plug-in socket located at the bottom of the
Electra Elite IPK Terminal transforms a DTH Multiline Terminal into an IP
station. The user can also connect a PC to the LAN through an RJ-45
Ethernet jack on the IP-R(IPK) Unit that acts as a switching hub.
Any Electra Elite IPK Terminal (8D/16D/32D-1) with an IP-R(IPK) Unit
installed, in conjunction with the IAD(8)-U() ETU (MEGACO Station Package),
enables IP Telephony stations for the Electra Elite IPK System. The IP
stations can provide connectivity with the Corporate Elite over the local LAN
(Ethernet).
3.7.1
IP-R(IPK) Unit Specifications
Refer to Table 9-4 IP-R(IPK) Unit Specifications.
Table 9-4 IP-R(IPK) Unit Specifications
Feature
Specification
Interface
10/100 Base-T (IEEE 802.3), RJ-45
Protocol
Voice (UDP, RTP, and RTCP)
Signal (TCP, H.225 and H.245)
Jitter Buffer
Max 90 ms
Quality of Station (QOS)
Network Managed switches supporting Type
of Service (TOS) field and VLAN support
Local Power
27 V 750 mA via AC Adapter Base
Applications
TFTP (Client), DHCP Client, Megaco (H.248)
Standards
UL1459, FCC Part 68
Voice Specifications
term
Mountable D
G.711 (PCM Mu-law/A-law) G.729
Dterm 8D, 16D, 32D-type telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 28
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.2
Applying Power to the IP-R(IPK) Unit
Power is provided to the IP-R(IPK) Unit using an AC-R Unit or Power
Over the Ethernet.
Figure 9-30 IP Terminal Rear Connector Locations
H
H
AC-R Unit (AC Adapter)
Plug the optional AC-R Unit input jack in the AC Adapter
connection shown in Figure 9-30 IP Terminal Rear Connector
Locations.
Power over the Ethernet (POE)
POE sometimes called In-Line Power, is a LAN technology that
allows standard 10/100 Base-T data cables to pass current
from a power source to a requesting-end device. Refer to
Figure 9-31 IP-R(IPK) Unit SW1 Setting for Power Source.
Figure 9-31 IP-R(IPK) Unit SW1 Setting for Power Source
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The IP-R(IPK) Unit switch SW1 indicates to the system how the
adapter is powered.
To set Switch SW1 for the applicable power source, Refer to
Table 9-5 Switch SW1 Setting for Power Configuration.
Table 9-5 Switch SW1 Setting for Power Configuration
Switch
(SW1)
Settings
Power Method
AC Adapter
NEC AC-R AC Adapter (27V,
750 mA)
H
1
NEC POE Equipment
2
CICSO Equipment
(CDP)
(Default)
3.7.3
Equipment Used
H
H
H
NEC Power Patch Panel
SN1604 PRWMS (Stock
No. 59022)
NEC BF200/24 POE
Switching Hub
Cisco Catalyst PRW
Series
Cisco Powered Patch
Panel
Installing the IP-R(IPK) Unit on the Electra Elite IPK Terminal
The IP-R(IPK) Unit can be installed on any DTH-8D/16D/32D-1
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal as shown below.
1.
Unplug the telephone line from the terminal. Turn the terminal
upside down, press the areas indicated on the diagram and
raise the base plate until the retaining tabs click.
Figure 9-32 Raising the Base Plate
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 30
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Press down on the tabs as shown in Figure 9-33 Removing the
Base Plate and push the base plate forward to remove it.
Figure 9-33 Removing the Base Plate
3.
When an IP-R(IPK) Unit is installed for the first time in a
terminal, the base cover on the Multiline Terminal must be
modified as shown in Figure 9-34 Removing Cutouts. Remove
all cutouts on the bottom and back of the terminal base plate
before installing the IP-R(IPK) Unit.
Figure 9-34 Removing Cutouts
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Plug the IP-R(IPK) Unit in Connector 1 on the Elite IPK
Terminal (DTH-8D/16D/32D-1) as shown in Figure 9-35
Plugging in the IP-R(IPK) Unit.
IP-R(IPK) Unit
Optional
Connector
Connector 1
Figure 9-35 Plugging in the IP-R(IPK) Unit
5.
Attach the base plate by lining up the four tabs on the base
cover with corresponding slots on the terminal as shown in
Figure 9-36 Attaching the Base Plate, and slide the cover in the
direction of the arrows until it clicks in place.
Figure 9-36 Attaching the Base Plate
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 32
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.4
Connection Example
Refer to Figure 9-37 Connection Example.
Personal Computer
Note 1
Electra Elite IPK
LAN/WAN
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU
Megaco Station
LAN Connection
(Straight)
Connector for PC Connection
Note 2
AC Adapter Connection
AC Adapter
Note 1:
The IP-R(IPK) Unit is equipped with a switching Hub function, enabling connection to personal
computers.
Note 2:
When using 10 Base-T, a straight cable category 3 or higher is required (maximum length 100
meters). When using 100 Base-TX, a straight cable category 5 or higher is required (maximum
length 100 meters).
Figure 9-37 Connection Example
3.7.5
Quick Setup and Configuration Procedures
This section provides step-by-step procedures for setting up and
configuring the IP-R(IPK) Unit.
1.
Connect the LAN port of the IP-R(IPK) Unit to the network and
the PC port to an optional PC at your workstation. Plug in the
AC-R Unit.
2.
The IP-R(IPK) Unit automatically attempts to locate the DHCP
server when powered up. Wait until the server lookup times
out, and DHCP Server is Not Found is displayed on the
terminal, and then begin programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H G
J L
3.
,
,
Press
programming mode.
4.
to display the
The Programming Menu is displayed. Press
Network Settings options. This enables you to configure IP
settings for IP Terminals.
5.
Press
(DHCP mode is displayed). Press the
corresponding digit (1 or 2) to enable or disable DHCP mode;
then press the softkey that corresponds with Set on the LCD.
6.
When DHCP is not used (Static IP assignment), select 1
(Disable), then select Set, and proceed to step 7. When DHCP
is used, select 2 (Enable - factory default) and proceed to step
10.
7.
From the Network Settings option, press
and enter the IP
Address (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX); then press the softkey
that corresponds with Set on the LCD.
8.
and enter the
From the Network Settings option, press
Subnet Mask (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX); then press the softkey that
corresponds with Set on the LCD.
9.
and enter the
From the Network Settings option, press
Router IP Address (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX); then press the
softkey that corresponds with Set on the LCD. To return to
Programming Menu, press the softkey that corresponds with
Prev on the LCD.
10.
from the Programming Menu to access the MGC
Press
(Media Gateway Controller) IP Address and enter the IP
Address for IAD(8)-U( ) or IPCA( )-U( ) ETU Megaco Station
(XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX); then press the softkey that corresponds
with Set on the LCD.
11.
Press
from the Programming Menu to access the
Extension Number option. Enter the extension number and
press the softkey that corresponds with Set on the LCD.
12.
The extension number is used to register the IP terminal with
the IAD(8)-U( ) Megaco Station Card or IPCA( )-U( ) ETU.
These settings must match the Electra Elite IPK Programming
Station Number Assignment in Memory Block 4-10. This entry
is required if DHCP mode is enabled.
A
, and
to enter the basic
A
B
C
D
B
C
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 34
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
I
13.
Press
from the Programming Menu to access Advanced
Settings option.
14.
Select 3, DRS Settings.
15.
Select 1, DRS Mode, and Disable this function.
This function must be Disabled prior to saving configuration.
16.
Select Save; the system stores the new configuration and
performs a software reset.
17.
After the unit performs the software reset, the IP-R(IPK) Unit
searches for the MGC. After the unit locates the MGC, the
terminal LCD restores the system time and the softkeys for
System, Station, Up, and Down are restored.
18.
The ITH 8D/16D-2 Telephone or the IP-R(IPK) Unit installed is
now ready for operation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8
Dterm Voice Security Recorder
3.8.1
Description
The VSR Extension Recorder is a Universal Serial Bus (USB) device
that taps across the digital extension pair of a Dterm Digital extension
port and includes software that enables the user to manage stored
calls. VSR hardware connects in-line at the user desktop. Power is
not required because the connection is a metallic wiring of the in and
out connections. The recorder does nothing to affect operation of
the Digital Telephone.
This device meets all applicable FCC and UL requirements for this
type of communication device.
Figure 9-38
3.8.2
Dterm Voice Security Recorder
Connection Configuration
The configuration connection is shown in Figure 9-39 VSR
Connection Configuration.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 36
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.3
Connectors
H
H
One PC USB connector that provides power and streams all
speech and control channel information to the host PC and
desktop software.
Two digital telephone line connections that passively tap
across the Dterm digital connection and “listen” in high
impedance mode to the signaling on the line.
Dterm Telephone
IPK KSU
VSR
USB
Computer
Figure 9-39 VSR Connection Configuration
3.8.4
Requirements for Installation
The VSR is packaged with everything necessary for installation
including:
H
H
H
H
Software CD
USB Cable
Telephone connection lead
Quick-start installation manual
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.5
3.8.6
Installation Procedures for Windows 98 or ME
1.
Run the Setup.exe program file from the NEC installation CD
before connecting the telephone interface unit to your PC.
2.
Connect the VRS UBC interface connector to your PC using
the provided USB cable.
3.
Connect your telephone to either VSR port.
4.
Connect the other VSR port to the telephone system, and
recording is enabled.
Installation Procedures for Windows 2000 or XP
1.
Using the provided USB cable, connect the VRS USB interface
to your PC.
2.
Windows automatically detects the new hardware and displays
a Wizard dialog box.
3.
Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and
select next.
Figure 9-40 Wizard Welcome Screen
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 38
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
The next screen is displayed.
Figure 9-41 Search and Installation Options
5.
If files were downloaded from the Internet, uncheck Search
Removable Media, and check Include this location in the
search, and enter the location where the downloaded files are
to be stored (e.g., C:\My Documents).
6.
Select next and the next screen is displayed
Figure 9-42 Software Not Compatible Warning
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.
The software is fully tested , but has not been sent to Microsoft
for approval. Select Continue anyway and the next screen is
displayed.
Figure 9-43 Hardware Update Completed
3.8.7
8.
The necessary device drivers are installed.
9.
Select Finish to close the dialogue.
10.
Now run Setup.exe on your NEC installation CD to install
necessary application software on your PC.
11.
Connect your telephone to the VSR ports, and you are ready to
record.
VSR Application Software
The VSR software is delivered on a Compact Disk using a selfstarting install shield. The CD contains all applicable files and
installation procedures to operate to this specification, including USB
device drivers, software application, and Help files.
A quick-start instruction sheet and a pre-recorded user guide that
steps the user through the various options are provided.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 40
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
The VSR application supports Microsoft Operating Systems that
support USB devices. The following systems meet this requirement:
H
H
H
H
3.8.8
WIN 98SE
WIN Millennium Edition (ME)
WIN 2000
WIN XP (all variants)
VRS does not support WIN 95 and below, or WIN NT.
VRS User Interface Tab Options
VRS has the following tabs to allow the user to select features and
options:
H
H
H
H
H
Playback allows various playback features of recorded
conversations.
Record allows control of recording.
About provides software version information.
Options to set-up controls such as recording format.
File Management allows the user to manage disk space used
by the VSR.
Figure 9-44 VSR User Interface Tab Options
3.8.9
VSR Playback Tab
This Tab allows the user to list and play recorded conversations. A
graphical presentation of the volume level of the call with a cursor to
indicate the current playback position is displayed. The cursor can
be dragged forward or backward to allow rapid selection of the
applicable section.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-45 VSR Playback Tab
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 42
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-46 Caller ID or Comment Editor
The user can edit the Caller ID or the Comments field when viewing
an existing recording.
Caller ID and number dialed are not available on the first release.
Check with NEC for release date.
The user can list recordings in order of importance (using
exclamation mark) with Caller ID, Time + Date, or duration.
The Caller ID and Comment buttons allow the user to filter out all
recordings with the required Caller ID or text in the Comments field.
Playback, pause and stop buttons allow the user to control the
Playback.
The Red exclamation mark allows recording to be identified as
important for future listing or ensures that the recording cannot be
overwritten.
The Red X allows recordings to be manually deleted.
The envelope button generates an e-mail with the recording inserted
for mailing to a colleague.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.10
VRS Record Tab
This Tab allows the user to view recording levels and control the
recording.
Figure 9-47 View Levels and Control Recording
The Oscilloscope shows the local and remote levels on the line
separately (Microphone is the user level and speaker is the distant
party level.
The Caller ID field is for future versions, but information can be
entered or overwritten by the user.
Manual Start, Stop, and Pause buttons control the recording status.
The user can add notes and mark important recordings with an
exclamation point to avoid deleting the conversation.
The camera button allows a user to snapshot record conversation to
the current point while continuing to record the entire conversation.
This feature is important for emergency centers to allow an operator
to quickly reply to an important part while continuing to record.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 44
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.11
About Tab
This tab provides version and manufacturer information.
Figure 9-48 VRS About Tab
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.12
Options Tab
This Tab allows the user to select various setup options of the VSR.
Figure 9-49 Select VSR Setup Options
H
H
Automatically start recording every call
Starts the recording when a call, including internal extension
calls, is made.
Recorded format
Perfect Digital Recording stores the recording in PCM format
taken directly from the digital line. But the highest quality
requires significant space (35 hours per Gbyte) on the PC disk.
H
GSM 06.10 uses a compression technique to store 168 Hours
per Gbyte. The quality difference is negligible so this becomes
the default selection.
Show dialog when recorder starts
Selecting this default option brings the Record Tab to the front
of the user screen when record is activated.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 46
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
Call Selection
Saves all calls or only those that exceed an established limit.
Show splash screen at startup
When selected, the VSR logo is shown for five seconds when
the application is started.
Email format
Allows the user to select the type of file inserted in an e-mail
when the user selects the e-mail button on the Playback Tab to
send the VSR format to other users that have this application or
to convert it to a .wav format for replay by any PC.
Dterm VSR selection automatically adds the Caller ID, time,
H
H
date and comments fields to any e-mail.
Prompt for call information at the start of each call
When selected, the Record screen is displayed when a call is
made to allow the user to enter information.
Prompt for call information at the end of each call
When selected, the screen shown below is displayed to allow
the user to manage calls at the point of completion. The user
can save or erase the call, add notes, or mark important calls
using the red key shown below.
Figure 9-50 Manage Calls at Completion
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.13
File Management Tab
File management is necessary when the user makes many
telephone calls and stores each conversation. The selections are
self-explanatory.
Figure 9-51 File Management Tab
3.8.14
Custom Program Settings
Comvurgent provides the dealer or user the option of making
additional adjustments.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 48
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-52 Comvurgent Options for Additional Adjustments
This special configuration program can only be accessed by
browsing to the installation location (default C:\Program
Files\Comvurgent\XtRecorder), and then click on the NEC Dterm
Config.exe.
The customer takes all responsibility to ensure they meet legal
requirements Comvurgent provides the user option settings to meet
customer demands and cannot be responsible for misapplication of
the product.
Several settings can be customized to meet requirements of the
application as shown in Figure 9-53 Customizing Application to Meet
Requirements.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-53 Customizing Application to Meet Requirements
H
H
H
H
H
H
Display splash screen at the start of every call
Reminds user that recording is taking place by splashing a
screen with every call.
Show Dterm Recorder dialog at the start of every call
Displays application record screen anytime a call is being
recorded.
Prevent users of this station from deleting calls
Disables the delete key.
Prevent users of this station from pausing or halting recording
Disables pause and stop controls.
Hide the system tray icon for invisible recording
Hides the small icon that appears in the system tray and
flashes red when recording.
Password
Locks access to these settings and those at the user level.
When making changes, the application must be closed and started
again to become effective.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 50
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9
Installing Add on Module (ADM)
The D16(LD)-R ADM creates a 16 button Phonebook directory. The interface
for this unit shown in Figure 9-54 ADM Interface Unit is connected in the right
adapter connector for the applicable multiline terminal. When another
adapter needs to be added, this interface must be moved to the left adapter
connector to preserve the cable integrity.
DSW1
ON
O N
DSW1
Position
3
1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 9-54 ADM Interface Unit
3.9.1
Connecting the Interface Unit:
1.
Set DSW1 to the pattern for the applicable multiline terminal as
shown in Table 9-6 DSW1 Switch Positions on the next page.
2.
Place the ADM and multiline terminal upside down and remove
the Base Units.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 9-6 DSW1 Switch Positions
Series
Keyset Name
DSW1 Switch Positions
DSW1
ON
Dterm Series i
DTR/H-(8)/(16)D-2( ) TEL
DTR/H -16LD-2( ) TEL
DTR/H-16D(BL)-2( ) TEL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
ITR/H-(*8)/(16)-2( ) TEL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Dterm IP
ON
ITR/H(8)/(16)-3 ( ) TEL
ITR/H-16LD-3( ) TEL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.
Plug the interface unit into the right adapter connection as
shown on Figure 9-55 ADM and Multiline Terminal with Base
Covers Removed on the next page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 52
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-55 ADM and Multiline Terminal with Base Covers Removed
4.
Place the interface unit cable in the cable channels on the ADM
and multiline terminal.
5.
Install the connector plate provided with the ADM as shown in
Figure 9-56 Installing the Connector Plate on the next page.
The connector plate cannot be used with Inaset terminals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-56 Installing the Connector Plate
6.
3.9.2
Replace the base units as shown in Figure 9-55 ADM and
Multiline Terminal with Base Covers Removed.
Wall Mounting ADM and Multiline Terminal
1.
Remove both Base Units.
2.
Remove the Multiline Terminal Base Unit cutout shown in
Figure 9-57 Installing Base Units on the Wall.
3.
Install the base units on the wall using the eight screws.
4.
Install the ADM and Multiline Terminal as shown on Figure 9-55
ADM and Multiline Terminal with Base Covers Removed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 54
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9-57 Installing Base Units on the Wall
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
NEC Conference Max™
3.10.1
Description
This expandable conferencing telephone provides premium,
full-duplex audio to small conference rooms as a single unit or to
larger rooms when expanded by up to three units that also expand
microphone access and loudspeaker coverage with even distribution
of sound.
Figure 9-58 NEC Conference Max™
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 56
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.2
3.10.3
Installation
1.
Connect the provided 25’ Cat. 5 cable between the LINK OUT
jack of the base unit and the LINK IN jack of the conferencing
pod.
2.
Connect the provided RJ-11 cable between the base unit and
the telephone jack.
3.
Connect the power cord to the base unit and plug it in an
electrical outlet.
4.
To connect additional units, connect a 12’ Cat. 5 cable between
the LINK OUT jack of the unit connected to the base unit and
the LINK IN jack of the second unit and repeat the connection
of another 12’ Cat. 5 cable between the LINK OUT jack of each
unit to the LINK IN of the next unit in sequence.
Keypad Functions
Refer to Table 9-7 Keypad Functions.
Table 9-7 Keypad Functions
Key
Function
ON/OFF key
(telephone icon)
Press to activate the telephone and access dial tone.
Press again to hang up and return to standby mode.
PHONEBOOK (book
icon)
Press to dial stored numbers. Press and hold two
seconds to enter Phonebook Edit mode.
REDIAL (circular arrow
icon)
Press once to dial the last number called. Press and
hold two seconds to enter Program mode.
CONFERENCE (three
person icon)
Press to dial the conferencing service provider. This
feature must be programmed.
FLASH (lightning flash
icon)
Press to enable call forwarding, call waiting, or threeway calling when supported by telephone service.
CLEAR ( vertical line
and left arrow icon)
Press to clear the last digit entered or press and hold to
clear all numbers.
Press to exit programming mode.
VOLUME (loud and
dim speaker icons)
Press during call to adjust call volume or press while
telephone is ringing or in standby mode to adjust ringer
volume.
MUTE (mike with
diagonal line icon)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.4
Programming Options
To enter Programming mode, press and hold REDIAL until a
diamond arrow is displayed on the LCD. Then press the applicable
key and follow the instruction in Table 9-8 Programming Options.
Table 9-8 Programming Options
Menu Option
Key
Programming
Ringer Melody
1
Press REDIAL. The current melody selection
flashes. Press 1~5 to change melody. Press
REDIAL to save the selection.
Dialing Mode
2
Press REDIAL. The current dialing selection
flashes. Press 1 for tone or 2 for pulse. Press
REDIAL to save the selection.
Flash Duration
3
Press REDIAL. The current duration flashes.
Press 1~5 to select duration as follows:
1 = 600 ms
2 = 300 ms
3 = 150 ms
4 = 100 ms
5 = 80 ms
Press REDIAL to save the selection.
Local Number,
4
Press REDIAL. Enter the telephone number that
you want displayed on the LCD in standby mode.
Press REDIAL to save the number.
Conference,
5
Press REDIAL. Enter the telephone number you
want the conference key to dial. Press REDIAL to
save the number.
Service,
6
Press REDIAL. Enter the telephone number you
want the O key to dial. Press REDIAL to save the
number.
7
Press REDIAL. Press number key for country as
follows:
1
US/Canada/China/Japan/Mexico/Singapore
2
Europe CTR 21
3
Australia
4
S. Africa
5
Brazil
6
New Zealand
7
South Korea
Press REDIAL to save the country setting.
Country
CLEAR
,
Press to return the previous menu.
Press and hold to exit programming without saving changes.
Press and hold 1 to enter hyphen or , to enter a space in the number.
Press CLEAR before entering a new number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 58
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.5
Compliance
This product is in compliance with the following regulations and
requirements:
H
H
H
H
FCC Part 15/ICES-003
This product has been tested and complies with the limits for a
Class A digital device
FCC Part 68
US:FBIMT01B910158015 Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN):0.1B(ac)
Industry of Canada (IC)
IC: 1970A-158015: REN:0.1B(ac)
European
Council Directive 1999/5/EC
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
9 - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
9 - 60
Installing Electra Elite IPK Optional Terminal Equipment
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ..................................................................................... 10-1
Section 2
Multiline Terminals ....................................................................................... 10-1
2.1
DTP-2DT-1 TEL ........................................................................................ 10-1
2.2
DTU-8-1 TEL ............................................................................................. 10-3
2.3
DTU-8D-2 TEL .......................................................................................... 10-4
2.4
DTU-16-1 TEL ........................................................................................... 10-5
2.5
DTU-16D-2 TEL ........................................................................................ 10-6
2.6
DTU-32-1 TEL ........................................................................................... 10-7
2.7
DTU-32D-2 TEL ........................................................................................ 10-8
2.8
DCU-60-1 CONSOLE ............................................................................... 10-9
Section 3
Connecting a DTU/DTP Terminal to the System ..................................... 10-10
Section 4
Connecting Attendant Console to a Multiline Terminal .......................... 10-11
Section 5
Adjusting the DTU/DTP LCD ..................................................................... 10-12
Section 6
Installing DTU/DTP Line Cards and Plastic Panels ................................ 10-13
6.1
Line Card and Plastic Panel Installation .................................................. 10-13
6.2
Plastic Panel Removal ............................................................................ 10-14
Section 7
Removing DTU/DTP Softkeys ................................................................... 10-15
Section 8
Adjusting DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal Height ........................................ 10-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 10-1
DTP-2DT-1 TEL ....................................................................................................... 10-2
Figure 10-2
DTU-8-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ...............................................................................10-3
Figure 10-3
DTU-8D-2 TEL Multiline Terminal ............................................................................ 10-4
Figure 10-4
DTU-16-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ............................................................................. 10-5
Figure 10-5
DTU-16D-2 TEL Multiline Terminal .......................................................................... 10-6
Figure 10-6
DTU-32-1 TEL Multiline Terminal ............................................................................. 10-7
Figure 10-7
DTU-32D-2 TEL Multiline Terminal .......................................................................... 10-8
Figure 10-8
DCU-60-1 CONSOLE ............................................................................................... 10-9
Figure 10-9
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System ...................................................... 10-10
Figure 10-10
Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal ........................................................... 10-10
Figure 10-11
Connecting the Line Cord and AC Adapter when Installing a
DCU Attendant Console ......................................................................................... 10-11
Figure 10-12
DCU Attendant Console and Multiline Terminal ..................................................... 10-12
Figure 10-13
Adjusting the DTU/DTP LCD .................................................................................. 10-12
Figure 10-14
Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal .............. 10-13
Figure 10-15
Installing Plastic Panel on a DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal ...................................... 10-14
Figure 10-16
Removing the Plastic Panel from the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal ....................... 10-14
Figure 10-17
Removing DTU/DTP Softkeys ................................................................................ 10-15
Figure 10-18
Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal ....................... 10-15
Figure 10-19
Raising the Base Plate on the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal .................................. 10-16
Figure 10-20
Adjusting the Line Cord Length .............................................................................. 10-16
Figure 10-21
Lowering the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal ................................................ 10-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures
Installing Electra Elite
Multiline Terminals
Chapter 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Electra Elite IPK system provides several Electra Elite Multiline Terminals, an
Attendant Console, and several adapters that attach peripheral equipment to the
Multiline Terminals. The adapters can be used with Dterm Series E Multiline
Terminals also. This chapter describes each terminal, console, and adapter and
provides applicable installation instructions.
SECTION 2
MULTILINE TERMINALS
2.1
DTP-2DT-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has two programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), eight function keys, a built-in speakerphone,
headset connection, and a large LED to indicate incoming calls and
messages.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTP-2DT-1 TELs can be installed. The combined total of all
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTP-2DT-1 TELs can be installed. The combined total of
all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 10-1 DTP-2DT-1 TEL
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 2
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
DTU-8-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has eight programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with ADA-U,
APA-U, APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S), or HFU-U.
The DTP-8-1 TEL is comparable and can also be used with the Electra Elite
IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTU-8-1/DTP-8-1 TELs can be installed. The combined total
of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTU-8-1/DTP-8-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 10-2 DTU-8-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
DTU-8D-2 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has eight programmable line keys (each with
the 2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a Large LED to
indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with ADA-U, APA-U,
APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S), or HFU-U.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
The DTP-8D-1 TEL is comparable and can also be used with the Electra Elite
IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTU-8D-2/DTP-8D-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTU-8D-2/DTP-8D-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 10-3 DTU-8D-2 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 4
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
DTU-16-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with ADA-U,
APA-U, APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S) or HFU-U Unit.
The DTP-16-1 TEL is comparable and can also be used with the Electra Elite
IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTU-16-1/DTP-16-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTU-16-1/DTP-16-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 10-4 DTU-16-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
DTU-16D-2 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a
2-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with ADA-U, APA-U, APR-U,
CTA-U, CTU(S), or HFU-U.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
The DTP-16D-1 TEL is comparable and can also be used with the Electra
Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTU-16D-2/DTP-16D-1 TELs can be installed. The
combined total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is
32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTU-16D-2/DTP-16D-1 TELs can be installed. The
combined total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is
120.
Figure 10-5 DTU-16D-2 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 6
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
DTU-32-1 TEL
This digital nondisplay Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys
(each with a 2-color LED), 16 one-touch keys, a built-in speakerphone,
headset jack, a large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, and
compatibility with ADA-U, APA-U, APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S), or HFU-U.
System software can be changed so this Multiline Terminal can have 24
programmable line keys and 8 one-touch keys.
The DTP-32-1 TEL, is comparable and can also be used with the Electra Elite
IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 31 DTU-32-1/DTP-32-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 119 DTU-32-1/DTP-32-1 TELs can be installed. The combined
total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Figure 10-6 DTU-32-1 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.7
DTU-32D-2 TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each with a
2-color LED), 16 one-touch keys, a built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a
large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility with
ADA-U, APA-U, APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S), or HFU-U.
This terminal also has a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) and four softkeys.
System software can be changed so this Multiline Terminal can have 24
programmable line keys and eight one-touch keys.
The DTP-32D-1 TEL is comparable and can also be used with the Electra
Elite IPK system.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 32 DTU-32D-2/DTP-32D-1 TELs can be installed. The
combined total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is
32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 120 DTU-32D-2/DTP-32D-1 TELs can be installed. The
combined total of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is
120.
Figure 10-7 DTU-32D-2 TEL Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 8
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.8
DCU-60-1 CONSOLE
The Attendant Console has 60 programmable line keys (each with a 2-color
LED). These 60 line keys can be programmed as Direct Station Selection
keys, function keys, or as outside line keys. An external power supply (AC
adapter) is provided with the Attendant Console.
Basic Port Package and Expanded Port Package
A maximum of four DCU-60-1 CONSOLEs can be installed in an any Electra
Elite IPK system. An Attendant Position can have four associated DCU-60-1
CONSOLEs.
Figure 10-8 DCU-60-1 CONSOLE
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
CONNECTING A DTU/DTP TERMINAL TO THE SYSTEM
The instructions for connecting a Multiline Terminal to the system applies to all of the
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals.
1.
Plug the telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of the Multiline
Terminal. The handset is also attached to the bottom side of the Multiline
Terminal.
Figure 10-9 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System
2.
Lead the telephone and handset cords through the appropriate grooves.
Figure 10-10 Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 10
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
CONNECTING ATTENDANT CONSOLE TO A MULTILINE TERMINAL
An Attendant Console can be attached to a Multiline Terminal using the following
procedures.
1.
Turn the Multiline Terminal and the Attendant Console face down.
2.
Using the joining plate provided with the Attendant Console, attach the plate to
the Multiline Terminal and the Attendant Console.
3.
Connect the line cord and the AC adapter to the indicated locations on the
bottom of the Attendant Console.
Line Cord Jack
AC Adapter Plug
Figure 10-11
Connecting the Line Cord and AC Adapter when Installing a
DCU Attendant Console
4.
When the Attendant Console and the Multiline Terminal are properly connected,
they sit side-by-side as shown in Figure 10-12 DCU Attendant Console and
Multiline Terminal.
5.
Make sure that the AC adapter, supplied with the Attendant Console, is used.
Using a different AC adapter may cause problems. Check that the supplied
voltage matches that specified for the adapter and plug it in an outlet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 10-12 DCU Attendant Console and Multiline Terminal
SECTION 5
ADJUSTING THE DTU/DTP LCD
Electra Elite IPK display Multiline Terminals have an adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD). The LCD can be adjusted by pushing down or pulling up as desired.
Figure 10-13 Adjusting the DTU/DTP LCD
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 12
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 6
INSTALLING DTU/DTP LINE CARDS AND PLASTIC PANELS
6.1
Line Card and Plastic Panel Installation
Line key designations are entered on the Line Card that is then placed on the
Multiline Terminal to provide a quick reference of key designations. The Line
Cards can be changed as necessary. The Plastic Panel is placed on top of
the Line Card to hold it in place.
1.
Place the Line Card over the keys on the Multiline Terminal.
2.
Place the tabs on the bottom of the plastic panel in the grooves at the
terminal bottom, and press top right and left ends to secure plastic panel
to the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Figure 10-15 Installing Plastic Panel
on a DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal.
Figure 10-14
Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a DTU/DTP
Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 10-15 Installing Plastic Panel on a DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
6.2
Plastic Panel Removal
Lift the right corner, raise the panel, and slide the bottom away from the
Multiline Terminal.
Never pull on the bottom of the plastic panel to remove it;
the plastic panel could be damaged.
Figure 10-16 Removing the Plastic Panel from the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 14
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 7
REMOVING DTU/DTP SOFTKEYS
When the softkeys on the Multiline Terminal are not used, they can be removed using
the following procedure:
1.
Remove the softkeys by pulling the softkey plate upward as shown in Figure
10-17 Removing DTU/DTP Softkeys.
Figure 10-17 Removing DTU/DTP Softkeys
SECTION 8
ADJUSTING DTU/DTP MULTILINE TERMINAL HEIGHT
The base plate on the Electra Elite Multiline Terminal is hinged to allow adjustment to
raise or lower the terminal.
1.
Turn the Multiline Terminal upside down and locate the tabs as shown in Figure
10-18 Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal.
Figure 10-18 Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Push the adjustment tabs and raise the base plate until it locks.
Figure 10-19 Raising the Base Plate on the DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
3.
The length of the cord can be adjusted by pulling the line cord though the groove
in the bottom of the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 10-20 Adjusting the Line Cord Length
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 16
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
To lower the base plate on the Multiline Terminal, push on the adjustment tabs
and push the base plate downward.
Tab
Figure 10-21 Lowering the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
10 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 18
Installing Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ..................................................................................... 11-1
Section 2
Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation ............................... 11-1
Section 3
Installation Procedures ................................................................................ 11-6
3.1
ACA-U Unit (AC Adapter) ......................................................................... 11-6
3.1.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Connecting the ACA-U Unit ...................................................................... 11-6
ADA-U Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter) ..................................................... 11-7
3.2.1
Installing an ADA-U Unit on a Multiline Terminal ...................................... 11-7
3.2.2
Connecting Cables to the ADA-U Unit ...................................................... 11-9
3.2.3
Switch Settings ....................................................................................... 11-12
APA-U Unit (Analog Port Adapter) .......................................................... 11-14
3.3.1
Installing APA-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
except DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1. .................................................... 11-14
3.3.2
Switch Settings ....................................................................................... 11-15
3.3.3
Connecting Cables on the APA-U Unit ................................................... 11-16
APR-U Unit (Analog Port Ringer) ............................................................ 11-17
3.4.1
Installing an APR-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
except DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1. .................................................... 11-17
3.4.2
Switch Settings ....................................................................................... 11-19
3.4.3
Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit ................................................... 11-20
CTA-U Unit (Computer Telephony Application) ..................................... 11-21
3.5.1
Installing the CTA-U Unit ........................................................................ 11-22
3.5.2
Connecting the Cables on the CTA-U Unit ............................................. 11-23
3.5.3
Installing the Driver on the PC ................................................................ 11-23
Computer Telephony Adapter, CTU(8)-U Unit, with USB Interface ........ 11-23
3.6.1
CTU(S) Unit Connections ....................................................................... 11-24
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
DBM(B)-U( ) Box and DBM(E)-U( ) Box Message Display Boards ........ 11-25
3.7.1
Connecting DBM(E)-U( ) Box to DBM(B)-U( ) Box or
Another DBM(E)-U10 Box ..................................................................... 11-26
3.7.2
Wall Mounting DBM(B)-U( ) and Expansion Boards .............................. 11-27
3.7.3
Connecting the DBM(B) to Power and ESI ............................................ 11-29
HFU-U Unit (Handsfree Unit) ................................................................. 11-30
3.8.1
Installing an HFU-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
(except DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1) .................................................. 11-31
3.8.2
Installing the External Microphone ......................................................... 11-31
3.8.3
Switch Settings ...................................................................................... 11-32
SLT(1)-U10 ADP (Single Line Telephone) ............................................. 11-32
3.9.1
Connecting the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP to the System ................................... 11-32
3.9.2
Wall Mounting the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP ...................................................... 11-35
Wall Mounting ......................................................................................... 11-36
3.10.1 Removing and Remounting the Handset Hanger .................................. 11-36
3.10.2 Wall Mounting using the Base Unit ........................................................ 11-36
3.10.3 Installing the Wall Mount Unit and Mounting the Multiline
Terminal using the WMU-U Unit ............................................................ 11-40
3.10.4 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Plate ........................... 11-44
3.10.5 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the WMU-U Unit ........................ 11-44
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-1
Raising the Base Plate ............................................................................................. 11-2
Figure 11-2
Unlocking Tab .......................................................................................................... 11-2
Figure 11-3
Releasing Right Tab ................................................................................................. 11-3
Figure 11-4
Removing Bottom Cover ..........................................................................................11-3
Figure 11-5
Removing Base Plate Dummy End .......................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11-6
Cutting Dummy End in Half ...................................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11-7
Installing Adapter in Connector 1 ............................................................................. 11-5
Figure 11-8
Installing Dummy End B ........................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11-9
ACA-U Unit Connection ............................................................................................ 11-7
Figure 11-10
Attaching the ADA-U Unit to the Multiline Terminal ..................................................11-8
Figure 11-11
Leading the Audio Cable out from the ADA-U Unit ..................................................11-8
Figure 11-12
ADA-U Unit ............................................................................................................... 11-9
Figure 11-13
Attaching Cables to the ADA-U Unit ....................................................................... 11-10
Figure 11-14
ADA-U Unit Switch Settings ................................................................................... 11-12
Figure 11-15
APA-U Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-14
Figure 11-16
Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal ............................................................ 11-15
Figure 11-17
APA-U Unit Switches .............................................................................................. 11-15
Figure 11-18
Connecting Cables on the APA-U Unit ................................................................... 11-16
Figure 11-19
APR-U Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-17
Figure 11-20
Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal ............................................................ 11-18
Figure 11-21
Leading the Telephone Cord out from the Unit ...................................................... 11-18
Figure 11-22
Closing the Base Plate Cover ................................................................................ 11-19
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-23
APR-U Unit Switches ............................................................................................. 11-19
Figure 11-24
Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit .................................................................. 11-20
Figure 11-25
Attaching an Electra Elite Multiline Terminal to a PC ............................................. 11-21
Figure 11-26
CTA-U Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-22
Figure 11-27
Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal ............................................................ 11-22
Figure 11-28
Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-U Unit on the Multiline Terminal ....... 11-23
Figure 11-29
CTU (S)-U Unit ....................................................................................................... 11-24
Figure 11-30
DBM(B)-U( ) and DBM(E)-U( ) Message Display Boards ...................................... 11-25
Figure 11-31
Maximum Display Indications ................................................................................. 11-26
Figure 11-32
Removing Cutout ................................................................................................... 11-26
Figure 11-33
Connecting the Bracket .......................................................................................... 11-27
Figure 11-34
Threading Screw into Wall ..................................................................................... 11-28
Figure 11-35
Hanging DBM(B)-U( ) on Screw ............................................................................. 11-28
Figure 11-36
Installing Bottom Screws ........................................................................................ 11-29
Figure 11-37
Connecting DBM(B)-U( ) ........................................................................................ 11-29
Figure 11-38
Connecting DBM(B)-U( ) to ESI Port ...................................................................... 11-30
Figure 11-39
HFU-U Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-30
Figure 11-40
Microphone with Mute ............................................................................................ 11-31
Figure 11-41
Attaching a Microphone to a Multiline Terminal ..................................................... 11-31
Figure 11-42
HFU-U(BK)/(WH) Unit Switches ............................................................................. 11-32
Figure 11-43
Connecting a Single Line Telephone to the System using an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP .... 11-33
Figure 11-44
Connecting the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP ........................................................................... 11-34
Figure 11-45
Removing the Screws from the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP .................................................. 11-35
Figure 11-46
Attaching the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP to the Wall ............................................................. 11-35
Figure 11-47
Positioning the Handset Hanger ............................................................................ 11-36
Figure 11-48
Removing the Knockout ......................................................................................... 11-37
Figure 11-49
Attaching the Base Plate to the Wall ...................................................................... 11-37
Figure 11-50
Plugging in the Line Cord using a Wall Jack .......................................................... 11-38
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-51
Plugging in the Line Cord Using a Modular Jack ................................................... 11-38
Figure 11-52
Attaching the Bottom Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the Base Plate ................. 11-39
Figure 11-53
Attaching the Top Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the Base Plate ....................... 11-39
Figure 11-54
Installed Wall Mount Unit ........................................................................................ 11-40
Figure 11-55
Removing the Tabs from the Adapter .................................................................... 11-41
Figure 11-56
Removing the Tabs from the WMU-U Unit ............................................................. 11-41
Figure 11-57
Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-U Unit ....................................................... 11-42
Figure 11-58
Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall .............................................................. 11-42
Figure 11-59
Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the WMU-U Unit .............................................. 11-43
Figure 11-60
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Plate ........................................... 11-44
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
v
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
List of Figures
List Of tables
Chapter 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 11-1
ADA-U Cable Connections ..................................................................................... 11-10
Table 11-2
ADA-U Unit Switch Settings ................................................................................... 11-13
Table 11-3
APA-U Unit Switch Settings for SW3 ..................................................................... 11-16
Table 11-4
APR-U Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3 ..................................................... 11-20
Table 11-5
HFU-U Unit Switch Settings ................................................................................... 11-32
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
vii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
List of Tables
Installing Electra Elite
Optional Terminal Equipment
Chapter 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Electra Elite optional equipment can be purchased separately from the system
and added as the customer business grows. Except as noted, these adapters can be
installed on Electra Elite Multiline Terminals. The adapters can also be used with
Dterm Series E (DTP) Multiline Terminals.
A Multiline Terminal can have up to three adapters installed at the same time. When
attaching an APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S)-U, or HFU-U Unit an external power supply is
required. Only one power supply is needed even when more than one adapter is
installed.
When an adapter is installed for the first time into a terminal, the base cover on the
Multiline Terminal may have to be modified. The base cover has two access panels
that are removed before the cover can be closed over the adapters to complete the
installation.
SECTION 2
PREPARING MULTILINE TERMINAL FOR ADAPTER INSTALLATION
To prepare the Multiline Terminal for adapter installation:
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the terminal.
2.
Turn the terminal upside down. Push the tabs indicated in Figure 11-1 Raising
the Base Plate, and raise the inner area of the base plate.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-1 Raising the Base Plate
3.
Insert a flat head screwdriver into A in Figure 11-2 Unlocking Tab and press
straight down until tab unlocks.
Figure 11-2 Unlocking Tab
4.
Lightly press the right side of leg shown as B in Figure 11-3 Releasing Right
Tab, insert a flat head screwdriver at C. Press straight down until other tab
unlocks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 2
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-3 Releasing Right Tab
5.
Open and remove the bottom cover by rotating counterclockwise as shown in
Figure 11-4 Removing Bottom Cover.
Figure 11-4 Removing Bottom Cover
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
When an adapter is being installed, press tabs A and B to remove the dummy
end from the base plate as shown in Figure 11-5 Removing Base Plate Dummy
End.
Figure 11-5 Removing Base Plate Dummy End
7.
Cut the dummy end in half as shown in Figure 11-6 Cutting Dummy End in Half.
Figure 11-6 Cutting Dummy End in Half
8.
When the adapter is installed in connector 1 as shown in Figure 11-7 Installing
Adapter in Connector 1, Install the dummy end B as shown in Figure 11-8
Installing Dummy End B.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 4
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-7 Installing Adapter in Connector 1
Figure 11-8 Installing Dummy End B
9.
When the Adapter is installed in Connector 2, install dummy end A in the other
slot.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
3.1
ACA-U Unit (AC Adapter)
This unit provides power to ancillary devices, Attendant Consoles, or the
DTP-16HC-1 TEL. Except for the DTP-16HC-1 TEL, the ACA-U Unit connects
to one of the following adapters installed on a Multiline Terminal: APR-U Unit,
CTA-U Unit, CTU(S)-U Unit or HFU-U Unit. When more than one adapter is
installed on a Multiline Terminal, only one ACA-U Unit is necessary.
The power requirements for the ACA-U Unit are:
J
J
J
3.1.1
Input: 120 Vac, 60 Hz, 30W
Output: 24 Vdc, 750 mA
⊕
Polarity:
Connecting the ACA-U Unit
1.
Unplug the line cord from the Multiline Terminal and unplug the
ACA-U Unit from the AC outlet.
Failing to do this can damage the unit and/or the
Multiline Terminal.
2.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation.
3.
Locate the AC Adapter plug on the ancillary device that is
connected to the bottom of the Multiline Terminal and plug in
the AC Adapter.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 6
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
AC Adapter Plug
Figure 11-9 ACA-U Unit Connection
3.2
ADA-U Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter)
Ancillary Device Adapters allow connection of a tape recorder to all DTU/DTP
Multiline Terminals except DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1.
When installing an ADA-U Unit, first connect the cables to the ADA-U Unit, set
the dip switches, and then install the ADA-U Unit on the Multiline Terminal.
3.2.1
Installing an ADA-U Unit on a Multiline Terminal
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the Multiline Terminal.
2.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation.
3.
Plug the ADA-U Unit connector into the receptacle connector
on the back of the Multiline Terminal. Snap the ADA-U Unit into
the hooks on the Multiline Terminal to secure it.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-10 Attaching the ADA-U Unit to the Multiline Terminal
4.
Replace base plate.
5.
Lead the audio cable out through the groove on the base cover.
Connect the telephone cord.
6.
Connect the Telephone cord.
Figure 11-11 Leading the Audio Cable out from the ADA-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 8
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2
Connecting Cables to the ADA-U Unit
Cable terminal connectors are located on the right side of the ADA-U
Unit. Cables should be connected on this unit before installing the
unit on the Multiline Terminal.
Terminals
Figure 11-12 ADA-U Unit
1.
Cut off the plug on one end of the cable.
2.
Locate the adapter terminals on the right side of the unit as
illustrated in Figure 11-12 ADA-U Unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Remove the cap on the adapter terminal to expose the metal
receptacle. Push the cable in the applicable receptacle, and
replace the cap. Line up the slot on the cap with the slot on the
metal receptacle to ensure proper contact. Refer to Figure
11-13 Attaching Cables to the ADA-U Unit.
Figure 11-13 Attaching Cables to the ADA-U Unit
4.
Insulate the end of the cable that needs to be shielded with
insulating tape.
Table 11-1 ADA-U Cable Connections provides a list of cable
connections to ADA-U ADP terminals and describes the
specifications for the terminals.
Table 11-1 ADA-U Cable Connections
Terminal
Number
T1
T2
Cables to Connect
Terminal Specifications
When warning tone is not being
sent from the recorder, connect
wire pair input from tone
generator to T1:T2. The
warning tones from the
generator are sent to T1:T2 on a
dedicated wire pair while the
speech path is sent from the
ADA-U on T3:T4 over a
separate wire pair to the
recorder.
Input Terminal:T1 and T2
are enabled for tone
generating device when
switches SW1-3 and SW1-4
are OFF.
(When switches SW1- 3 and
SW1-4 are ON, a humming
sound may be recorded due
to impedance mismatch.)
Input Impedance on T1 and
T2: 100K Ω
Input Level on T1 and T2:
15 dB ~ 40 dB
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 10
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 11-1 ADA-U Cable Connections (Continued)
T3:T4
Connect recorder device wire
pair speech input to T3:T4.
When the recorder used
supplies a warning tone, this
tone may also be sent over the
T3:T4 wire pair back to the
terminal.
Input/Output Terminal:
Refer to dip switch settings
in Table 11-2 ADA-U Unit
Switch Settings.
T5
Connect the bare end of the
control cable.
When a Multiline Terminal is
idle, this contact is closed.
When the Multiline Terminal
goes off-hook (using the
handset, headset, or
speakerphone), this contact
is open.
When recorder owner
manual specifies start on
open circuit, connect T5 and
T6.
T6
Connect the shielded end of the
control cable.
Provides common
connection for control cable.
T7
Connect the bare end of the
control cable.
When the Multiline Terminal
is idle, this contact is open.
When the Multiline Terminal
is busy (using the handset,
headset, or speakerphone),
this contact is closed.
When recorder owner
manual specifies start on
closed circuit, connect T6
and T7.
T8
Unused
T9
Notes:
When recording in handsfree (half-duplex) mode using the built-in
speakerphone, the record warning tone may not be audible to the
far-end party.
The transmit recording level is lower than the receiving voice level for
intercom calls; the transmit recording level for CO calls is normal.
Depending on the recording device(s), separate cables may be
required for the warning tone and speech path. In this case, connect
the warning tone cables to input terminals T1 and T2 on the ADA-U
Unit. (T3 and T4 are used as the tape recorder input.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 11-1 ADA-U Cable Connections (Continued)
Notes:
When remote control of the recorder is necessary, the record start/stop
control is provided by connecting to T5 (or T7) and T6 on the ADA-U
Unit. (Connecting to T5 or T7 is determined by the specifications of the
recorder.)
When a warning Tone is provided from the recording equipment, it
should be input via T3 and T4 on ADA-U Unit. Do not use T1 and T2 to
input Beep Tone.
Conversations cannot be recorded from terminals connected to an
APR/APA-U Unit. Speakerphone calls through the HFU-U Unit cannot
be recorded.
3.2.3
Switch Settings
The DIP Switch is located at the bottom center of the ADA-U Unit.
The DIP Switch allows a technician to configure the board to specific
settings. Figure 11-14 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings shows the default
settings.
Terminals
Dip Switch
Default Settings
Figure 11-14 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 12
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
The following switch settings should be made on the ADA-U Unit to
enable or disable the record start warning tone. Switch settings
should be made before installing the ADA-U Unit in the Multiline
Terminal. Refer to Table 11-2 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings.
Table 11-2 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW1–1
On
When the ADA-U provides control to the
recorder, SW1-1 should be set to On,
otherwise set it to Off.
SW1–2
Off
Leave Off
SW1–3
and
SW1-4
SW1–3
SW1–4
ON
ON
SW1–3
SW1–4
OFF
OFF
Warning Tone from recorder or generator
equipment on dedicated wire pair to
recorder MIC input
SW1–5
SW1–6
Input impedance is 600 Ω
OFF
ON
SW1–5
SW1–6
ON
OFF
SW1–5
and
SW1–6
Warning Tone from recording device over
same wire pair as speech path.
Input impedance is less than 30Ω
SW1–7
ON
When warning tone from any device is
sent to telephone
SW1–8
Off
Leave Off
Do not connect T1 and T2 when switches SW1-3 and SW1-4 are
ON.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
APA-U Unit (Analog Port Adapter)
The Analog Port Adapter without Ringer is the interface for installing Single
Line Telephones, Modems, Credit Card Readers, Wireless Headsets, NEC
VoicePoint/VoicePoint Plus Conferencing unit, and other compatible analog
devices. The APA-U Unit does not generate a ringing signal. One
user-adjustable switch with two settings is provided on the adapter. Setting 1
allows impedance to be set to 600Ω for devices such as modems. Setting 2 is
used for complex impedance devices such as a Single Line Telephone.
This adapter can be installed on any DTP or DTU Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 TEL, DTP-16HC-1 TEL, or cordless terminals.
Figure 11-15 APA-U Unit
3.3.1
Installing APA-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1.
1.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation.
2.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the base
plate. Refer to Figure 11-16 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline
Terminal.
The APA-U Unit does not require an ACA-U Unit to
supply external power.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 14
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Close the base plate, and snap the cover in place.
Figure 11-16 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal
3.3.2
4.
Install a ferrite core (provided with the APA-U Unit) by looping
line cord through the core between the terminal (1 inch from the
terminal) and ESI(8)-U10 ETU. This core is only used with the
APA-U Unit.
5.
Plug the telephone cord in the jack.
Switch Settings
The APA-U Unit has one switch.
Figure 11-17 APA-U Unit Switches
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Refer to Table 11-3 APA-U Unit Switch Settings for SW3.
Table 11-3 APA-U Unit Switch Settings for SW3
Switch
3.3.3
Description
SW3–1
Sets impedance to 600Ω for devices such as
modems or facsimile machines
SW3–2
Used for complex impedance devices such as
Single Line Telephones.
Connecting Cables on the APA-U Unit
Plug the telephone cord from the Single Line Telephone into the
modular jack on the APA-U Unit. Refer to Figure 11-18 Connecting
Cables on the APA-U Unit.
Limit the cable length from the APA-U Unit to the Single Line
Telephone to a maximum of 50 feet.
Figure 11-18 Connecting Cables on the APA-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 16
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
APR-U Unit (Analog Port Ringer)
The Analog Port Adapter with Ringing is the interface for installing Single Line
Telephones, modems, NEC VoicePoint/VoicePoint Plus Conferencing unit,
and other compatible analog devices. The APR-U Unit also generates ringing
signals. By providing ring generation, the user can install a personal fax
machine or an answering machine for convenience.
Two user-adjustable switches are provided on the adapter; one allows for
600Ω or a complex impedance interface to devices such as a modem or
Single Line Telephone, the second switch (SW1) is set to position 2. When
this Analog Port Ringer adapter is used, an additional Single Line Telephone
or a modem can be connected to an Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal.
If a CTA-U, CTU(S)-U, or HFU-U and an APR-U Unit are both installed, only
one AC Adapter is required.
This adapter can be installed on any DTP or DTU Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 TEL, DTP-16HC-1 TEL, or Cordless terminals.
ACA-U Unit
(AC Adapter)
Figure 11-19 APR-U Unit
3.4.1
Installing an APR-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1.
1.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation.
2.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the base
plate. Refer to Figure 11-20 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline
Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-20 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal
3.
Plug the cord of the ACA-U Unit (AC adapter) into the jack on
the APR-U Unit. Lead the telephone cord out through the
groove in the base as shown in Figure 11-21 Leading the
Telephone Cord out from the Unit.
Figure 11-21 Leading the Telephone Cord out from the Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 18
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Close the base plate, lead the AC adapter cord out through the
hole, and snap the cover in place.
Figure 11-22 Closing the Base Plate Cover
3.4.2
5.
Install a ferrite core (provided with the APR-U Unit) by looping
line cord through the core between the terminal (1 inch from the
terminal) and ESI(8)-U10 ETU. This core is only used with the
APR-U Unit.
6.
Plug in the power cord on the AC adapter and the telephone
cord in the jack.
Switch Settings
The APR-U Unit has two switches.
Figure 11-23 APR-U Unit Switches
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Refer to Table 11-4 APR-U Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3.
Table 11-4 APR-U Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3
Switch
Description
SW1–1
Do not use
SW1–2
A Single Line Telephone and Multiline Terminal are used
alternately.
(The Multiline Terminal and the APR-U Unit share the same
B1 channel.)
3.4.3
SW3–1
Sets impedance to 600Ω for devices such as modems or
facsimile machines.
SW3–2
Used for complex impedance devices such as Single Line
Telephones.
Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit
Plug the telephone cord from the Single Line Telephone in the
modular jack on the APR-U Unit.
Limit the cable length from the APR-U Unit to the Single Line
Telephone to a maximum of 50 feet.
Figure 11-24 Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 20
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.5
CTA-U Unit (Computer Telephony Application)
Computer Telephony Application allows a DTU or DTP Multiline Terminal to
be connected to a PC using the TAPI (Microsoft Telephony Application
Programming Interface) adapter. The PC can perform all Multiline Terminal
functions using a TAPI-compatible application software.
This adapter can be installed on any DTU or DTP Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 TEL, DTP-16HC-1 TEL, or Cordless Terminals.
Figure 11-25 Attaching an Electra Elite Multiline Terminal to a PC
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The CTA-U Unit is attached to the bottom of any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal
except DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1.
ACA-U Unit
(AC Adapter)
Figure 11-26 CTA-U Unit
3.5.1
Installing the CTA-U Unit
1.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation. Refer to
Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation.
2.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the base plate
on the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Figure 11-27 Attaching the
Unit to the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 11-27 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal
3.
Close the base plate.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 22
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.5.2
Connecting the Cables on the CTA-U Unit
Connect the RS-232C cable from the computer to the connector on
the CTA-U Unit as shown in Figure 11-28 Connecting the RS-232C
Cable to the CTA-U Unit on the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 11-28 Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-U Unit on
the Multiline Terminal
3.5.3
Installing the Driver on the PC
Using the setup disk provided with the CTA-U Unit install the driver
on your PC. Refer to the CTA installation Guide for instructions on
installing CTA setup disks.
3.6
Computer Telephony Adapter, CTU(8)-U Unit, with USB Interface
The CTU adapter connects to a PC USB port to provide telephony and sound
device control. The general functions of the CTU include:
J
Telephony Control
The application is based on the Microsoft Telephony Application
Programming Interface (TAPI) and provides call handling on the PC
(e.g., call, answer, Hold, Transfer, Conference, or Caller ID).
J
User Interface to support Dterm Emulation
This function provides the functions of Dterm such as normal telephone
indications, LCD, Line keys, or Hookswitch.
J
Sound Support
Allows voice recording or recording playing on an audio device assigned
to the PC. Voice Mail and Live Record are supported on the PC.
J
Supports Plug and Play
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
Headset Operation
When user uses CTU and TAPI and sets data for Telephony Service
Provider (TSP), the headset button can be controlled by TSP.
J
USB Interface
This adapter uses Full Speed (12Mbps) as defined in the USB
Specification.
3.6.1
CTU(S) Unit Connections
This unit is a Computer Telephony Application adapter to connect a
Universal Serial Bus to an ESI(8)-U( ) ETU and can be connected to
any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal except DTP-2DT-1, DTP-16HC-1 or
Cordless terminals.
A required AC Adapter is provided with the unit.
The following connections are required:
H
H
H
H
AC Adapter
Multiline Terminal jack labeled LINE
PC USB port
ESI port to ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
DC 24V (ADP)
USB Cable to PC
To ESI Port
To DTU or DTP Multiline Terminal
Figure 11-29 CTU (S)-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 24
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7
DBM(B)-U( ) Box and DBM(E)-U( ) Box Message Display Boards
The DBM(B)-U( ) basic Message Display Board is connected to the
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU to provide a message waiting LED for voice mailboxes of
personnel without a normal telephone. Each board has eight message waiting
LEDs, and up to eight boards can be installed in the Electra Elite IPK system
to support 64 LEDs.
The DBM(E)-U( )expansion Message Display Board has eight message
waiting LEDs and is connected to the DBM(B)-U( ) or another expansion
board. Each DBM(B)-U( ) basic board can support up to five expansion
boards and 40 additional LEDs.
The total number of LEDs is 384, but the Electra Elite IPK system can only
support up to 200 mailbox indications. Multiple locations of the same mailbox
are permitted. Refer to Figure 11-30 DBM(B)-U( ) and DBM(E)-U( ) Message
Display Boards and Figure 11-31 Maximum Display Indications.
Figure 11-30 DBM(B)-U( ) and DBM(E)-U( ) Message Display Boards
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-31 Maximum Display Indications
3.7.1
Connecting DBM(E)-U( ) Box to DBM(B)-U( ) Box or Another
DBM(E)-U10 Box
1.
Use wire cutters to remove the cutout on right side of
DBM(B)/(E) cover. Refer to Figure 11-32 Removing Cutout.
Place the provided edge protector on the top of the cutout.
Figure 11-32 Removing Cutout
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 26
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Remove the display plate from DBM(B)/(E) and DBM(E), and
peel off the cover sheet on both.
3.
Insert protruding side of the cable from the DBM(E) in DBM(B)
CN7 or in CN7 of the previous DBM(E).
4.
Slide the bracket on DBM(E) being installed into the groves on
DBM(B)/(E) and tighten the nuts and bolts. Refer to Figure
11-33 Connecting the Bracket.
Figure 11-33 Connecting the Bracket
5.
Ensure that the internal end of the cable is connected to
DBM(E) CN2.
6.
3.7.2
The second expansion board must have this cable
connected internally to DBM(E) CN3 and externally to the
first DBM(E) CN7. The third, fourth, and fifth expansion
board cables are connected externally to the previous
DBM(E) CN7 and internally to CN4, CN5, and CN6
respectively.
After all expansion boards are connected, place the white
cover sheets back on the DBM(B)-U( ) and all expansion
boards, and install the display panels.
Wall Mounting DBM(B)-U( ) and Expansion Boards
1.
Refer to the template, and thread the included screw into the
wall at location for the top hole of the DBM(B)-U( ) Box. Leave
screw extended 1/8 inch. Refer to Figure 11-34 Threading
Screw into Wall.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-34 Threading Screw into Wall
2.
Place hole for mounting over the screw, and Hang the
DBM(B)-U( ) on the screw. Refer to Figure 11-35 Hanging
DBM(B)-U( ) on Screw.
Figure 11-35 Hanging DBM(B)-U( ) on Screw
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 28
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Remove the display panel to access screws, and thread the in
place bottom screws on the outside boards into the wall. Refer
to Figure 11-36 Installing Bottom Screws.
Figure 11-36 Installing Bottom Screws
4.
Tighten the top screw on the DBM(B)-U( ) Box.
3.7.3
When four or five expansion boards are used, install the
bottom screw on the middle unit as well.
Connecting the DBM(B) to Power and ESI
1.
Refer to Figure 11-37 Connecting DBM(B)-U( ), and connect
the provided AC Adapter to the DBM(B)-U( ).
Figure 11-37 Connecting DBM(B)-U( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Connect the line cable to the DBM(B)-U( ).
3.
Place the clamp around the cables, insert the clamp screw, and
attach clamp to the DBM(B)-U( ).
4.
Refer to Figure 11-38 Connecting DBM(B)-U( ) to ESI Port, and
connect the display board system to ESI.
Figure 11-38 Connecting DBM(B)-U( ) to ESI Port
3.8
HFU-U Unit (Handsfree Unit)
The Handsfree Unit provides full-duplex handsfree communication. Large
areas may cause poor full-duplex operation. This unit comes with the
handsfree adapter and an external microphone.
This adapter can be installed on any DTP or DTU Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 TEL or DTP-16HC-1 TEL.
Figure 11-39 HFU-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 30
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.1
Installing an HFU-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal (except
DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1)
With terminal upside down, facing from the bottom of the open cover,
install this unit in Telephone Slot 1.
Refer to 3.4.1 Installing an APR-U Unit on any DTU/DTP Multiline
Terminal except DTP-2DT-1 and DTP-16HC-1. The instructions for
installing these units are the same.
3.8.2
Installing the External Microphone
An external microphone can be installed on the HFU-U Unit. These
instructions apply to the external microphone obtained from NEC.
The microphone is equipped with a mute button.
Figure 11-40 Microphone with Mute
1.
Plug the microphone cord into the jack on the HFU-U Unit as
shown in Figure 11-41 Attaching a Microphone to a Multiline
Terminal.
The microphone should be between one foot and three
feet away from the Multiline Terminal.
Minimum 1 Foot
from Multiline
Figure 11-41 Attaching a Microphone to a Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.8.3
Switch Settings
The HFU-U Unit uses 2-position switches SW1 and SW2.
Figure 11-42 HFU-U(BK)/(WH) Unit Switches
Refer to Table 11-5 HFU-U Unit Switch Settings.
Table 11-5 HFU-U Unit Switch Settings
SW1
SW2
Description
Position
1
Position
2
Position
1
Position
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Full Duplex (Default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Half Duplex (6db mix ratio)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Half Duplex (12db mix ratio)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Half Duplex (18db mix ratio)
Full Duplex: In some large areas or noisy locations half duplex should
be used. The echo canceling ability of the HFU-U is limited.
Half Duplex: When voice clipping occurs, use a lower decibel setting.
3.9
SLT(1)-U10 ADP (Single Line Telephone)
The Single Line Telephone adapter provides an interface for Single Line
Telephones and other similar devices from an ESI ETU channel.
This adapter can be connected to any ESI port except 01 and 02.
3.9.1
Connecting the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP to the System
1.
Connect one end of the RJ-11 to the ESI port on the KSU and
one end to the ESI jack on the SLT Adapter.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 32
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Connect one end of a second RJ-11 to the TEL jack on the SLT
Adapter and the other end to the Single Line Telephone.
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
TEL
ESI
RJ-11
RJ-11
2-wire
2-wire
ESI
Figure 11-43 Connecting a Single Line Telephone to the
System using an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Modular Terminal
ESI ETU
GN
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
Y
3
T
R
To ESI
4
RD
BL
Base
Cord
ESI Port
Modular Terminal Connections
Single Line Telephone Connections
Figure 11-44 Connecting the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 34
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9.2
Wall Mounting the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
1.
Remove the two screws from the top to open the SLT Adapter
as shown in Figure 11-45 Removing the Screws from the
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP.
Figure 11-45 Removing the Screws from the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
2.
Using the two provided wood screws, attach the unit to the wall.
Close the unit and secure with the two screws that were
previously removed.
Figure 11-46 Attaching the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP to the Wall
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
Wall Mounting
Any Electra Elite Multiline Terminal can be mounted on a wall. Multiline
Terminals can be wall mounted by using the base unit that comes with the
Multiline Terminal or by using the WMU-U Unit to accommodate adapters that
are installed on the Multiline Terminal.
The Wall Mount Unit is required when an APA-U, APR-U, CTA-U, CTU(S)-U
or HFU-U Unit is installed.
3.10.1
Removing and Remounting the Handset Hanger
1.
Remove the hanger by sliding it out of the slot. (Refer to Figure
11-47 Positioning the Handset Hanger.)
2.
Install it back in its original position so that the hanger
protrudes providing a rest for the handset. (This procedure
applies when using either the base unit or the WMU-U Unit.)
Refer to Figure 11-47 Positioning the Handset Hanger for the
steps for removing and remounting the handset hanger.
A
B
Figure 11-47 Positioning the Handset Hanger
3.10.2
Wall Mounting using the Base Unit
1.
Refer to Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter
Installation, and perform Steps 1~5.
2.
Press both sides of the base cover and turn it left to remove it.
3.
Rotate base cover 180°, and install it again on the Multiline
Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 36
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Remove the shaded base plate knockout shown on Figure
11-48 Removing the Knockout.
Figure 11-48 Removing the Knockout
5.
Assemble the base plate and base cover.
6.
As illustrated in Figure 11-49 Attaching the Base Plate to the
Wall, attach the base plate and base cover assembly (wide end
down) to the posts on the locally provided and installed wall
plate. Place locally provided screws in the nodes on the base
plate and secure the assembly to the wall.
Nodes
Posts
Nodes
Figure 11-49 Attaching the Base Plate to the Wall
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.
Plug the line cord into the jack on the wall plate, wrap the extra
cord and secure it with a tie wrap, and lead the line cord out
through the groove in the side of the base unit.
Figure 11-50 Plugging in the Line Cord using a Wall Jack
8.
When using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, plug the line
cord into the modular jack, wrap the extra cord and secure it
with a tie wrap, and lead the line cord out through the groove in
the side of the base unit.
Figure 11-51 Plugging in the Line Cord Using a Modular Jack
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 38
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
9.
With the base unit attached to the wall, hook the two bottom
tabs in the tab slots on the Multiline Terminal base.
Base Unit
Multiline
Terminal
Line Cord
Wall
Tab
Tab Slots
Figure 11-52 Attaching the Bottom Tabs of the Multiline
Terminal to the Base Plate
10.
Push up on the Terminal and lock the top base unit tabs in the
top slots on the terminal . Figure 11-53 Attaching the Top Tabs
of the Multiline Terminal to the Base Plate shows how the
Multiline Terminal is attached.
Tab Slots
Multiline Terminal
Tabs
Line Cord
Wall
Wall Mount Unit
Figure 11-53
Attaching the Top Tabs of the Multiline
Terminal to the Base Plate
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
11.
When properly installed, the wall-mounted Multiline Terminal
looks similar to the one shown in Figure 11-54 Installed Wall
Mount Unit.
Do not adjust the tilt panel after the Multiline Terminal is
mounted on the wall.
Figure 11-54 Installed Wall Mount Unit
3.10.3
Installing the Wall Mount Unit and Mounting the Multiline Terminal
using the WMU-U Unit
When installing any Adapter unit, a separate WMU-U Unit must be
purchased to accommodate this unit.
1.
Remove the line cord, base plate and base cover from the
Multiline Terminal as shown in the previous section.
2.
Cut off the tabs on the adapter as shown in Figure 11-55
Removing the Tabs from the Adapter.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 40
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11-55 Removing the Tabs from the Adapter
3.
Remove the tabs from the WMU-U Unit as shown in Figure
11-56 Removing the Tabs from the WMU-U Unit. (The Tabs that
are removed depend on the Multiline Terminal type.)
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
DTU/DTP-8-1 TEL
DTP-8D-1/DTU-8D-2 TEL
DTU/DTP-16-1 TEL
DTP-16D-1/DTU-16D-2TEL
DCU-60-1 CONSOLE
DTU/DTP-32-1 TEL
DTP-32D-1/DTU-32D-2 TEL
Figure 11-56 Removing the Tabs from the WMU-U Unit
4.
Bundle the cord from the modular jack leaving about eight
inches. Use a tie wrap to secure the bundled cord.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Place the bundled line cord between the WMU-U Unit and the
wall. Lead the line cord out through the slits as shown in Figure
11-57 Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-U Unit.
Figure 11-57 Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-U Unit
6.
Attach the WMU-U Unit to the posts on the wall plate (locally
provided). Place locally provided screws in the nodes on the
WMU-U Unit and secure the WMU-U Unit to the wall.
Nodes
Posts
Nodes
Figure 11-58 Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall
7.
Connect the line cord to the Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 42
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.
With the WMU-U Unit attached to the wall, hook the two bottom
tabs on the WMU-U Mount Unit in the tab slots on the Multiline
Terminal. Then push the two top tabs on the WMU-U Unit into
the tab slots on the Multiline Terminal. When the adapter has a
power supply, lead the AC adapter cord out through the
opening at the bottom of the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Figure
11-59 Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the WMU-U Unit.
WMU-U Unit
Multiline
Terminal
Adapter
Tab Slots
Wall
Figure 11-59 Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the WMU-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
11 - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.4
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Plate
To remove the Multiline Terminal from the base cover, lift the Multiline
Terminal to disengage top tabs, turn it slightly counter clockwise to
unlock lower tabs on base cover, and remove it.
Figure 11-60 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Plate
3.10.5
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the WMU-U Unit
To remove the Multiline Terminal from the WMU-U Unit, lift the
Multiline Terminal to disengage top tabs and lower the terminal from
the WMU-U Unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 44
Installing Electra Elite Optional Terminal Equipment
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ..................................................................................... 12-1
Section 2
Single Line Telephones ............................................................................... 12-1
Section 3
2.1
DTR-1-1 TEL ............................................................................................. 12-1
2.2
DTR-1HM-1 TEL ....................................................................................... 12-3
Wall Mounting DTR-1-1 TEL/DTR-1HM-1 TEL Single
Line Telephones ........................................................................................... 12-5
3.1
Adjusting the Hanger Hook ....................................................................... 12-5
3.1.1
Section 4
Wall Mounting the Telephone ............................................................. 12-6
3.2
Using Hanger Hooks on the Single Line Telephone ................................. 12-8
3.3
DTP-1-1 TEL/ DTP-1-2 TEL ...................................................................... 12-9
3.4
DTP-1HM-1/ DTP-1HM-2 TEL ................................................................ 12-10
Wall Mounting the DTP-1-1 or DTP-1-2 TEL and
DTP-1HM-1 or DTP-1HM-2 TEL .................................................................. 12-11
4.1
Hanger Hook ........................................................................................... 12-11
4.2
Using Installed Modular Wall Plate ......................................................... 12-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 12-1
DTR-1-1 TEL Single Line Telephone ....................................................................... 12-2
Figure 12-2
DTR-1HM-1 TEL Single Line Telephone .................................................................. 12-4
Figure 12-3
Removing the Hanger Hook on a Single Line Telephone ........................................ 12-5
Figure 12-4
Sliding the Hanger Hook on a Single Line Telephone into Position ......................... 12-5
Figure 12-5
Removing the Metal Base ........................................................................................ 12-6
Figure 12-6
Reattaching the Metal Base ..................................................................................... 12-7
Figure 12-7
Hanger Hooks on the Single Line Telephone ........................................................... 12-8
Figure 12-8
DTP-1-1 TEL Single Line Telephone ....................................................................... 12-9
Figure 12-9
DTP-1HM-1 TEL Single Line Telephone ................................................................ 12-10
Figure 12-10
Removing the DTP Telephone Hanger Hook ......................................................... 12-11
Figure 12-11
Turning the Hook Over ........................................................................................... 12-11
Figure 12-12
Sliding the Hook into Position ................................................................................. 12-12
Figure 12-13
Removing the Screws ............................................................................................ 12-12
Figure 12-14
Replacing the Plate and Screw .............................................................................. 12-13
Figure 12-15
Protruding Screws .................................................................................................. 12-13
Figure 12-16
Mounting the Telephone ......................................................................................... 12-14
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures
Installing Single
Line Telephones
Chapter 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Electra Elite IPK system supports several different Single Line Telephones.
(
DTR-1-1 TEL/DTR-1HM-1 TEL
Both of the Electra Elite IPK DTR Single Line Telephones come in black or
white.
(
DTP-1-1 TEL/ DTP-1HM-1 TEL
Both the DTP-1-1 TEL and DTP-1HM-1 TEL come in black or white.
SECTION 2
SINGLE LINE TELEPHONES
2.1
DTR-1-1 TEL
The DTR-1-1TEL is a fully modular terminal that has DTMF and Pulse Dialing
compatibilities and offers Flash key, redial key functionality. A Message
Waiting Indicator, that also functions as Incoming Call Indication, is a standard
feature of this telephone. This telephone comes equipped with a 6-level
receive volume control (3 increased levels and 2 decreased levels), a 4-level
ring volume control (Off, Soft, Medium, Loud) and three ring patterns (Slow,
Medium, Fast). The DTR-1-1 TEL has a data port and a built-in wall mount
adapter.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 24 DTR-1-1 TELs can be installed. The total number of all
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 112 DTR-1-1 TELs can be installed. The total number of all
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Each terminal requires an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP or SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU.
The volume up/down setting for the receive volume control should only be used
by hearing impaired individuals, otherwise hearing damage may occur. This
telephone complies with HAC (Hearing Aid Compatible) volume control defined
by section 68.317 of the FCC Rules and Regulations, 1996 edition.
Figure 12-1 DTR-1-1 TEL Single Line Telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 2
Installing Single Line Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
The DTR-1HM-1 TEL is a fully modular terminal that has DTMF and Pulse
Dialing abilities and offers Flash key and Redial key functionality. A Message
Waiting Indicator, that also functions as an Incoming Call Indicator, is a
standard feature of this telephone. The DTR-1HM-1 TEL has eight
programmable speed dial buttons and has Hold and monitor function keys.
This telephone comes equipped with a 6-level receive volume control
(3 increase levels and 2 decrease levels), a 4-level ring volume control (Off,
Soft, Medium, Loud) and three ring patterns (Slow, Medium, Fast). The
DTR-1HM-1 TEL has a data port and a built-in wall mount adapter.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 24 DTR-1HM-1 TELs can be installed. The total number of all
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 112 DTR-1HM-1 TELs can be installed. The total number of all
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Each terminal requires an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP or SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU.
The volume up/down setting for the receive volume control should only be used
by hearing impaired individuals, otherwise hearing damage may occur. This
telephone complies with HAC (Hearing Aid Compatible) volume control defined
by section 68.317 of the FCC Rules and Regulations, 1996 edition.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 12-2 DTR-1HM-1 TEL Single Line Telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 4
Installing Single Line Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
WALL MOUNTING DTR-1-1 TEL/DTR-1HM-1 TEL SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONES
Single Line Telephones are wall mounted using the metal base that comes attached
to the telephone.
3.1
Adjusting the Hanger Hook
1.
Remove the hook from the unit.
Hanger Hook
Figure 12-3 Removing the Hanger Hook on a Single Line Telephone
2.
Turn the hook with the tab toward the top.
3.
Slide the hook in the slot to form the hanger hook for the handset.
Figure 12-4 Sliding the Hanger Hook on a Single Line Telephone into
Position
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.1
Wall Mounting the Telephone
1.
Remove the metal base from the telephone by removing the
two screws as illustrated in Figure 12-5 Removing the Metal
Base.
Note Position of Tabs
Figure 12-5 Removing the Metal Base
2.
Lift the metal plate and note the direction of the tabs so that
they can be correctly reversed.
3.
Flip the metal base around as illustrated in Figure 12-6
Reattaching the Metal Base. Insert the tabs into the receptacles
marked (A) and reattach to the telephone using the two screws
that were previously removed.
Because of manufacturing variations in wall-mount brackets,
installing the terminal wall mount with optional screws offers the
most reliable fit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 6
Installing Single Line Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 12-6 Reattaching the Metal Base
4.
Hang the telephone on the wall by sliding the holes in the metal
base over the wall posts.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Using Hanger Hooks on the Single Line Telephone
Once the Single Line Telephone has been wall mounted, the handset can be
hung from one of two hanger hooks.
When the handset is placed on the hanger hook, located below the switchook,
the telephone is on-hook.
Hanging the handset from the hook located on the top of the telephone
(labeled (C) in the diagram) allows the telephone to remain off-hook.
Figure 12-7 Hanger Hooks on the Single Line Telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 8
Installing Single Line Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
DTP-1-1 TEL/ DTP-1-2 TEL
The DTP Single Line Telephone is a fully modular terminal with a Flash key,
Redial key, 3-level receive volume control, 2-level ring volume control, data
jack, and message waiting lamp.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 24 DTP-1-1 or DTP-1-2 TELs can be installed. The total
number of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 112 DTP-1-1 or DTP-1-2 TELs can be installed. The total
number of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Each terminal requires an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP or SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 12-8 DTP-1-1 TEL Single Line Telephone
The H switch setting for the receive volume control should only be used
by hearing impaired individuals, otherwise hearing damage may occur.
This telephone complies with HAC (Hearing Aid Compatible) volume
control defined by section 68.317 of the FCC Rules and Regulations,
1996 edition.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
DTP-1HM-1/ DTP-1HM-2 TEL
The Single Line Telephone is a fully modular terminal with a Flash key, Redial
key, 3-level receive volume control, 2-level ring volume control, data jack,
message waiting lamp, and eight programmable Feature Access/Speed Dial
keys.
Basic Port Package
A maximum of 24 DTP-1HM-1 or DTP-1HM-2 TELs can be installed. The total
number of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 32.
Expanded Port Package
A maximum of 112 DTP-1HM-1 or DTP-1HM-2 TELs can be installed. The
total number of all Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that can be installed is 120.
Each terminal requires an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP or SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 12-9 DTP-1HM-1 TEL Single Line Telephone
The H switch setting for the receive volume control should only be used
by hearing impaired individuals, otherwise hearing damage may occur.
This telephone complies with HAC (Hearing Aid Compatible) volume
control defined by section 68.317 of the FCC Rules and Regulations,
1996 edition.
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 10
Installing Single Line Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
WALL MOUNTING THE DTP-1-1 OR DTP-1-2 TEL AND DTP-1HM-1 OR
DTP-1HM-2 TEL
4.1
Hanger Hook
1.
Remove the hook from the unit.
Figure 12-10 Removing the DTP Telephone Hanger Hook
2.
Turn the hook over (back to the front) with the tab toward the top.
Figure 12-11 Turning the Hook Over
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Slide the hook on its glides back down into position forming the hanger
hook for the handset.
Figure 12-12 Sliding the Hook into Position
4.2
Using Installed Modular Wall Plate
1.
Unscrew the three screws on the unit to remove the plate.
Figure 12-13 Removing the Screws
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 12
Installing Single Line Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Replace the plate and screw in the two positions. (One remaining screw
can be screwed in at the original third position.)
Figure 12-14 Replacing the Plate and Screw
3.
Loosen the screws on the wall telephone plate to protrude a bit.
Figure 12-15 Protruding Screws
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
12 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Install the telephone with the plate on the protruding screws.
Figure 12-16 Mounting the Telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 14
Installing Single Line Telephones
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 13
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
General Information ..................................................................................... 13-1
Section 2
Radio Frequency Interference ..................................................................... 13-1
Section 3
Dterm ® Headset Cordless Terminal ............................................................ 13-1
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Section 7
3.1
Description ................................................................................................ 13-1
3.2
Selecting an Installation Location .............................................................. 13-2
3.3
Connecting the Base Unit ......................................................................... 13-3
Dterm ® Cordless Lite or Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal ............................... 13-5
4.1
Description ................................................................................................ 13-5
4.2
Selecting an Installation Location .............................................................. 13-7
4.3
Connecting the Telephone Cords ............................................................. 13-7
4.4
Applying Power to the Base Unit ............................................................... 13-7
Installing Dterm ® Handset Cordless Terminal ........................................... 13-9
5.1
Description ................................................................................................ 13-9
5.2
Selecting an Installation Location .............................................................. 13-9
5.3
Connecting the Telephone Cord ............................................................... 13-9
5.4
Applying Power to the Base Unit ............................................................. 13-10
Installing a Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal ........................................ 13-11
6.1
Description .............................................................................................. 13-11
6.2
Selecting an Installation Location ............................................................ 13-11
6.3
Connecting the Telephone Cord ............................................................. 13-12
6.4
Applying Power to the Base Unit ............................................................. 13-12
Dterm ® PS II ................................................................................................. 13-13
7.1
Description .............................................................................................. 13-13
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 8
Dterm Cordless Lite II ................................................................................. 13-14
8.1
Description ............................................................................................. 13-14
8.2
Installing the Dterm Cordless Lite II ......................................................... 13-14
8.2.1 Selecting a Location ......................................................................... 13-14
8.2.2
Controls and Indicators ..................................................................... 13-14
8.3
Installation Precautions .......................................................................... 13-17
8.4
Connecting the Telephone Cords ........................................................... 13-17
8.5
Applying Power to the Charging Unit ..................................................... 13-18
8.6
Wall Installation ...................................................................................... 13-19
8.6.1 Standard Wall Plate Mounting .......................................................... 13-19
8.7
Direct Wall Mounting .............................................................................. 13-22
8.8
Charging Unit Wall Mounting .................................................................. 13-24
8.9
Attaching and Removing the Belt Clip .................................................... 13-25
8.10
Installing the Handset Battery Pack ....................................................... 13-26
8.11
Charging the Handset Battery Pack ....................................................... 13-27
8.12
Battery Hot Swap ................................................................................... 13-27
8.13
Low Battery Indications .......................................................................... 13-28
8.13.1 Standby Mode .................................................................................. 13-28
8.13.2 Talk Mode ......................................................................................... 13-28
8.14
Cleaning the Battery Charge Contacts ................................................... 13-29
8.15
Antenna .................................................................................................. 13-29
8.16
NEC Conference Max Plus .................................................................... 13-30
8.16.1 Dual Wireless Conferencing System ................................................ 13-30
8.16.2 Installing the Base Unit ..................................................................... 13-31
8.16.3 Connecting And Charging Batteries ................................................. 13-31
8.16.4 Keypad Functions ............................................................................. 13-32
8.16.5 Programming Options ....................................................................... 13-32
8.16.6 Compliance ....................................................................................... 13-33
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List of Figures and Tables
Chapter 13
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13-1
Dterm Headset Cordless Telephone ......................................................................... 13-2
Figure 13-2
Connecting the Dterm Headset Cordless Base Unit to the Adapter .......................... 13-3
Figure 13-3
Raising the Antenna on the Dterm Headset Cordless Base Unit .............................. 13-3
Figure 13-4
Connecting the Dterm Headset Cordless Telephone Cord to the AP(R)-R Unit ....... 13-4
Figure 13-5
Dterm Cordless Lite Terminal .................................................................................... 13-6
Figure 13-6
Dterm Cordless II ....................................................................................................... 13-6
Figure 13-7
Connecting the Base Unit ......................................................................................... 13-8
Figure 13-8
Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal .......................................................................... 13-10
Figure 13-9
Dterm Analog Cordless Terminal ............................................................................. 13-11
Figure 13-10
Dterm PS II Wireless Terminal ................................................................................ 13-13
Figure 13-11
Dterm Cordless Lite II Controls and Indicators ........................................................ 13-15
Figure 13-12
Connecting Base Unit to the Telephone Jack ........................................................ 13-17
Figure 13-13
Connecting the Base Unit to the Multiline Terminal ............................................... 13-18
Figure 13-14
Applying Power to the Charging Unit ..................................................................... 13-18
Figure 13-15
Polarized Plug ........................................................................................................ 13-19
Figure 13-16
Attaching the Wall Mount Stand to the Base Unit .................................................. 13-20
Figure 13-17
Placing the AC Adapter Cord In the Wall Mount Stand .......................................... 13-20
Figure 13-18
Placing the Base Unit on the Posts of the Wall Plate ............................................. 13-21
Figure 13-19
Plugging the AC Adapter into the AC Wall Outlet .................................................. 13-21
Figure 13-20
Inserting Screws into the Wall for Wall Mounting the Telephone ........................... 13-22
Figure 13-21
Placing the Telephone Cords in the Wall Mount Stand .......................................... 13-23
Figure 13-22
Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall .............................................................. 13-23
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13-23
Inserting Screws for Wall Mounting ........................................................................ 13-24
Figure 13-24
Wrapping AC Adapter Cord Around the Strain Relief Clip ..................................... 13-24
Figure 13-25
Attaching the Belt Clip to the Handset ................................................................... 13-25
Figure 13-26
Removing the Belt Clip ........................................................................................... 13-25
Figure 13-27
Removing the Battery Cover .................................................................................. 13-26
Figure 13-28
Replacing the Battery Pack .................................................................................... 13-26
Figure 13-29
Replacing the Battery Cover .................................................................................. 13-27
Table 13-1
Low Battery ............................................................................................................ 13-28
Figure 13-30
Cleaning Battery Charge Contacts ......................................................................... 13-29
Figure 13-31
Raising the Base Unit Antenna .............................................................................. 13-29
Figure 13-32
NEC Conference Max Plus .................................................................................... 13-30
Table 13-2
Keypad Functions .................................................................................................. 13-32
Table 13-3
Programming Options ............................................................................................ 13-32
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Figures and Tables
Installing Cordless
and Wireless Telephones
Chapter 13
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter provides information regarding cordless telephones which can be used
in conjunction with the Electra Elite IPK system.
SECTION 2
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
When using these cordless RF devices some interference can take place when
operating the cordless telephones in the same environment as other wireless devices
that operate in the same frequency spectrum.
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used
without interference varies.
SECTION 3
Dterm ® HEADSET CORDLESS TERMINAL
3.1
Description
The Dterm Headset Cordless telephone is a convenient, pocket-sized
telephone that allows the user to speak and listen in handsfree mode. This
telephone has a 3-line, 16-character backlit handset display. Tone/Pulse
dialing, handset ear piece and ringer volume control, up to 100 phonebook
locations, one-touch dialing, mute, flash, pause, handset find, are some of the
features that this telephone provides. Two headsets, a belt clip and holster are
also included with this telephone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
This telephone has a 2.4 GHz frequency range and provides secure
conversation and reduces interference from other cordless telephones.
Figure 13-1 Dterm Headset Cordless Telephone
3.2
Selecting an Installation Location
Before choosing a location for your new telephone, there are some important
guidelines you should consider:
J
J
J
J
The location should be close to both a telephone jack and continuous
power outlet. (A continuous power outlet is an AC outlet which does not
have a switch to interrupt its power.)
Keep the base and handset away from sources of electrical noise such
as motors or fluorescent lighting.
Be sure there is sufficient space to fully extend the base antenna.
The base can be placed on a desk or tabletop or mounted on a standard
telephone wall plate.
You should charge your new telephone for 15~20 hours before completing the
installation or using the handset.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 2
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
Connecting the Base Unit
1.
Connect the AC adapter to the DC IN 9 V jack and to a standard 120V
AC wall outlet.
Route the cord
To AC Outlet
To DC IN 9V
AC Adapter
(supplied)
Figure 13-2 Connecting the Dterm Headset Cordless Base Unit to
the Adapter
2.
Set the base on a desk or tabletop, and place the handset in the base
unit as shown.
Figure 13-3 Raising the Antenna on the Dterm Headset Cordless
Base Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Raise the antenna to a vertical position.
4.
Make sure the status LED illuminates. If the LED does not illuminate,
check to see that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the handset
makes good contact with the base charging contacts.
J
J
J
J
5.
Use only the supplied AC adapter (730627). Do not use any other
AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter to a continuous power supply.
Place the base unit close to the AC outlet so that you can unplug
the AC adapter easily.
After installing the battery pack in the handset, charge the handset
at least three to five hours before plugging it into the telephone line.
Connect the telephone line cord to the TEL LINE jack and the other end
into the AP(R)-R Unit. Refer to paragraph 3.3 AP(A)-R Unit/AP(R)-R Unit
(Port Adapters) on page 9-14 for detailed instructions for installing the
AP(R)-R Unit. This unit can also be connected using an SLI(4)/(8)-U( )
ETU.
AP(R)-R Unit
To TEL LINE
Telephone Line Cord
(supplied)
Figure 13-4 Connecting the Dterm Headset Cordless Telephone Cord
to the AP(R)-R Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 4
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Place the power cord so that it does not create a trip hazard or where it could
become chafed and create a fire or electrical hazard.
Observe the following warnings during installation:
J
J
J
SECTION 4
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Dterm ® CORDLESS LITE OR Dterm ® CORDLESS II TERMINAL
4.1
Description
Dterm Cordless Lite
This Dterm Cordless Lite Terminal can be connected to the Electra Elite IPK
System using a tandem connection to a Multiline Terminal. The terminal has a
16-digit, 2-line LCD, dial pad, talk key, chan key, hold key, transfer key, conf
key, mute key, vol key, a msg icon, vibrator, and four function keys with red
LEDs.
In an ideal state, the cordless terminal can be switched to the Multiline
Terminal connected to it by pressing the Desk key on the base unit of the idle
Dterm Cordless Lite Terminal.
Dterm Cordless II
The Dterm Cordless II terminal uses 900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum (DSS)
Technology and is connected in tandem to a Multiline Terminal.
In an ideal state, this terminal can be switched between cordless and the
Multiline Terminal connected to it using a key on the base unit or handset.
This terminal has a 16-digit by 2-line LCD Display.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13-5 Dterm Cordless Lite Terminal
Figure 13-6 Dterm Cordless II
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 6
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.2
Selecting an Installation Location
Select a location to avoid excessive heat or humidity. The base unit should be
placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120 Vac outlet and within reach
of the telephone line connection on the Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal.
Keep the base unit and the handset away from sources of electrical noise (e.g.
fluorescent lighting).
4.3
Connecting the Telephone Cords
The Dterm Cordless Lite or Cordless II terminal is connected to the telephone
line and to the host telephone using two telephone line jacks on the back of
the Base Unit: LINE IN and LINE OUT.
Observe the following warnings during installation:
J
J
J
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
To connect the Dterm Cordless Terminal to the host telephone:
4.4
1.
Unplug the telephone line cord from the host telephone, and connect it to
the LINE IN jack.
2.
Using the telephone line cord supplied with the Dterm Cordless Terminal,
connect the LINE OUT jack to the host telephone jack.
Applying Power to the Base Unit
1.
Plug the AC Adapter cord into the AC Adapter input jack on the Base
Unit.
Use only the AC Adapter supplied with the Dterm Handset Cordless
Terminal.
2.
Plug the AC Adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
3.
Route the power cord where it does not create a trip hazard or where it
could become chafed and create a fire or other electrical hazards.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The AC Adapter furnished with this telephone can be equipped with a
polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This
plug fits into the power outlet only one way. When you cannot insert the
plug fully into the outlet, reverse the plug. When the plug still does not fit,
contact your facilities coordinator about replacing the obsolete plug. Do
not alter the shape of the blades of the polarized plug.
Line OUT to Host
Line IN from
Telephone Jack
Figure 13-7 Connecting the Base Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 8
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 5
INSTALLING Dterm ® HANDSET CORDLESS TERMINAL
5.1
Description
This Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal is a stand-alone telephone with direct
connection to a single port on the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU.
An ACA-U Unit adapter is required for this terminal.
Each terminal requires an ESI(8)-U( ) ETU port.
5.2
Selecting an Installation Location
Select a location for the DTP-16HC-1 TEL to avoid excessive heat or humidity.
The base unit should be placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120 Vac
outlet and within reach of the telephone line connection on the Electra Elite
IPK Multiline Terminal. Keep the base unit and the handset away from sources
of electrical noise (e.g., fluorescent lighting).
5.3
Connecting the Telephone Cord
The Base Unit of the DTP-16HC-1 TEL has two jacks on the back: LINE and
DC24V.
Observe the following warnings during installation:
J
J
J
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Using the telephone line cord supplied with the terminal, connect the LINE
jack to the telephone line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13-8 Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal
5.4
Applying Power to the Base Unit
1.
Power to charge the battery is supplied from the Telephone line.
2.
An ACA-U Unit must be installed in the optional DC24V jack on the Base
Unit to provide power for the Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal.
3.
Plug the ACA-U Unit into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
4.
The power level between the Handset and the Base is 10mW.
5.
When the ACA-U Unit is used, route the power cord where it does not
create a trip hazard or where it could become chafed and create a fire or
electrical hazard.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 10
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 6
INSTALLING A Dterm ® ANALOG CORDLESS TERMINAL
6.1
Description
The Dterm Analog Cordless terminal uses 2.4 GHz Digital Spread Spectrum
(DSS) Technology and is connected to an analog port using SLI(4)/(8)-U( )
ETU or OPX(2)-U( ) ETU, an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP, or an APR-U/AP(R)-R Unit
connected to the Multiline Terminal.
This terminal does not have an LCD display.
6.2
Selecting an Installation Location
Select a location to avoid excessive heat or humidity. The base unit should be
placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120 Vac outlet and within reach
of the telephone line connection on the Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal.
Keep the base unit and the handset away from sources of electrical noise (e.g.
fluorescent lighting).
Figure 13-9 Dterm Analog Cordless Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.3
Connecting the Telephone Cord
The DTR-1R-1 Dterm Analog Cordless terminal is connected to an analog port
on the KSU using one of the following: SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) or OPX(2)-U( )ETU,
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP, or APR-U Unit connected to the multiline terminal. A TEL
LINE jack is located on back of the base unit of the Dterm Analog Cordless
terminal.
Observe the following warnings during installation:
J
J
J
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Using the telephone line cord supplied with the Dterm Analog Cordless
terminal, connect the TEL LINE to the telephone line.
6.4
Applying Power to the Base Unit
1.
Plug the AC Adapter connector in the DC IN 9V jack.
2.
Route the power cord where it does not create a trip hazard or where it
could become chafed and create a fire or other electrical hazards.
3.
Plug the AC Adapter in a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
The AC Adapter furnished with this telephone should be equipped with a
polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This
plug fits into the power outlet only one way. If you cannot insert the plug
fully into the outlet, reverse the plug. When the plug still does not fit,
contact your facilities coordinator about replacing the obsolete plug. Do
not alter the shape of the blades of the polarized plug.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 12
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 7
Dterm ® PS II
7.1
Description
This terminal has wireless communication with a Zone Transceiver (ZT II) that
is directly connected to the system.
The Personal Station wireless terminal provides the features and benefits of a
desktop telephone without the inconvenience of having to remain close to the
desktop.
Figure 13-10 Dterm PS II Wireless Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 8
Dterm CORDLESS LITE II
8.1
Description
This cordless terminal achieves a maximum range of 50~150 feet for
transmitting and receiving in according with the highest specifications set by
the FCC and IC Part 15. Range is limited by environment, and too many
variables preclude a standard determination. The range quoted is for
reference as a means to compare with other range claims.
Radio interference can be caused by external sources such as TV, fluorescent
lighting, electrical storms, or other wireless devices. The base unit should not
be plugged into a circuit with a connection to a major appliance, and the
antenna should always be fully extended.
8.2
Installing the Dterm CORDLESS LITE II
8.2.1
Selecting a Location
Select a location for the Dterm CORDLESS LITE II terminal to avoid
excessive heat or humidity. The base unit of the terminal can be
placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120 Vac outlet and
telephone line jack. The base unit can also be mounted on a
standard wall plate using the wall mount adapter. Keep the base unit
and handset away from sources of electrical noise (motors,
fluorescent lighting, computers, PC monitor).
8.2.2
Controls and Indicators
Controls and Indicators are shown in the illustration on the next
page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 14
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
1
Headset Jack
9.
Conference (CONF) Key
2.
LCD Message Display
10. Transfer (TRANSFER)
Key
3.
Hold (HOLD) Key
11.
4.
Talk (TALK) Key
12. Redial (REDIAL) or
Desk/Cordless Softkey
Switch Key
5.
Numeric Keypad
13. F3
6.
F2
14. F4
7.
F1
15. Ringer/Volume (Ring/Vol)
Key
8.
Microphone
16. Mute (MUTE) Key
Channel (CH) Key
Figure 13-11 Dterm Cordless Lite II Controls and Indicators
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
17
18
19
20
21 22 23
17. Line Out
21. Power
18. Line In
22. Desk LED
19. Cordless
23. Desk
20. Cordless LED
Figure 13-11 Dterm Cordless Lite II Controls and Indicators (Continued)
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 16
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.3
Installation Precautions
To ensure optimum performance follow these guidelines:
J
J
J
J
8.4
Each base unit must be placed at least 15 feet apart.
The base antenna should be raised to the vertical position.
Always place the base unit on top of a desk or on higher shelves. Avoid
locations surrounded by metal surfaces.
Place the base away from any electrical component such as a PC,
monitor and other telephone.
Connecting the Telephone Cords
When connecting the telephone cords, observe the following precautions:
J
J
J
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never touch bare telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line
has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
To connect the telephone cords:
1.
Connect the cord from the telephone jack to the Base Unit LINE IN jack.
Line in From
Telephone Jack
Figure 13-12 Connecting Base Unit to the Telephone Jack
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Connect a qualified NEC digital Multiline Terminal to the LINE OUT jack.
Line Out
Dterm Series E
or Series i
Multiline Terminal
Figure 13-13 Connecting the Base Unit to the Multiline Terminal
8.5
Applying Power to the Charging Unit
The unique design of the telephone allows the user to place the handset in the
charging unit with or without the belt clip attached. The battery pack is
recharged automatically in the handset unit.
AC
Adapter”
Figure 13-14 Applying Power to the Charging Unit
Use only the supplied AC adapter for the charging unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 18
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
The AC adapter furnished with this telephone may be equipped with a
polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug
fits into the power outlet only one way. When you are unable to insert the plug
fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. Refer to Figure 13-15 Polarized
Plug.
When you cannot plug the AC adapter into the outlet, the outlet may need to
be replaced.
AC Adapter
Wide Blade
Figure 13-15 Polarized Plug
Route the power cord where it cannot create a trip hazard, or
where it could become chafed and create a fire or other
electrical hazards.
8.6
Wall Installation
8.6.1
Standard Wall Plate Mounting
The base unit can be mounted on standard wall plate. To attach the
wall mount stand to the base unit:
1.
Slide the wall mount stand into the notches at the top of the
base unit. Rotate the wall mount stand down and snap it into
place.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13-16 Attaching the Wall Mount Stand to the Base Unit
2.
Plug the AC adapter into the base unit.
3.
Place the AC adapter cord inside the molded channel of the
wall mount stand.
Figure 13-17 Placing the AC Adapter Cord In the Wall Mount Stand
4.
Plug one end of the short telephone cord (locally supplied) in
the LINE IN jack on the base unit. Plug one end of the NEC
digital multiline telephone into the LINE OUT jack. Place the
telephone cords inside the molded channels on the bottom of
the wall mount stand.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 20
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Plug the other end of the short telephone cord into the modular
wall jack in the center of the wall plate.
6.
Place the base unit on the posts of the wall plate and push
down until it is firmly seated.
Figure 13-18 Placing the Base Unit on the Posts of the Wall Plate
7.
Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
Do not use an outlet controlled by a wall switch.
Wide Blade
AC
Adapter
Figure 13-19 Plugging the AC Adapter into the AC Wall Outlet
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.7
Direct Wall Mounting
If a standard wall plate is not available, mount the telephone directly on the
wall. Before mounting the telephone, consider the following:
J
J
J
Select a location away from electrical cables, pipes, or other items
behind the mounting location that could cause a hazard when inserting
screws into the wall.
Make sure the wall material can support the weight of the base unit.
Use #10 screws with anchoring devices suitable for the wall material.
To mount the telephone:
1.
Insert two mounting screws 3-15/16 inches apart. Allow about 3/16 of an
inch between the wall and screw heads for mounting the telephone.
Figure 13-20
Inserting Screws into the Wall for Wall Mounting the
Telephone
2.
Plug in and secure the AC adapter.
3.
Plug the AC adapter into the base unit.
4.
Plug one end of the short telephone cord in the LINE In JACK on the
base unit. Then plug an Electra Elite IPK multiline terminal line in the
LINE OUT jack. Place the telephone cords inside the molded channels
on the bottom of the wall mount stand.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 22
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13-21 Placing the Telephone Cords in the Wall Mount Stand
5.
Place the base unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it
is firmly seated.
Figure 13-22 Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall
6.
Plug the other end of the short telephone cord into a telephone wall jack.
7.
Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet. Refer to Figure
13-19 Plugging the AC Adapter into the AC Wall Outlet on page 13-21.
Do not use an outlet controlled by a wall switch.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.8
Charging Unit Wall Mounting
The charging unit can be wall mounted. Before installing, consider the
following:
J
J
J
Select a location away from electrical cables, pipes, or items behind the
mounting location that could cause a hazard when inserting screws.
Make sure the wall material can support the weight of the charging unit.
Use #10 screws with anchoring devices suitable for the wall material.
To mount the charging unit:
1.
Insert two mounting screws one inch apart. Allow about 3/16 of an inch
between the wall and screw heads for mounting the telephone.
TOP
3/16 in.
1 3/16 in.
Figure 13-23 Inserting Screws for Wall Mounting
2.
Plug the AC adapter into the charging unit. Wrap the AC adapter cord
around the strain relief.
Strain
Relief
Figure 13-24 Wrapping AC Adapter Cord Around the Strain Relief Clip
3.
Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 24
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.9
Attaching and Removing the Belt Clip
A belt clip can be used to attach the handset to a belt or pocket for convenient
portability.
1.
Slide the clip into the tab slots. Press firmly until it snaps into place. The
belt clip fits snugly on the handset.
Figure 13-25 Attaching the Belt Clip to the Handset
2.
To remove the clip, press the retaining clip in toward the belt clip blade
and slide the clip up at the same time.
Figure 13-26 Removing the Belt Clip
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.10
Installing the Handset Battery Pack
Before installing batteries, refer to Chapter 1 Specifications and Safety
Information, Chapter 1 Specifications and Safety Information on page 1-1.
Follow safety regulations when handling batteries.
1.
To remove the battery cover, press the latch and slide the cover down
and off the handset.
Figure 13-27 Removing the Battery Cover
2.
Slide the battery pack down into the handset.
It may be necessary to remove the old battery at this time.
Red
Black
White
Figure 13-28 Replacing the Battery Pack
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 26
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Replace the cover and slide it forward until it latches.
Figure 13-29 Replacing the Battery Cover
8.11
Charging the Handset Battery Pack
The rechargeable battery pack must be fully charged before using the Dterm
Cordless Lite II handset for the first time.
Charge the battery pack without interruption for five to eight hours.
1.
Place the handset in the slot of the charging unit.
2.
Make sure the CHARGE indicator lights. If the CHARGE LED does not
come on, check to see if the AC adapter is plugged in and that the
handset is making good contact with the charging contacts on the
charging unit.
8.12
The CHARGE LED lights red during and after charging the handset with
the battery.
Battery Hot Swap
The battery can be hot swapped while a conversation is taking place. The
battery must be changed within 20 seconds otherwise, connection will be lost.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.13
Low Battery Indications
The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery
condition. The indicators are different for standby mode and talk mode.
8.13.1
Standby Mode
The handset display turns on the
battery low icon. All LEDs are
turned off and LCD messages are
cleared. A battery low alert tone
will be emitted every 15 seconds
and lasts for three minutes.
8.13.2
lOW
Talk Mode
The handset display turns on the
battery low icon. All keys and
8085351840
functions are available. The battery
TALK
low alert tone will be emitted every
three seconds as long as
conversation continues. After
conversation is completed, the handset returns to the battery low
condition in standby mode.
When you receive the low battery indication, return the handset to the base
unit for charging or replace the handset battery pack with another charged
battery pack.
The following table indicates what occurs and the action to be taken during a
call or in standby mode when low battery indication is displayed.
Table 13-1 Low Battery
On a Call
In Standby Mode
When batt low is displayed:
Only the TALK key operates
None of the keys operate
Handset beeps once every three
seconds
Handset beeps every 15 seconds for
15 minutes
Action:
Complete the call as quickly as possible
Cannot make a call
Replace the battery pack within 20
seconds to continue a call
Replace the battery pack before
making another call
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 28
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.14
Cleaning the Battery Charge Contacts
To maintain a good charge, clean all charging contacts on the handset and
charging unit about once a month. Use a pencil eraser or other contact
cleaner. Do not use liquids or solvents.
Figure 13-30 Cleaning Battery Charge Contacts
8.15
Antenna
Before using the Cordless II telephone raise the antenna to the vertical
position as illustrated in Figure 13-31 Raising the Base Unit Antenna.
Figure 13-31 Raising the Base Unit Antenna
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.16
NEC Conference Max Plus
8.16.1
Dual Wireless Conferencing System
This dual (two conferencing pods) wireless conferencing system is
ideal for small conference rooms with up to eight participants. Max
Plus provides wireless One-Touch Conferencing convenience
without compromising audio quality or call security. Max Plus uses
either Worldwide Digital Cordless Telecommunications (WDCT) or
Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication (DECT) wireless
standards depending on the model.
Each pod contains a rechargeable battery pack with nickel metal
hydride batteries (7.2 Volts, 2200 mAh) that allows 12 hours of
continuous talk time. A Base Unit that is connected to a power
source and to the telephone service is required for operation of the
conferencing pods
Figure 13-32 NEC Conference Max Plus
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 30
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.16.2
8.16.3
Installing the Base Unit
1.
Connect the provided RJ-11 cable between the Base Unit and
the telephone jack.
2.
Connect the power cord to the Base Unit and plug it in an
electrical outlet.
3.
If desired, Connect a recording device to the 2.5mm audio jack.
Connecting And Charging Batteries
1.
Slide the cover off the battery compartment on the bottom of
one pod.
2.
Connect the battery pack plug in the port in the compartment
and install the battery pack.
3.
Slide the cover back in place.
4.
Connect the power supply/charger to the conferencing pod and
plug it in an electrical outlet.
5.
Charge batteries for 15 hours prior to first use.
Repeat steps 1~4 for the other pod.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.16.4
Keypad Functions
Refer to .
Table 13-2 Keypad Functions
Key
Function
ON/OFF key
(telephone icon)
Press to activate the telephone and access dial tone.
Press again to hang up and return to standby mode.
PHONEBOOK (book
icon)
Press to dial stored numbers. Press and hold two
seconds to enter Phonebook Edit mode.
REDIAL (circular arrow
icon)
Press once to dial the last number called. Press and
hold two seconds to enter Program mode.
CONFERENCE (three
person icon)
Press to dial the conferencing service provider. This
feature must be programmed.
FLASH (lightning flash
icon)
Press to enable call forwarding, call waiting, or threeway calling when supported by telephone service.
CLEAR ( vertical line
and left arrow icon)
Press to clear the last digit entered or press and hold
to clear all numbers.
Press to exit programming mode.
VOLUME (loud and
dim speaker icons)
Press during call to adjust call volume or press while
telephone is ringing or in standby mode to adjust
ringer volume.
MUTE (mike with
diagonal line icon)
8.16.5
Programming Options
To enter Programming mode, press and hold REDIAL until a
diamond arrow is displayed on the LCD. Then press the applicable
key and follow the instruction in Table 13-3 Programming Options.
Table 13-3 Programming Options
Menu Option
Ringer Melody
Dialing Mode
Key
Programming
1
Press REDIAL. The current melody selection
flashes. Press 1~5 to change melody. Press
REDIAL to save the selection.
2
Press REDIAL. The current dialing selection
flashes. Press 1 for tone or 2 for pulse. Press
REDIAL to save the selection.
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 32
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 13-3 Programming Options (Continued)
Menu Option
Key
Programming
3
Press REDIAL. The current duration flashes.
Press 1~5 to select duration as follows:
1 = 600 ms
2 = 300 ms
3 = 150 ms
4 = 100 ms
5 = 80 ms
Press REDIAL to save the selection.
Local Number,
4
Press REDIAL. Enter the telephone number
that you want displayed on the LCD in
standby mode. Press REDIAL to save the
number.
Conference,
5
Press REDIAL. Enter the telephone number
you want the conference key to dial. Press
REDIAL to save the number.
Service,
6
Press REDIAL. Enter the telephone number
you want the O key to dial. Press REDIAL to
save the number.
Flash Duration
CLEAR
,
8.16.6
Press to return the previous menu.
Press and hold to exit programming without saving changes.
Press and hold 1 to enter hyphen or , to enter a space in the number.
Press CLEAR before entering a new number.
Compliance
This product is in compliance with the following regulations and
requirements:
H
H
H
H
FCC Part 15/ICES-003
This product has been tested and complies with the limits for a
Class A digital device
FCC Part 68
US:FBIMT01B910158015 Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN):0.1B(ac)
Industry of Canada (IC)
IC: 1970A-158015: REN:0.1B(ac)
European
Council Directive 1999/5/EC
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
13 - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 34
Installing Cordless and Wireless Telephones
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 14
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 1
Introduction .................................................................................................. 14-1
Section 2
Operational Current and Voltage Checks .................................................. 14-1
Section 3
Operational Test Procedures ...................................................................... 14-2
3.1
General Information .................................................................................. 14-2
3.2
Section 4
Before Initializing ........................................................................... 14-2
3.2.1
Cable Connections .................................................................. 14-2
3.2.2
AC/DC Power .......................................................................... 14-2
3.2.3
Initialization Check .................................................................. 14-3
3.3
System Initialization ....................................................................... 14-3
3.4
After Initialization
......................................................................... 14-3
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 14-4
4.1
Remote Administration and Maintenance ................................................. 14-4
4.2
4.3
Problem Solving ............................................................................. 14-4
4.2.1
System Down .......................................................................... 14-4
4.2.2
Partial Operation ..................................................................... 14-4
4.2.3
Reset ....................................................................................... 14-4
Flowcharts ..................................................................................... 14-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
List Of tables
Chapter 14
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 14-1
Voltage Measurement ........................................................................................14-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
List of Tables
System Maintenance
Chapter 14
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
The technician can use this chapter to troubleshoot and diagnose problems during
and after system installation. The troubleshooting flow charts and general test
procedures aid the technician to identify possible causes of the problem by defining
the problem area.
Using the System Data Upload/Download feature, all System Programming and
Speed Dial data can be stored on disk for safe keeping. After all System
Programming is completed, it should be downloaded to a disk for backup. When
system memory fails, this data on the disk can be uploaded and the memory restored.
SECTION 2
OPERATIONAL CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CHECKS
The effectiveness of this maintenance section depends on the technician. Due to
external factors, the technician should not make any assumptions. For example, do
not assume that a new power supply used to replace another power supply is working
properly. Check the output of the power supply with a Volt meter.
The ESI(8)-U( ) ETU allows the measurement of +5V and –24V. This ETU can be
used in the expansion KSU for the power output measurements. Refer to Table 14-1
Voltage Measurement. Before the technician can troubleshoot, the correct tools must
be available. Some of these are listed below:
J
J
J
Digital or analog multimeter that can read DC and AC current and voltage and
DC resistance.
Test Set (lineman) that has termination and monitor modes and DTMF and DP
dialing.
Hand tools such as:
H
H
H
Screwdrivers (flat and Phillips head)
Pliers (long nose and diagonal)
Punch down tool
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
OPERATIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
3.1
General Information
When an Electra Elite IPK system is first powered up, an initialization is
performed. During this process the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU, located in the Basic
KSU, scans each interface slot to determine the hardware configuration used.
This information is stored in the resident system program memory with the
system default values. This section provides test procedures that are used
before, during, and after the initialization process.
3.2
Before Initializing
The technician must follow these steps before initializing the system.
3.2.1
Cable Connections
All wiring for power supplies or flat cable connectors should be
checked for solid connections.
3.2.2
AC/DC Power
Check all power with an AC/DC multimeter. (Refer to Table 14-1
Voltage Measurement.) Run this test with only the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
and the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU installed.
Table 14-1 Voltage Measurement
Voltages
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
+5V
–-24V
Tolerance
Measuring Points
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
+5 ± 0.25V
–24 ± 0.25V
TP1
TP2
TP3
+5V
GND
–24V
AC Voltage (117 Vac)
Line to Neutral
Line to Conduit Ground
Neutral to Conduit Ground
117 Vac ± 15%
117 Vac ± 15%
.05 Vac (maximum)
AC Terminal Strip
Line L to N
Line L to G
Line N to G
Ring Generator (SLT)
70 ~ 120 Vac @ 20 Hz
(Refer to .)
Across Tip and Ring of Ringing
SLT
CO Line
Off-hook line current
25 ~ 50 mA
In series with Tip side of the CO
line at the MDF
Ring voltage may be lower if the meter measures only 60 Hz signals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 2
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.3
Initialization Check
To determine if the system is initializing correctly, only the Basic
KSU, CPUI( )-U( ) ETU, one ESI(8)-U( ) ETU, and terminals should
be installed on the system. After initialization, all the terminals
assigned to the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU can be used for internal calls to one
another. (By default, these stations are assigned station numbers
100~107).
3.3
System Initialization
After the steps described in Section 3.2 Before Initializing are performed and
verified, the entire system should be initialized.
With power OFF, all interface and option cards can be installed in the basic
KSU. The technician can then power up the system to perform a First
Initialization. After the initialization, each station display shows default time
and date indications.
For example:
3.4
12:00 AM WED 1
After Initialization
Ensure the battery on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU is connected
to CN4 on the CPU.
Before any programming is attempted, connect the battery on the CPUI( )-U( )
ETU to CN4 on the CPU. This prevents loss of previously programmed data if
the system loses power.
Check all ETU slots in software to ensure the initialization process scanned
the installed hardware correctly.
A general system operation check should be performed using default values
prior to system programming.
After all previous steps are performed and any problems corrected, system
programming is complete.
After System Programming is finished, the technician should perform a
Second Initialization. Performing the First Initialization a second time causes
all programming memory to be lost. Second Initialization refreshes the system
RAM without losing any memory.
This completes the installation procedure for the Electra Elite IPK system. The
technician should check the operation of each Multiline Terminal to ensure the
system is working properly.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1
Remote Administration and Maintenance
The Maintenance and Diagnostics feature can remotely access the Electra
Elite IPK system for maintenance and diagnostics. The remote PC and the
system are connected via a modem (built-in or external).
4.2
Problem Solving
To find the cause, consider all problem symptoms carefully. As each aspect
of the problem is considered, the technician is guided to a probable solution.
The problem must be defined as accurately as possible, so that the most
efficient steps to the solution can be taken. Flowcharts in the next section
help define the problem.
4.2.1
System Down
This term describes one of the following situations:
H
H
H
4.2.2
No access to internal dial tone on any Multiline Terminal or
Single Line Telephone is installed.
No LED indication, display indication, or Multiline Terminal is
installed.
No system tones are generated.
Partial Operation
This term refers to any situation that cannot be completely described
under the System Down conditions.
4.2.3
Reset
At times, the station and/or the ETU must be reset. The following
resets are used in the system:
H
H
Terminal Reset – Unplug the station line cord from the station
and then plug it back into the station.
ETU Reset – Press the RESET switch.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 4
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.3
Flowcharts
Condition
Flowchart
Page
1. No Internal Dial Tone to any
Multiline Terminal or SLT
A1
14-7
2. No LED or Display Indications
on any Multiline Terminal
A2
14-8
1. Radio Frequency Interference
B1
14-9
2. No or Intermittent CO/PBX Ring
C1
14-10
3. Call Dropping
C2
14-11
4. No Outside Dial Tone Access
C3
14-12
5. CO/PBX Dialing Problem:
Cannot Dial Out on CO
C4
14-13
1. Multiline Terminal Function
D1
14-14
2. Multiline Terminal Ringing
D2
14-15
3. Multiline Terminal Dial Tone
Access
D3
14-16
1. No Dial Tone Access on SLT
E1
14-17
2. No Ringing on SLT
E2
14-18
3. No Dial Access to SLT Features
E3
14-19
E.
Low Volume Problems
F1
14-20
F.
External Paging Problems
G1
14-21
G.
SMDR Output Problems
No Call Accounting System
H1
14-22
A. System Down
B.
C.
D.
Partial Operations
Multiline Terminal Problems
Single Line Telephone Problems
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A1
No internal Dial Tone to any Multiline Terminal or SLT
All DC
Voltages
Correct?
Incorrect or No DC Voltage
Check AC Input
Power.
Good
Turn system Off. Disconnect all
connectors and remove all printed circuit
boards except CPUI( )-U( ) ETU and the
first installed ESI(8)-U( ) ETU in the basic
KSU associated with the programming
station.
Dial Tone
Build system, one card at
a time until problem
reappears. Replace
defective card.
Turn system On.
Dial Tone on Multiline
Terminal on 1st
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU?
Correct AC Power
Problem.
AC Power?
Good
Replace
Fuse(s).
Bad
PSU Fuses
F1 and F2
good?
Good
Replace Corresponding
Power Supply.
No Dial Tone
Reset ESI(8)-U10. If trouble
persists, replace ESI(8)-U( ) ETU.
Bad
Yes
Problem
Solved?
Done.
No
Yes
Remove all ETUs but
one ESI, and retest.
Dial tone?
No
1. If problem not solved, perform First Initialization
and test. If trouble persists go to step 2.
2. Replace CPUB( )-U10 and test system using
default program.
Build system
one card at a
time and
replace bad
ETU(s).
Yes
Problem
Solved?
No
Replace KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 6
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
A2
No LED or Display Indications on any Multiline Terminal
All DC
Voltages
OK?
Incorrect or No DC Voltage
Check AC Input
Power.
Good
Terminate one Multiline Terminal from
the basic KSU, 1st ESI(8)-U10
(Programming Station) directly to MDF
and test.
Yes
Check
Station
Cabling.
No
Terminal
Indications?
Correct AC Power
Problem.
Turn system Off. Disconnect
connectors; remove all ETUs
except CPUB( )-U10 and first
installed ESI(8)-U10 in basic
KSU, associated with the
programming station.
Bad
AC Power?
Good
Replace
Fuse(s).
Bad
PSU Fuses
F1 and F2
Good?
Good
No Indication
Reset ESI(8)-U10. If trouble
persists, replace ESI(8)-U( ).
Replace Corresponding
Power Supply.
Terminal
Installed
Indication?
Yes
Correct
Indication
Done.
Problem
Solved?
No
Correct
Indications?
None
1. If problem not solved, perform First Initialization
and test. If trouble persists go to step 2.
2. Replace CPUB( )-U10 and test system using
default program.
Rebuild System one card at
a time. If problem reappears
replace defective card(s).
Build system
one card at a
time and
replace bad
ETU(s).
Remove all ETUs but
one ESI, and retest.
Yes
Problem
Solved?
No
Replace KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
B1
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
Is interference only on outside calls
or anytime station is off-hook?
Remove one CO line
at MDF and test using
standard SLT.
On CO calls only
RFI Event?
Multiline Terminal off-Hook
No
RFI on CO
Lines?
Check cable for the
affected terminal(s).
Yes
More than 1-pair
Twisted
No
Twisted
pair?
Ground all unused
pairs at MDF.
No
RFI Cleared?
Cable with 1-pair twisted
pair cable.
No
RFI Cleared?
Yes
Yes
End
Inform
Telco.
End
Follow the steps below, one at a time, and test after each step.
1. Place a 0.01 microfarad ceramic capacitor (0.001 microfarad for FM Interference)
across receiver and transmitter elements in the Multiline Terminal handset.
2. Add a 0.01 microfarad ceramic capacitor from one transmit lead to one receive lead.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 8
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
C1
No or Intermittent CO/PBX Ring
Test to see if problem occurs
on one line or several lines.
Several Lines
One Line
Check Memory Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 to
ensure that line is programmed to ring
on an installed station.
See if problem occurs on
all Multiline Terminals
Assigned Ringing.
Occurrence?
All Terminals
Yes
Occurrence?
Ringing
Assigned?
Not all terminals
Replace one terminal
that has problems.
No
Program ring assignment
and
. test.
Still have
Problem?
Cleared
Yes
End.
No
Corrected?
Program station for off-hook and
day/night ring, deny DND feature,
Not Cleared and test again.
Yes
No
See if affected lines
can be isolated to One
COI(8)-U10 ETU.
Corrected?
Done.
Return defective Multiline
Terminal for repair.
Yes
Reset/ Replace
COI(8)-U10 ETU.
1 COI(8)-U10
ETU?
No
Perform the following tests:
1. Measure CO ring voltage with AC meter
(100 Vac 20 Hz) at the MDDF.
2. Perform Second Initialization.
3. Place external ringer in front of system on
worst case CO line. Check if customer
can hear external ringer at times when the
system does not detect ringing on this line.
4. If problem is not solved, perform First
Initialization and replace CPUB( )-U10.
Test system using default program.
Check whether or not
affected lines can be
.
isolated
to one KSU.
Yes
No
Corrected?
Done.
No
Yes
Basic KSU?
Replace Ribbon cable
between KSUs.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C2
Call Dropping
See if problem exists
on all Lines.
No
Yes
Calls
dropped on
all lines?
No
Yes
All
lines at same
time?
Check DC voltages with
a meter and AC power
with a line disturbance
analyzer.
Check outside line key
after call drops.
On
Check COI(8)-U10 LED.
CO
Line Key
LED Status?
Off
Have Telco check line circuits.
Increase Automatic Release
Signal Detection Time. Refer to
Memory Block 3-40.
Off
COI(8)-U10
LED Status?
1. Perform Second Initialization.
If trouble persists go to step 2.
2. Replace COI(8)-U10 ETU. Test.
On
Have Telco check
Line circuit(s).
No
Problem
Solved?
Perform First Initialization.
Replace CPUB( )-U10, and
test system using default
program.
Yes
Return Defective ETU
for repair.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 10
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
C3
No Outside Dial Tone Access
SLT
Multiline
Terminal or SLT?
Yes
Check for Internal
Dial tone.
No
All
Terminals
affected?
No
Both
Internal
Dial Tone?
Check for Internal
Dial tone.
Yes
Check for Internal
Dial tone.
No
Internal
Dial Tone?
1. Reset terminal
and test.
2. Replace terminal
OR
Reset ESI(8)-U10
ETU and test.
3. Replace ESI(8)-U10
and test.
Internal
Dial Tone?
Yes
No
1. Perform Second
Initialization.
2. Reset and test
SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU.
3. Replace and test
SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU.
Go to Flowchart
A1.
Leave an SLI(4)/(8)-U( )
ETU and an ESI(8)-U( )
ETU installed. Go to
Flowchart A1.
Yes
Test for CO dial
tone at MDF with
test set, and check
CO wiring.
No
Yes
Check SW 1~8 on COI(8)-U10
ETU for proper switch setting.
1. Check Memory Blocks 4-07, 4-08,
and 4-19 for Station Restriction.
2. Check Memory Block 4-09 for
Telephone to Tenant Assignment.
CO
Dial Tone?
Have Telco
check lines.
Check conduit and frame ground to
system for ground start trunks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reset and test; replace COI(8)-U10 ETU and test. If trouble persists go to step 2.
Perform Second Initialization. If trouble persists go to step 3.
Perform First Initialization. If trouble persists go to step 4.
Replace CPUB( )-U10 ETU, and test using default program.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C4
CO/PBX Dialing Problem: Cannot Dial Out on CO
Check CO lines at MDF
with test set to see if they
are DTMF or DP.
No
SLT
problem
only?
Yes
Check Memory
Block 4-95.
DP
DTMF
DTMF
Line type
program?
DP or
DTMF?
DP
Check CO lines at MDF
with test set to see if they
are DTMF or DP.
Check Memory Block 3-92
Selection to ensure lines are
programmed for DP.
DTMF
DP
DP or
DTMF?
Programmed
for?
DP
DP or
DTMF?
DTMF
DP
DTMF
Check CO lines at MDF
with test set to see if they
are DTMF or DP.
Program lines for DTMF.
Program lines for DP.
Program as DP.
Monitor Line with test set, and
verify if system is sending digits.
Yes
No
Digits Sent?
1. If lines are DTMF, increase the DTMF
duration in Memory Block 3-15.
2. If lines are DP, choose 10 or 20 pps
option in Memory Block 3-92.
3. Check off-hook CO line current.
1. Reset COI(8)-U1- ETU. If trouble persists,
go to next step.
2. Replace COI(8)-U1- ETU, and test.
3. Perform Second Initialization, and test.
4. Perform First Initialization, and test.
5. Replace CPUB( )-U10 ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 12
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
D1
Multiline Terminal Function Problems
Yes
All
terminals?
Go to Flowchart A2.
No
Check Memory Block 7-2 for
correct Station Assignment.
No
Reassign.
Assignment
correct?
Yes
Yes
Perform Multiline Terminal Self Test:
1. Unplug terminal line cord.
2. Hold down * and # together and plug in the line card.
3. Press each terminal key to test tones, LEDs, and key contacts.
4. Return terminal on-line by taking handset off-hook and then
return to on-hook.
Problem
solved?
End.
No
Reset and test. Replace defective
terminal, and test.
No
Yes
Send terminal
in for repair.
Connect terminal directly
to MDF, and test.
Problem
solved?
No
Reset and test. Replace
faulty ESI(8)-U10 ETU.
No
Yes
Send ESI(8)-U10 ETU in
for repair.
Problem
solved?
Problem
solved?
Yes
Replace station cable.
1. Perform Second Initialization, and test.
2. Perform First Initialization, and test.
3. Replace CPUB( )-U10 ETU, and test using
default program.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D2
Multiline Terminal Ringing Problems
Intermittent
Problem?
Go to Flowchart C1.
Consistent
Check to see if problem occurs on CO or
internal calls (including station-to-station
or transferred calls).
Internal
CO
Check to see if station is
call forwarded or in DID.
Problem?
Check Memory Block 4-12.
Both
Yes
No
Station in
Call Forward
or DID?
Yes
Wrong
Assignment?
Check and adjust
volume control, and
test again.
Program
again.
No
Cancel
feature.
Yes
Problem
Solved?
Done.
Check Memory Blocks
4-01 and 4-02 for ring
assignment.
Yes
No
Wrong
Assignment?
Reset/replace station,
then reset or replace
ESI(8)-U10 ETU.
Program
again.
No
Yes
Problem
Solved?
Reset/replace station,
then reset or replace
ESI(8)-U10 ETU.
Yes
Send terminal
in for repair.
No
No
Problem
Solved?
Done.
1. Perform Second Initialization, and test.
2. Perform First Initialization, and test.
3. Replace CPUB( )-U10 ETU, and test
using default program.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 14
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
D3
Multiline Terminal Dial Tone Access Problems
Check to see if problem occurs
on CO or Internal call.
CO
Go to Flowchart C3.
Internal
CO or
Internal dial
tone?
Go to Flowchart A1.
Both
Go to Flowchart A1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
E1
No Dial Tone Access on SLT
Check Memory Block 7-1 for
SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU assignments.
Yes
End.
No
Problem
solved?
Assignment
correct?
Assign Again.
No
Yes
Both
No CO
or internal
dial tone?
Replace SLT, and test.
Go to Flowchart C3.
Check CO line dial tone on a
Multiline Terminal.
Good
Yes
No
CO
Internal
Problem
solved?
Replace SLT, and test.
Bad
Go to Flowchart C3.
Yes
Problem
solved?
Repair SLT.
No
1. Reset SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU, and test.
2. Replace SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU, and test.
3. Perform Second Initialization, and test.
Yes
Done.
Problem
solved?
No
Leave one SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU, one ESI(8)-U10 ETU, and
CPUB( )-U10 ETU installed. Go to Flowchart A1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 16
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
E2
Ringing Problem on SLT
Replace SLT.
Yes
Problem
solved?
SLT defective.
No
Check to see if ringing
problem is intermittent.
No
Check to see if SLT is
call forwarded.
Intermittent
Problem?
Yes
Yes
No
Cancel call
Forwarding.
Call
Forward?
Check SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU for
ring voltage output with AC
meter.
Pass
Check BLF indication
for station.
Fail
RSG Test?
Replace SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU.
Busy
BLF
Indication?
Terminate SLT on MDF.
Idle
1. Reset/replace SLI(4)/(8)-U10 ETU, and test.
2. Perform Second Initialization, and test; then
perform First Initialization and test.
3. Change CPUB( )-U10 ETU, and test
using default program.
Busy
Check MDF
connection.
Idle
BLF
Indication?
Check/replace
station cable.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
E3
No Dial Access to Features on SLT
Check to see if SLT can access
internal or CO dial tone.
No
Access dial
tone?
Go to Flowchart E1.
Yes
Check Memory Block 4-17
for feature assignment.
Good
No
Feature
allowed?
Program C.O.S. to allow
feature, and test.
Done.
Yes
Bad
Check Memory Blocks 1-1-46,
1-1-47, and 1-1-48 for access
assignment.
No
Correct
Access Code?
Recheck feature access with
correct Access Code.
Yes
Recheck SLT features operation
selection to verify procedure for
feature.
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 18
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
F1
Low Volume Problems
Yes
No
All lines?
No
Yes
Yes
Bridge on
system CO
line?
All stations?
Remove it.
No
Move suspected bad line to
good COI(8)-U10 ETU port.
Move good line to original
COI(8)-U10 ETU port.
Replace
Multiline SLT.
Run a dB level test at DMARK
on lines with 1 kHz test tone. No
less than -8dB at MDF is
required.
Yes
Port
Line
Problem
on port or
line?
Check line with dB
meter and/or contact
Telco.
Reset or replace
COI(8)-U10, and
test again.
Less than
-8 dB?
Report Problem
to Telco.
No
Replace COI(8)-U10 ETU.
Yes
Problem
solved?
Done.
No
1. Perform Second Initialization, and test.
2. Perform First Initialization, and test with
default program.
3. Replace CPUB( )-U10 ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
G1
External Paging Problems
No
Yes
Amplifier
provided?
Install amplifier.
Place Test Set on output of paging
at ECR-U10 ADP with all external
wiring removed.
Yes
External amplifier or
wiring is defective.
External
page heard on
test set?
No
Check Memory Blocks 1-1-46, 1-1- 47,
and 1-1-48 for correct access code
(external) for paging.
No
Access Code
correct?
Yes
Pass
1. Reset/replace ECR-U10 ADP, and test.
2. Perform Second Initialization, and test; then
perform First Initialization and test.
3. Replace CPUB( )-U10 ETU, and test
using default program.
Retest using
correct access
code.
Done.
Fail
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 20
System Maintenance
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H1
SMDR Output Problems (No Call Accounting System)
No
Yes
Incoming
problem only?
No
Printer
RS-232C
compatible?
Check Memory Block 1-5-26
for print selection.
Yes
Compare each parameter between
printer and MIFM-U10 Unit:
1. Baud rate 300~4800
2. ASCII serial output
3. 7- or 8-bit word
4. 1 or 2 stop bits
5. Even, Odd, or no Parity
SMDR requires RS-232C
connection.
Install MIFM-U10 in
Option or IF1~4 slot.
Yes
No
MIFM-U10
in correct
slot?
No
Parameter
match?
Set correct parameters.
Yes
On
LED On
Off
LED1 on
MIFM
ON or Off?
If On/Off switch on MIFM-U10 is
off, turn it on.
Test for proper
operation.
LED Off
1. Refer to Installation Service Manual for
RS-232C cable connection.
2. Perform printer self test.
3. Use a breakout box, and ensure that pins
4 and 20 are logic high from printer to
MIFM-U10.
Yes
No
Replace printer or
modify cable.
Check MIFM-U1
in another slot.
On
Recheck in
original slot.
LED1 on
MIFM
ON or Off?
Off
1. Perform second Initialization.
if LED is off:
2. Replace MIFM-U10.
if LED is off:
3. Replace CPUB( )-U10.
High?
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
14 - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
14 - 22
System Maintenance
Glossary of Abbreviations
Appendix A
___________________________________________________________________________________
The following table includes common abbreviations used throughout this document
that are listed in alphabetical order.
Abbreviations
Definition
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
Provides a cost-effective method for supervising incoming telephone
traffic and associated staff activity.
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
Replaces the normal traffic signal when a maintenance alarm indication
is activated. An AIS signal is transmitted downstream to indicate an
upstream failure was detected.
BHCA
Business-Hour Call Attempts
The number of times a telephone call is attempted during the busiest
hour of the day.
BNC
Bayonet-Neill-Concelman
Connector for slim coaxial cables. This is similar to ones used with
Ethernet.
BPV
Bipolar Violation
Indicates the presence of two consecutive one bits of the same polarity
on a T carrier line.
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
ISDN subscriber interface. BRI has two bearer B-channels at 64 Kbps
per second and a D-channel at 16 Kbps per second. The bearer
B-channels are provided for PCM voice, video conferencing, group 4
facsimile machines, and other similar types of transmissions. The data
D-channel is used to bring in information about incoming calls and take
out information about outgoing calls. BRI can also be used to access
slow-speed data networks such as videotex and packet switched
networks.
BRI has two standards:
U Interface for 2-wire
T Interface for 4-wire
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
A-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Abbreviations
Definition
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRC is a common method to establish that the data is correctly received
in data communications. This process checks the integrity of a data
block. A CRC character is generated at the transmission end. Its value
depends on the hexadecimal value of the number of ones in the data
block. The transmitting device calculates the value and appends it to
the data block. The receiving end makes a similar calculation and
compares its results with the added character. If there is a difference,
the recipient requests retransmission.
DN
Directory Number
Unique number (telephone number) assigned to each telephone or data
terminal.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
An international plan to migrate the public switched network to the
universal implementation of standard digital technology.
LBO-Line Build
Out
A combination of induction, capacitance, and resistance is added to a
cable pair to increase its electrical length by a desired level of
impedance and loss characteristics.
Local Loop
Back
An internal process where data goes through the entire chip during
Transmit and Receive cycles.
Line Loop Back
Allows the user to check Transmission Line Continuity.
LSA
Line Synchronization Alarm Detection
An FT1 trunk looses frame synchronization. Frame synchronization
occurs when a given digital channel (time slot) at the receiving end is
aligned with the corresponding channel (time slot) of the transmitting
end as it occurs in the received signal. Usually extra bits (frame
synchronization bits) are inserted at regular intervals to indicate the
beginning of a frame and for use in frame synchronization.
LCR
Least Cost Routing
A feature that automatically chooses the lowest cost telephone line to
the destination.
OOF
Out-of-Frame Condition
During FT1 transmission, an Out-of-Frame error occurs when two or
more of four consecutive framing bits are in error. When this condition
exists for more than 2.5 seconds a Red alarm is sent by the OOF
detecting unit. Equipment that receives this Red alarm responds with a
Yellow alarm.
OPX
Off-Premise Extension
A telephone that is located in a different office or building from the main
phone system. The OPX is connected by a dedicated telephone line.
This extension has all abilities of the telephone system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-2
Glossary of Abbreviations
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Abbreviations
Definition
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
ISDN subscriber interface. PRI has 23 bearer B-channels at 64 Kbps
per second and a D-channel at 64 Kbps per second. The bearer
B-channels are provided for PCM voice, video conferencing, group 4
facsimile machines, and other similar types of transmissions. The data
D-channel is used to bring in information about incoming calls and take
out information about outgoing calls. PRI can also be used to access
slow-speed data networks such as videotex and packet switched
networks.
PRI has two standards:
U Interface for 2-wire
T Interface for 4-wire
SLIP
Serial Line Internet Protocol
An Internet protocol is used to run IP over serial lines such as telephone
circuits. IP is the most important of all protocols on which the Internet is
based. This protocol allows a packet to traverse multiple networks
before it reaches its final destination.
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
A feature that collects and records information on outgoing calls by
station.
SPID
Service Profile Identifier
ISDN service is ordered with certain parameters. The SPID is an 8- to
12-digit number that uniquely identifies the service ordered. The
telephone company assigns an SPID for every phone number. Each
ISDN BRI line usually has two telephone numbers.
The SPID is a label identifier that points to a particular location on the
telephone company central office memory that stores the details of the
ISDN services ordered. This number is necessary for the operation of
the ISDN telephone, fax, or PC software. Without this number, ISDN
services cannot be accessed.
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
The ability to carry normal telephone-style voice over an IP-based
internet with POTS-like functionality, reliability, and voice quality.
The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connects to the LAN
IP network through a VoIP gateway. Digitized speech is transported
through IP packets and can include real-time conversation or voice mail.
The IP network can be public or private, and voice transport can be
telephone-to-telephone, computer-to-telephone, or computer-tocomputer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
A-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-4
Glossary of Abbreviations
YSTEM HARDWARE MANUAL
S
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Document Revision 4
(Release 4000/4500)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising